Testimoni Perwira Jepang soal Proklamasi: Tan Malaka , Sekolah Maeda dan Detik-detik yang menegangkan

_

I) THE INDEPENDENCE PROCLAMATION IN JAKARTA (Indonesia Dokuritsu Kakumei, pp. 186-221)
Unforgettable People

Nishijima Shigetada

<b>

TAN MALAKA DURING PROCLAMATION <b>

The impression of my first meeting with Tan Malaka, one day immediately after the declaration of independence, is still deeply inscribed on my memory. Merah putih flags were flying in the town and the exultation of people was growing day by day. The Japanese, in contrast, were left anxious and uneasy because of the defeat of their fatherland and the uncertainty about their future. I myself was in the same mood, seeking desperately for some psychological security. For this reason, I often visited Subardjo. Among the Japanese in Indonesia I may have been rather fortunate to have had many Indonesian friends. Once I was introduced to an Indonesian by Subardjo. I remember that the Indonesian looked tough, and his gold teeth glittered. Subardjo asked me whether I knew who the man was, but I could not hazard a guess. Anyway, we began to talk. I was immediately surprised by the man’s abundant knowledge and consistency of thought. It was apparent from his comments on revolution and the political structure after revolution that he was well acquainted with Marxism. Moreover, he talked about the strategy of mass movement, of propaganda, and of warfare. I was deeply impressed by his arguments because they were firmly based on an analysis of the international situation. I thought, ‘How could a man who looks like a peasant analyse things so sharply?’ This was no simple man. After we had talked for more than two hours, Subardjo said, ‘Mr Nishijima! This is the real Tan Malaka!’ Needless to say I was first very astonished and then enormously excited. I shook his hand again warmly.

* * *

With the outbreak of the Sino-Japanese war, Tan Malaka had moved to Singapore, taking a job as teacher in a Chinese school. When the Greater East Asia War broke out and Singapore fell into the hands of the Japanese, he smuggled himself to Medan, in North Sumatra, with the help of a Chinese friend. Later, he sneaked into the slums of Jakarta, where he lived for about a year, indulging his taste for reading and writing, without disclosing his name. Suffering from financial difficulties, he found a job at the Bayu coal mine as a clerk.

( While working there he travelled around Java, including Jakarta, under the alias of Husein. He visited Jakarta as representative of a group in the Bayu area, in order to attend a youth conference to be held there in August 1945, but the conference was banned by the Japanese.

At the Japanese surrender, Tan Malaka appeared at Subardjo’s residence. He also visited Chaerul Saleh (later Vice-Premier), one of the leaders of the youth group at that time, but he did not disclose his name. It is quite understandable in view of his long experience as a refugee that Tan Malaka did not trust people. He also visited Sukarni, * another youth leader, and even stayed at his house at the same time that members of the youth group took Sukarno and Hatta into custody at Rengasdengklok. Tan Malaka neither revealed his name to Sukarni nor participated in the abduction of the two leaders. He revealed himself for the first time when he called on Subardjo. Although Subardjo had met Tan Malaka in the Netherlands in 1922, he did not realize that this was the Tan Malaka and for a time took him to be Iskaq Tjokroadisoerjo (who later became a leader of the Indonesian Nationalist Party, and rose to be Minister of the Interior and Minister of the Economy), since the two looked alike. Even when Tan Malaka revealed himself, Subardjo could not at first believe it.

Tan Malaka was evidently sought after by the Japanese Army during the occupation, and it was rumoured several times that he had been arrested. However, there was no substance to such rumours. On each occasion, the Japanese arrested a man as Tan Malaka, only to find that he was not. It was also rumoured that Tan Malaka had been arrested by the Beppan [the Special Task Team] of the 16th Army, and that he escaped from jail by breaking the roof.

During the occupation I discussed Marxist ideas with Indonesians acquainted with them, and we exchanged views. Indonesians were generally reluctant to talk of Marxism and socialism for fear of being accused by the Kempeitai, but they

____________________
*     Sukarni ( 1916-71) was born in Blitar, East Java, and while still a schoolboy became involved in the nationalist party Partindo and in Indonesia Muda, whose national president he became for a time in 1934. After a period of arrest he went underground in the late thirties, and appears to have become a contact for Tan Malaka’s PARI party. He was arrested again by the Dutch in 1940, released by the Japanese, and worked during the occupation in Japanese propaganda agencies. He and Chaerul Saleh became the pemuda (youth) proteges of the Japanese propaganda chief Shimizu, and were well placed at the end of the occupation as national youth leaders. After independence Sukarni became the leader of the Tan Malakainspired Murba party, and later an ambassador to Peking. )

reated me as an exception. Some Indonesians close to me broke the taboo rather boldly. One of these was Iwa Kusuma Sumantri (later Minister of Defence). * Although Iwa was not a Marxist, he was well versed in Marxism because he had lived in Moscow as a student and had a Russian wife. He once told me, ‘After World War I, the terms “workers” and “peasants” were in constant use. Since then, office workers have come to constitute a large proportion of the working class. In other words, the substance of the working class has been changing considerably. This trend will be accelerated after this war. Even in Russia, a young generation is emerging which criticizes capitalism without having experienced it’.

I felt that what Iwa said was quite true. When I had been involved in the socialist movement in Japan, the unions of manual labourers were the major force in the movement, and the unions of office workers were rather ancillary. Now, however, the unions of office workers are the major force in the movement. Even in Russia, the centre of the socialist movement, a younger generation had grown up who knew of capitalism only in theoretical terms, and they were expected to guide the communist leaders of Japan, a capitalist country, and of Italy, where the leaders had a long experience of the movement. As a natural result, rifts appeared between the younger generation of Russians and the [communist] leaders of Japan and Italy. I had been vaguely aware of this, but Iwa’s logical explanation helped clarify my thoughts.

When I discussed Iwa’s views with Tan Malaka, he listened to me closely, and kindly answered my questions, giving his own views. Although I did not usually reveal my weakness, I was unable to conceal the great shock caused me by the Japanese surrender. I explained my feelings frankly to Tan Malaka: ‘We are defeated. Nothing can be done now. I do not want to go back to Japan. In short, I am completely confused’.

Tan Malaka listened to me, then answered slightly reprovingly, ‘I met Sano Manabu through my activities in the Comintern. I also know Ho Chi Minh and have argued with Stalin. Thus I believe I understand the position of other countries and the international situation. As far as the independence of Indonesia is concerned, I don’t think it will be achieved before I die. Independence cannot be achieved merely by a declaration, but must be substantiated by an

(
____________________
*     Iwa Kusuma Sumantri ( 1899-1972), a Sundanese, was born in Tjiamis and obtained a Leiden law degree in 1925. He was active in left-wing politics while in Europe and published in Moscow a Marxist tract, The Peasant’s Movement in Indonesia ( 1926) under the pseudonym S. Dingley. Highly suspect by the Dutch from the time of his return to a Medan law practice, he was imprisoned in 1929 and released only in 1941. )

reated me as an exception. Some Indonesians close to me broke the taboo rather boldly. One of these was Iwa Kusuma Sumantri (later Minister of Defence). * Although Iwa was not a Marxist, he was well versed in Marxism because he had lived in Moscow as a student and had a Russian wife. He once told me, ‘After World War I, the terms “workers” and “peasants” were in constant use. Since then, office workers have come to constitute a large proportion of the working class. In other words, the substance of the working class has been changing considerably. This trend will be accelerated after this war. Even in Russia, a young generation is emerging which criticizes capitalism without having experienced it’.

I felt that what Iwa said was quite true. When I had been involved in the socialist movement in Japan, the unions of manual labourers were the major force in the movement, and the unions of office workers were rather ancillary. Now, however, the unions of office workers are the major force in the movement. Even in Russia, the centre of the socialist movement, a younger generation had grown up who knew of capitalism only in theoretical terms, and they were expected to guide the communist leaders of Japan, a capitalist country, and of Italy, where the leaders had a long experience of the movement. As a natural result, rifts appeared between the younger generation of Russians and the [communist] leaders of Japan and Italy. I had been vaguely aware of this, but Iwa’s logical explanation helped clarify my thoughts.

When I discussed Iwa’s views with Tan Malaka, he listened to me closely, and kindly answered my questions, giving his own views. Although I did not usually reveal my weakness, I was unable to conceal the great shock caused me by the Japanese surrender. I explained my feelings frankly to Tan Malaka: ‘We are defeated. Nothing can be done now. I do not want to go back to Japan. In short, I am completely confused’.

Tan Malaka listened to me, then answered slightly reprovingly, ‘I met Sano Manabu through my activities in the Comintern. I also know Ho Chi Minh and have argued with Stalin. Thus I believe I understand the position of other countries and the international situation. As far as the independence of Indonesia is concerned, I don’t think it will be achieved before I die. Independence cannot be achieved merely by a declaration, but must be substantiated by an

____________________
*     Iwa Kusuma Sumantri ( 1899-1972), a Sundanese, was born in Tjiamis and obtained a Leiden law degree in 1925. He was active in left-wing politics while in Europe and published in Moscow a Marxist tract, The Peasant’s Movement in Indonesia ( 1926) under the pseudonym S. Dingley. Highly suspect by the Dutch from the time of his return to a Medan law practice, he was imprisoned in 1929 and released only in 1941.

________

independent state. Judging from my experience in underground movements and as a refugee, it is no easy thing to attain a complete independence.

‘You said Japan is defeated. That is certainly true. But have you thought how many people now belong to defeated countries? There are more than 200 million in Japan, Germany and Italy alone. Can you imagine how great a number of oppressed people are living in Asia? The earth is revolving and history never ceases to move on. In ten or twenty years, Japan will be changed. This can be said for sure from my experience.’

I understod well what Tan Malaka meant and felt thankful for his encouragement. After this meeting, he went to Central Java where he broadcast messages similar to what he had told me, through a secret radio station. Apart from the activity of Tan Malaka, I was deeply impressed by his words of encouragement. I felt, ‘How splendid to be a revolutionary!’ At the same time I realized that goals could be achieved only when one had a long-range perspective that would not be distracted by present circumstances. Tan Malaka gave me an Indonesian name, Hakim, meaning a man of justice or a judge, perhaps regarding me as a righteous man. To Yoshizumi he gave the name Arif, a wise or erudite man.

I frequently visited Tan Malaka while he was staying at Subardjo’s house. However, I did not visit him openly, because the Japanese Army, even though defeated, was still there and the Kempeitai was functioning. In addition, there were Indonesian leaders who were arrested by the Japanese Army even after the surrender. Accordingly, we could not be too cautious about the safety of Tan Malaka. We asked him to move to the former residence of a senior Japanese civil administrator of the Navy. In the meantime, Tan Malaka began to talk of a plan to initiate guerilla warfare around Banten in West Java, probably through fear of the danger of remaining in Jakarta. Since he had lived in West Java before, he knew the area well. We decided to do our best for him, and we presented him with a car, arms, radio facilities and food. An Indonesian called Chairuddin, and Yoshizumi joined this venture. This was the last time I saw Tan Malaka face to face.

* * *

<b>
The Name is Dokuritsu Indoneshia Juku [School for Independent Indonesia] / SEKOLAH SOSIALIS JEPANG
</b>

Immediately before the Japanese surrender, there were several groups striving for Indonesian independence. Adam Malik , in his History and Struggle Concerning the IndonesianIndependence Declaration of 17 August 1945

Independence Declaration of 17 August 1945, * calls these groups ‘revolutionary forces’. Among the groups historically acknowledged were the Sukarni group based on the Sendembu [Propaganda Section] of the 16th Army, the Sutan Sjahrir group, the student group represented by Chaerul Saleh, and the Navy group. The ‘Navy’ in the last case means the Japanese Navy, and in particular the Bukanfu where we were working. The Navy group therefore consisted of Indonesians who were working in the Bukanfu. Its core members were graduates of the Dokuritsu Juku. In other words, the Dokuritsu Juku was the origin of the Navy group. Its members played an important role in the promulgation of independence and in the subsequent struggle for independence.The Dokuritsu Juku was instituted at a time of crisis. As the Japanese war position deteriorated, the Japanese increasingly needed Indonesian cooperation. At the same time they were no longer able to ignore the issue of independence. Japan had up to then maintained a grand design that such sparsely populated regions as Sulawesi and Sumatra be permanently occupied and the population converted into komin [lit., Emperor's subjects], while the densely populated regions of Java and Madura were given a high degree of autonomy. In short, independence was not officially considered. Indonesians might talk about independence among themselves but they could not do so openly. The ever-deteriorating war position forced Japan to change its attitude towards independence, as reflected in the Koiso statement [of 7 September 1944].The Koiso statement gave rise to a wide range of reactions. Generally speaking, however, Indonesians appreciated it as representing some advance, since the Japanese at least officially promised Indonesian independence at some future time. After the statement not only such outstanding figures as Sukarno and Hatta, but even young people began to discuss the issue of independence openly. Naturally this heightened their enthusiasm for independence. The Koiso statement had established the following five guidelines:
1.     The timing of independence is not to be discussed.
2.     Although the Japanese government permits informal preparation for the study of independence among the population, it does not allow formal activities for independence.
3.     Political participation should be promoted in the Indies.

1.     Enthusiasm for independence should be encouraged among the population, and propaganda conducted for independence.
2.     The use of the national flag and anthem of the Indies should be recognized.
Despite these guidelines from the Central Authorities, actual implementation differed according to the characteristics and ideas of the military authorities in each area – the 25th Army in Sumatra, the 16th Army in Java and Madura, and the Navy in the rest of Indonesia. In addition the Army and Navy were in conflict in Tokyo, which further influenced the way the guidelines were implemented in Indonesia. There was, moreover, the general tendency among Japanese, both in Indonesia and Tokyo, to look down upon Indonesians, particularly the people of Borneo (Kalimantan), the Celebes (Sulawesi) and the Lesser Sunda Islands (Nusa Tenggara). Some military authorities in Indonesia wanted to concentrate on the war without being drawn into political complications, so they tended to keep out of the independence issue as far as possible.

Nevertheless, the Japanese in Indonesia felt obliged to do something for independence, in view of the Koiso statement and the ever-increasing enthusiasm of the population for independence. In Java, the expansion of political participation was implemented. It was to be expected that Indonesians viewed this as a deliberate Japanese substitute for the recognition of independence. The promotion of political participation was easy for the Japanese, because it had already been the policy since the Tojo statement and therefore the new policy merely meant increasing the number of Indonesians participating in the administration – for instance, by increasing the number of Indonesian Residents and Advisory Councils and by appointing Indonesians to assist the director of every department of the Gunseikambu. The policy of expanding the Chuo Sangi-in [ Central Advisory Council] and the Chiho Sangi-in [ Local Advisory Council] * was in conformity with the new policy. It was also not difficult to stimulate aspirations for independence, and to propagate such aspirations through the radio and publications. The enlargement of the Giyugun [Volunteer Corps] was expected to be effective not only for Japanese propaganda purposes but also to be useful as war potential, directly or indirectly, if the Allied forces should land. The Islamic Volunteer Corps called Hizbullah resulted from these Japanese guidelines, and actually fought courageously against the Dutch during the struggle for independence.

In addition, the Japanese devised such measures as the establishment of supporters’ associations for the Giyugun and Heiho [Auxiliary Corps], and the aid system for romusha

among other measures. In truth, however, this was all that the Japanese could do. Naturally, dissatisfaction was expressed by Indonesians in various ways, for instance in such complaints as: ‘ Japan has been claiming that it is going to recognize Indonesian independence. When will it do so?’ As mentioned above, Japan had no intention of clarifying the time [for independence]. Dissatisfaction of this sort came to be openly expressed by Indonesians. We thought: ‘Something must be done’.

At the time the Indonesian suspicion about Japan’s ambiguous attitude towards independence was becoming critical, Maeda told us, ‘ Japan promised to recognize Indonesian independence in the future. This will take place in the not too distant future. Consequently we must make haste to groom Indonesian leaders who can become the core of the nation after independence’. Maeda was of the opinion that we should establish a school to educate young people in preparation for Indonesian independence. Maeda had expressed similar views to Sato, Yoshizumi and myself before. The time had at last come to implement the plan. Maeda as usual did not mention details of the way this was to be carried out. We immediately started making preparations. First we consulted Subardjo, the person closest to us, who agreed with the plan, saying, ‘It is a very good idea. We will look for able young men’. Soon Subardjo found some youths through his connections and brought them to us. The Kaigun Bukanfu, unlike the Gunseikambu of the Army, did not have administrative authority in Java, and accordingly was unable to recruit people through its administrative apparatus. Since Subardjo asked the Indonesian leaders on whom he could rely for recruits, relatives and friends of these leaders were among the youths selected. I remember that the total number of youths was slightly more than thirty.

Maeda named the school Y?sei Juku. When asked the origin of the name, he explained that ‘y?sei’ was the first word of the instructions of Emperor Jimmu. According to the K?jien [dictionary], published by Iwanami Shoten, ‘y?sei’ means ‘to cultivate justice’. it is also possible that Maeda chose the name because the pronunciation of the word is the same as ‘yosei’ meaning ‘to train’. Whatever the case, it was unreasonable to demand that Indonesians use such a Japanese word. At that time the Japanese were forcing on the Indonesians the use of Japanese language and the practice of saluting in the direction of the royal palace in Tokyo, thereby causing much resentment. Indonesians wanted to absorb what was good in the Japanese way of life and were willing to ask for Japanese help, but they showed a strong antipathy towards Japanization. The same can be said of the school. Even though the Japanese had built it as a favour to the Indonesians, it would never appeal to the population if it carried a Japanese name.

Yoshizumi, an active and courageous person, proposed, ‘If

Maeda likes the name Yosei Juku then let it be. But as far as we are concerned let us use an Indonesian name’. I agree with his idea. Again we consulted Subardjo, who eventually suggested ‘School for Independent Indonesia’ or Asrama Indonesia Merdeka. This could be abbreviated as Dokuritsu Juku in Japanese. Before the Koiso statement was issued, the Japanese did not use the term dokuritsu [independence] or the Indonesian merdeka and there was an official taboo on the use of the word ‘Indonesia’. It might appear unimportant to foreigners whether the word ‘Indonesia’ was used or not, but it was important to the Indonesians. Although the Japanese used the [official] title, ‘the East Indies’, Indonesian leaders often asked to have it replaced by ‘Indonesia’. When Putera and Jawa Hokokai were instituted, the leaders demanded that ‘Indonesia’ be added to the names of these organizations. The Japanese rigidly refused. As expected, the name Asrama Indonesia Merdeka appealed to the population, and the institution was able to recruit many able youths.

The next problem was how to manage the Asrama. As the matter was entrusted to Yoshizumi and myself, we discussed it together and agreed to leave the management to Indonesians, with Subardjo in charge. When we put this to Subardjo, he suggested we choose somebody who was younger and less close to the Japanese than himself, and who could contact students directly. He excused himself on the grounds that he worked in a branch office of the Bukanfu Research Department, and was rather too old for the position. Eventually we appointed Wikana, who had once worked in the branch office, as president of the school. Wikana, under the assumed name of Sunoto, had once been arrested by the Dutch before the war on the charge of leading a youth movement.

George S. Kanahele claims in his doctoral thesis, ‘The Japanese Occupation of Indonesia: Prelude to Independence’, * that Subardjo did not know Wikana’s background. This is not true. Subardjo told me about Wikana’s background, and while Subardjo was working in the branch office of the Research Department of the Bukanfu, I asked him to write an article on youth movements [making reference to Wikana]. I might have felt sympathetic towards Wikana because his experience had been similar to mine in being arrested by the police. Anyway, Wikana played a role in organizing youth groups, taking over public facilities and founding the basis of the Republic immediately after the independence declaration. In later times he became a senior member of the Communist Party. It is not

yet known whether he is still alive, has been murdered, or has gone underground following the ‘September 30 affair’. With hindsight I suppose it was rash to have used Wikana, in view of his previous career. At the time, however, I only thought: ‘Our seniors will not know of Wikana’s career unless we deliberately inform them of it. We shall just have to see how things go if we are discovered’. It was proved later that Maeda knew nothing of Wikana’s background.

There were problems to be settled concerning the school, namely lecturers and curriculum. We started by selecting lecturers. We planned to invite Sukarno, Hatta, Maramis, Subardjo and Iwa. Subardjo asked us to add Sutan Sjahrir. * Sjahrir was a college of Hatta. The 16th Army had once considered utilizing him, but the idea had been rejected. There was no objection to Subardjo’s request on our part, since we had already included Hatta among the lecturers of the school. Then I had to persuade Sjahrir. Sjahrir describes the situation as follows in his bok, Out of Exile ( New York, John Day, 1949) [p. 251]:

The political policy now altered slightly. Nationalism was no longer so vigorously opposed. . . It was just about this time that I first came into direct contact with the Japanese. The Japanese information service sent a Japanese to find out my views on the general situation. . . Thereafter I had at least one visitor a week from the information service: first a Japanese and then an Indonesian. I realized that my movements were being watched. They had evidently found out that I travelled considerably and had many visitors. In fact, toward the end they tried to restrict my movements. They requested me to give courses dealing with nationalism and the Indonesian popular movement in a so-called nationalist institution that had been set up, called the Ashrama Indonesia Merdeka ( Association for a Free Indonesia). As the situation then stood, I could not refuse. I realized that it was an indirect means of making my travel difficult, and at the same time of keeping an eye on my movements and my ideas.

Sjahrir’s reference to ‘a Japanese’ obviously meant me. However, I had no thought of restricting his activities. This seems to be pure speculation arising from his own bias. On the other hand he admits the usefulness of the Dokuritsu Juku in another part of the book, which I will mention later. At any rate, Sjahrir eventually agreed to give lectures.

The content of the lectures and the way of organizing them we entrusted to the Indonesian staff. I believe I stressed this point in trying to obtain Subardjo’s agreement. Thus Sukarno came to give lectures on the history of the nationalist movement, Hatta on the cooperative movement, Subardjo on international law, Sjahrir on the principles of nationalism and democracy, Iwa on labour problems, and Wikana on the youth movement. In addition, Yoshizumi and I were in charge of lectures on guerilla warfare and on agricultural problems respectively. The school was initiated in October that year [ 1944] at 50 Defencielinie van den Bosch street, i.e., the present Jalan Bungur Besar near Kemayoran airport. The students all stayed at a dormitory nearby, the management of which was left in their own hands. The Head of the Juku, Wikana, lived close by the school. All costs were met by the Bukanfu.

At the time we initiated the school we had abundant financial resources. Furthermore, Yoshizumi was good at collecting money. Thus we were able at least to ensure the students did not suffer from hunger, even if life there was not necessarily luxurious. In fact we gave no thought at all to financial problems, for we had in mind obtaining money by smuggling in opium from Singapore in the event of serious financial difficulties.

Once the school was open, Yoshizumi and I devoted ourselves enthusiastically to lecturing. The preparation of lectures took quite a lot of time because of the Indonesian language. Although Yoshizumi and I were in charge of the school, we could not be there all the time since we were obliged to work for the Research Department as well. Nevertheless the lectures went on smoothly, thanks to the ability of the Indonesians to manage their own affairs. As I have said, we made a point of avoiding coercion as far as possible, and consequently we were cautious not to introduce things Japanese in lectures. On the other hand the curriculum was required to cover as wide a range of subjects as possible, since the major aim of the Juku was to groom leaders for a future republic. In view of this we invited an instructor from the Fifth Guard Troop of the Navy to teach bujutsu [one of the Japanese martial arts]. I myself occasionally led the students in a training run. I could run as I was still just a little over 30 at the time and had done my military training in the army.

The Dokuritsu Juku automatically ceased to function on the Japanese surrender. The only students were those who had

entered in October 1944. Some articles on the Dokuritsu Juku use such expressions as ‘graduates of the first year’ or ‘graduates of the second year’, but this is inaccurate. Most students joined the independence struggle without completing the course, and some played a role in founding the Republic.

* * *

<b>

In a section omitted, Nishijima describes the role of Major A.K. Jusuf in kidnapping Prime Minister Sjahrir on 3 July 1946, although Jusuf had been regarded as ‘one of my best students’ at the Dokuritsu Juku by Sjahrir ( Out of Exile, p. 252). These events are more fully described in Benedict Anderson, Java, pp. 370-403.

</b>
* * *

Among the students of the Dokuritsu Juku were the subsequent Secretary-General of the Indonesian Communist Party, Aidit; the ‘number two’ of the Party, Mohammad Lukman; and Sidik Kertapati, who wrote a book on independence and was a member of the Party. * Lukman became acquainted with Aidit only after he entered the Dokuritsu Juku, but was later to support Aidit in his bid for leadership of the Party. Lukman lost his life, together with comrades such as Aidit, in the ‘September 30 affair’. Had he not entered the Dokuritsu Juku, the course of his life might have differed.

*
<b>* *

Several articles on Indonesia published after the war refer to the Dokuritsu Juku, and many claim that the substance of the curriculum was communist. I grant that it was socialist, but not communist. During the war some people thought that Indonesia should develop in the direction of national socialism. </b>

b>We had the same idea. In the event Indonesia did appear to move in that direction, which was only natural since the management of the school was in the hands of the Indonesians concerned. Many Indonesian leaders were more or less influenced by Marxism while studying in Europe after World War I. Since nationalist movements in colonies like the East Indies aimed to cast off the yoke of the colonial power,

__

in this case the Netherlands, nationalism had common ground with anti-imperialism.

The keynote of anti-imperialism is socialism – whether in terms of the First, Second or Third International. As a result there is no denying that the substance of the curriculum tended to be socialist. Accusations that the curriculum was communist came particularly from the Dutch, not without reason. After Indonesia achieved independence, the Dutch wanted to annihilate it under one pretext or another. For this reason, I believe, they labelled independence ‘made in Japan’ or ‘a communist fake’. If we look at Indonesian history it is obvious that such criticisms of independence were beside the point.

Looking back on those days, one thing I am proud of is that we did not force anything upon the population. The Army set up its Kenkoku Gakuin [ Institute for the Founding of the Nation] in March 1945 with the same goals as the Dokuritsu Juku. Despite the mushrooming enthusiasm for independence at that time, the Army gave its training centre a Japanese name and insisted that the Japanese language be used there. The head was also a Japanese. We used the Japanese name of Dokuritsu Juku because we understood the thoughts and sentiments of the Indonesians through associating with them. I wondered why [the Army] did not choose a more effective course, since it had set up the institute at no small effort.

There was certainly criticism in some Japanese quarters, particularly the Army, that the policy we adopted was too close and sympathetic to the Indonesians. I believe that the 16th Army in Java had a more progressive administration than the Army in any other occupied region, and yet it gave the new institution a Japanese name. This seems to reflect an incurable defect in the Japanese. Japanese leaders publicized that the Greater East Asia War was the war for the liberation of colonized peoples. Why then did Japan not allow the independence of occupied countries? The Japanese interpreted the liberation of Asia as liberation from the West – liberation of the Indonesians from the Dutch. Liberation should have been of the Indonesians, the Asian peoples, themselves.

After the Russo-Japanese War, Japan intensified the nature of its imperialism. However, Asian peoples did not view Japan as a purely imperialist country. On the contrary they believed that Japan, having defeated Russia, could liberate them from the yoke of Western domination. Without appreciating these expectations Japan insisted upon ‘under Japanese supervision’ and ‘Japanization’. As a result Japanese policies towards Indonesia inevitably tended to be based on expediency. We, on the other hand, were convinced that Japan would be able to maintain close ties with Indonesia only if she achieved independence in the true sense. Although we were certainly idealistic, I still firmly believe we were not wrong.

<b>

The Longest Day: The Eve or the Independence Declaration

</b>

Indonesians were increasingly suspicious about their future after Germany surrendered to the Allied Forces in May 1945. Moreover, in August various reports reached Indonesia, including the Russian invasion of Manchuria and the dropping of atomic bombs on Hiroshima and Nagasaki. With each report unfavourable to Japan, Japanese in Indonesia felt more acutely their isolation. They wondered how Japan would be able to carry on the war against the whole world, given that its allies had already surrendered.

It was on 8 August that we received the news of the Russian invasion of Manchuria, and four Indonesians visited me at my home at Kebon Sirih 80 without any prior warning. They were Subardjo, Buntaran, Iwa Kusuma Sumantri and Soerachman. * My residence was open to anybody and visitors often came unexpectedly. The four leaders caught me as I came into the reception room, and asked gravely: ‘What course will the war take?’ I fully understood what they were trying to say. Japan had been taking the position of recognizing Indonesian independence and the population had been preparing for it. What would become of independence if the Japanese surrendered? When Germany invaded the Netherlands, the Dutch Queen Wilhelmina II had broadcast a message that ‘the government of the Indies will be modified after the war’, but she had said nothing about granting independence. The Dutch had no intention of allowing the Indies to be independent. On the contrary, they would begin to suppress the Indonesian demand for independence even though it was ever more intense. What sort of fate awaited these Indonesian leaders, who had been cooperating with the Japanese solely in the hope of achieving independence? General Pétain or France, a hero of World War I, was arrested by the Allied Forces because of his cooperation with Germany. There was no guarantee that these Indonesian leaders would not share the same fate as Petain. I realized

_
[ ___________________
*     For Subardjo and Iwa see above. Dr Buntaran Martoatmodjo (b. 1896) was a prominent member of the 'Navy group' around Subardjo, Deputy Vice-Chairman of the Chuo Sangi-in, a member of both the 1945 committees to prepare Indonesian independence (BPKI and PPPKI), and Indonesian Adviser to the Health Bureau of the Internal Affairs Department. The last position led naturally to the post of Health Minister in the first independent Indonesian Cabinet ( September-November 1945).
Ir. Raden Mas Pandji Soerachman Tjokroadisoerjo (b. 1894) was not politically active until he was appointed Chief of the Economic Affairs Department by the Japanese in July 1945. He was also Minister of Finance in two of Sjahrir's 1946 Cabinets.

]

<b> that the four leaders were worrying not only about the future of Indonesia but also about their own fate.
</b>

I recalled my own feelings on my return to Java from a camp in Australia. Guadalcanal had already fallen to the Americans. At that stage I held strong doubts about the Japanese war position, and these grew when Karasawa * gave me his very pessimistic perspective on the war when I stopped over in Japan for a while. Under these circumstances it would not have been unreasonable for me to weigh up whether it would be safer to be in Japan or Indonesia if Japan was defeated. In reality I returned to Java without the slightest hesitation, even though I might never return to Japan alive. My desire to see the development of the Indonesian independence movement with my own eyes was very strong, and I renewed my resolution to cooperate as much as possible with the Indonesians to achieve independence.

There were quite a number of Japanese who were deeply involved in Indonesia and shared its hopes for independence. However, we were outsiders after all. True independence could not be achieved unless the Indonesians, the people concerned, were to acquire it by themselves. To this end the people had to arm themselves and be prepared for real sacrifices. This was my theory, and I reiterated it many times to the four Indonesians that night: ‘Whatever may befall you, such as a Japanese surrender, you must achieve independence by yourselves. Never react passively to external circumstances’. I had for a long time taken the view of the war that those who had died in it would be justified as long as Indonesia attained independence. For that reason I wanted all the more to see Indonesia independent. However, it seemed undeniable to me that there was a degree of passivity among the Indonesians.

I often heard complaints from Indonesians such as: ‘Even though we asked for help, the Japanese did not provide it’. Of course there were things which could be done only by Japanese, but there must also have been things that Indonesians could do. Every time I heard such complaints I condemned the passive attitude which lay behind them. I had occasion to talk with Trimurti,† a nationalist activist and the wife of Sayuti Melik, who is now a member of parliament and was a minister after the

[ Karasawa was the 'supervisor' responsible for Nishijima's good behaviour after he had been released from political detention in 1933.
†S     K. Trimurti (b. 1914) and her husband Sayuti Melik (b. 1909) were both on the left wing of nationalist politics, and were imprisoned by the Japanese until rescued by Sukarno in 1945. Before the war Trimurti had been associated with Gerindo, while Sayuti had spent a period of exile in Boven Digul. ]

war. On that occasion I told her, ‘A door will never be opened if you stop knocking at it simply for fear of hurting your hand. As long as you are involved in the nationalist liberation movement, you must possess a will strong enough to open the door even though you injure your hand, your bones are bared, and the knocking gives you pain. In other words you must be prepared to sacrifice yourself for liberation and independence’.

I had associated with Indonesians who shared the view described above. The four Indonesian leaders listened earnestly to me and returned home nodding agreement.

I felt the three days from 15 to 17 August 1945 to be enormously long. These three days constitute an unforgettable period of my life. It was on the 15th that the rumour of a Japanese surrender spread, causing great upheaval for both Japanese and Indonesian leaders. The Japanese were on tenterhooks for different psychological reasons – some were reluctant to acknowledge the Japanese surrender, while others believed it and feared the grim situation which might develop as a result. How did the Indonesian leaders react to the rumour of a Japanese surrender? I quote from Subardjo book, Indonesian Independence and Revolution:

<b>

On that unforgettable day, 15 August, a rumour spread in Jakarta that Japan had surrendered to the Allied Forces. But we were unable to obtain any official information from reliable Japanese authorities. Sukarno and Hatta tried to get solid information from the military administration authorities but they could not because the Gunseikan [Chief of Military Administration] was not in his office.
</b>

Sukarno and Hatta tried to enquire about the Japanese surrender directly from the Gunseikan, Maj.-Gen. Yamamoto Moichiro, but they were refused permission to meet Yamamoto to on the pretext that he was attending a meeting. I do not know whether Yamamoto was really in his office or was attending a meeting elsewhere. Since they were refused by the Army authorities, they next tried to obtain information from the Navy. Thus they visited Subardjo at the branch office of the Research Department, which eventually led to a meeting of Sukarno, Hatta, Subardjo and Maeda. This meeting was a factor which connected the Indonesian declaration of independence with the [Japanese] Navy. Hence this meeting should be given a prominent place in the history of Japanese-Indonesian relations.

In the afternoon (perhaps 4 or 5 p.m.) of that 15 August, Sukarno, Hatta and Subardjo called on Maeda at the office of the Bukanfu in front of Gambir Square. I was at the office of the Research Department on Postweg, and was summoned by Maeda to act as interpreter. First Sukarno explained the purpose of

the visit. He asked Maeda, ‘Hearing that Japan had surrendered, I visited an Army office to confirm the news, but I could not meet anybody. So we came here to find out whether the report was true or not’. Maeda replied, ‘I cannot answer with certainty, since no official report has reached here. In any case I cannot believe that the Japanese would surrender. Please be cautious about believing messages, because many of them seem to be subversive. When we obtain official information we will certainly let you know’.

Maeda did not waste words, and his reply was very short. Probably that was all he could say. However, his attitude and the prevailing atmosphere clearly implied a Japanese surrender. The tone of my translation may also have given a hint of confirmation of the Japanese surrender. As they were leaving the office one of them, perhaps Subardjo, said, ‘It is not important whether Japan has surrendered or not. We must continue to fight for independence’. Sukarno and Hatta must have had the same determination. The Japanese surrender was certainly a sad event, but independence had to be achieved since it was the earnest wish of the people. Even if it was to come as ‘independence as a gift’, independence was near at hand, and in their own hands.

The Allied Forces had not expressed their position on Indonesian independence, and the Dutch had promised only a high degree of autonomy. Consequently, independence seemed likely to be shelved as a result of the Japanese surrender. Nevertheless we must fight for independence. This may have been the resolve shared by the three Indonesians as they left the Bukanfu. Hatta claimed after the war in Suara Partai ( July-August 1951), ‘It was confirmed on 15 August that Japan had surrendered’. However, the Army authorities had not met Sukarno and Hatta, nor had the Navy subsequently given them official information of the Japanese surrender. Hatta may have sensed it instinctively.

After their meeting with Maeda, Sukarno, Hatta and Subardjo discussed the policy to be followed, and agreed to carry out the objectives of the Committee for the Preparation of Indonesian Independence. They decided to convene the Committee at 10 a.m. on the 16th. This Committee had been preliminarily instituted on 11 August as an organization to take over political power from Japan, and it was to commence its activities officially from the 18th of that month. However, Japan surrendered before the Committee officially started. The predecessor of this Committee, the Body for the Investigation of Independence, had been established on 28 May 1945 to implement the Koiso statement. The Body had as its aim the investigation and study of all subjects related to independence and the preparation of reports and materials necessary for independence. Naturally such a project required a lot of time. Thus we can assume that the real purpose of the

Japanese in the establishment of the Body was to gain time on the one hand and to acquire the cooperation of the Indonesians on the other. Contrary to Japanese expectations, however, the Body pursued its tasks at full speed and even began to discuss a draft Constitution after only two sessions. Hence it is obvious that Sukarno and Hatta thought independence just around the corner when they were confronted with the news of the Japanese surrender.

Late in the afternoon of 15 August, Subardjo visited us at Kebon Sirih 80 in order to confirm the news of the Japanese surrender. As Subardjo often said, our residence functioned as a meeting place for Indonesians associated with the Navy. On that day, too, several Indonesians had already gathered at the house before Subardjo arrived. Being unable to accomplish his aim, he went off to Sukarno’s residence at Pegangsaan Timur 56, together with Hatta, intending to decide the subjects to be discussed at the meeting of the Committee for the Preparation of Indonesian Independence the following day. They arrived at Sukarno’s place at about 11 pm, and found Sukarno arguing with some youths, including the president of the Dokuritsu Juku, Wikana, and Darwis.

* * *

In the passage omitted, Nishijima uses published Indonesian and Dutch accounts to describe the confrontation between the youth leaders on the one hand and Sukarno and Hatta on the other. Wikana and Darwis pressed hard for an immediate independence declaration in defiance of the Japanese, while the older leaders wanted to await official confirmation of the surrender.

* * *

Subardjo heard at 8 a.m. on the 16th that Sukarno and Hatta had disappeared. Sudiro, Subardjo’s secretary, brought him the news. Sudiro had visited Sukarno’s residence along with Subardjo the night before, and witnessed the heated argument between Sukarno and the youths. Although Sudiro immediately guessed that the youth group had abducted Sukarno and Hatta, he could not find out from them where Sukarno and Hatta were located. Subardjo also suspected the youth group, but sought to obtain the Navy’s support in rescuing them, since if it had been the Army which had seized the two leaders there was no other way than to ask for the intervention of the Navy. Subardjo telephoned me at the Bukanfu to notify me that Sukarno and Hatta had disappeared, adding, ‘They may fall into the hands of the Army’. Then he hurried to Maeda’s place by car to report the incident directly. I, too, immediately reported to

Maeda. To tell the truth, neither Maeda nor I thought the youth group had the courage to carry out such an abduction, and we therefore suspected that the Army had masterminded it.
<b>
Maeda went to the Gunseikambu by himself to enquire after the two men. I do not remember precisely which of the two, the Gunseikan Yamamoto or the Chief of General Affairs Nishimura, met Maeda on that occasion. Whichever of them it was, he was taken aback by Maeda’s enquiry and replied, ‘Although we have been looking for them both, unfortunately we do not yet know where they are’. He added quite unnecessarily, ‘As a matter of fact, if they have disappeared it is rather convenient for us, because it will mean less trouble in the future’. I thought the Army was underestimating the seriousness of the matter. Nevertheless, the Army also had to ascertain the whereabouts of the two leaders. Apparently the Army had been looking for them through the Kempeitai and the Beppan, which was in charge of intelligence. Maeda gave me an order: ‘It would create a serious situation if communications between the highest Indonesian leaders and the Japanese Army were to be broken at this critical stage. We absolutely must maintain communications. Find the two immediately!’
</b>

Maeda’s instruction made me realize what a thoughtful man he was. As I was about to leave, his voice behind me said, ‘I have nurtured you till now so that I could use you on just such an occasion as this’. I was not angry at his words for he often used such expressions. However, I felt somewhat lost without Yoshizumi, who was in the middle of a meeting with members of an underground organization set up by the Third Section of the Research Department. I calculated that the youth group must have carried out the abduction if the Army was not involved.

We had a close relationship with the youth group, which occasionally asked us to rescue its members when they were arrested by the Kempeitai. We also talked together, held meetings, and argued over the issue of independence – whether it should be ‘independence on a platter’, or something achieved through struggle. Wikana was the leader of the group. I intuitively thought Wikana would be the only member of the group related to the Navy who could also be connected with the kidnapping. I therefore approached Wikana at the Dokuritsu Juku at Bungur Besar. I remember that I tried very hard to persuade him to talk, but he would not open his mouth. I wondered if an Indonesian might simply close up in such a situation. Wikana sat on the floor as silent as a clam. Despite this attitude I had to find out about the abduction, so I continued to urge him: ‘You know very well how much I have worked for the good of Indonesia. I have tried, as you know, to be a bridge between Japan and Indonesia. It is not possible that you cast me aside at this stage and do things on your own, considering what I have done for Indonesia. How could we

betray you? I suggest that you hand Sukarno and Hatta over to us.’

I do not remember how long I cajoled Wikana, but undoubtedly I repeated these arguments. Finally Wikana opened his mouth. His face was rather pale, and he was obviously taking the matter hard, ‘No, we cannot, because we comrades have made a promise. We want to declare our independence to the world. Even if it is crushed in a moment we will not care, so long as the declaration remains as an historical event. We are ready to be killed’.

Hearing this reply I knew something serious was about to happen. Subardjo also tried to persuade Wikana. Guessing from Wikana’s words that they had decided at a meeting the previous night to take Sukarno and Hatta safely out of Jakarta, I concluded that Sukarno and Hatta were detained not far from the city.

After our discussion Wikana seemed to bend a little. He began to move between the youth group and us, perhaps to consult his colleagues. Two messengers from the youth group were apparently dispatched to the secret place where Sukarno and Hatta were held. It must have been conveyed to the members of the group there that we had no intention of stopping their plan to declare independence and indeed were willing to support it. Since a member of the Kyodo Boeigun [Home Guard], Jusuf Kunto, * was among the messengers, the [former] Giyugun was evidently involved in the case. In the end Kunto took Subardjo to Sukarno and Hatta at the hiding place. Prior to this, Maeda was asked to promise not to arrest any youths connected with the plot, and to guarantee the safety of Sukarno and Hatta. On the spot Maeda answered, ‘Yes’. When Subardjo was about to leave for the hiding place I offered to go with him, but he refused.

* * *

I would like to quote from Daisan no Shins?:

Because of this (kidnapping of Sukarno and Hatta), independence was proclaimed outside the orbit of the Japanese Army. Historians will judge it in the future, but as far as I am concerned it was right.

There was certainly a degree of excess and menace in the activity of the youth group. However, without their action the enthusiasm for independence could not have blazed so fiercely and independence itself would not have been accomplished. In that event the population would have suffered in anguish for a long time. If independence had been pursued mainly through consulting Japanese authorities, as planned by Sukarno and Hatta, it might have been attained in a purely formal sense, but on the other hand Indonesia might not have been able to combat the movement of the Dutch and Allied Forces to return there.

It was about 4 p.m. when Subardjo left for Rengasdengklok, but he did not arrive till 6 p.m., due to various accidents including a puncture along the way. He was not readily accepted by the youths, partly because they were in an extraordinary state of excitement, and partly because Subardjo was suspect to them because of his closeness to the Navy. Adam Malik claims, in the book quoted above, that since Subardjo was said to have come as the representative of the Japanese Navy, he and his secretary Sudiro were almost detained. On the other hand Subardjo tells a different story in his book, Indonesian Independence and Revolution. He says that when he was asked whether he was sent by the Navy he replied: ‘No! Bung Sudiro and I came here after discussing with Wikana and other members of the Navy group’. Thus any suspicion towards Subardjo was removed. Then Subardjo and his secretary began to negotiate with Supeno, a Shodan-cho [platoon leader] of the Giyugun and a son of R.P. Singgih. While negotiating, the Shodan-cho asked whether an independence declaration could be issued by midnight. Subardjo replied that this was impossible because it would take time, first to call a meeting of the Committee and next to prepare the declaration, all of which was expected to require at least the whole night. After arguing for a while, Subardjo promised to complete the preparations by 6 o’clock the following morning, to make it possible to declare independence by the following noon. In response to this, Supeno asked what would happen in the event of the failure of this programme. Subardjo answered, ‘If everything fails to materialize, I will take full responsibility for that failure. You may even shoot me if that happens’. Only after Subardjo had said this, was he allowed to meet Sukarno and Hatta. Subardjo hurried Sukarno and Hatta to the car and they drove off to Jakarta.

I had been waiting eagerly at Maeda’s residence for Subardjo’s arrival. It was already 11 p.m. and very dark. A

Japanese officer was slashing at sesame plants with his sword, in despair because of the surrender. As the Japanese had encouraged the cultivation of sesame for its oil, the plant was found everywhere in Java. A kempei was standing under a tree keeping watch on the residence, perhaps in anticipation of some incident. I heard later that Nakatani Yoshio, an Army interpreter, was also watching the residence from next door. It was into this atmosphere that Subardjo and his party arrived. Sukarni had already changed from his Giyugun uniform into ordinary clothes on the way.

First I let Sukarno and Hatta come in and sit down. Subardjo took me out of the room saying, ‘Just a moment, Mr Nishijima’. He gave me a brief account of what had happened. Only after I heard his account did I realize that Subardjo had risked his life for the independence declaration. Given the increasingly tense situation, there was a real possibility that Subardjo might be killed if his programme failed to materialize. I sensed that the situation had at last come to a crisis point. In the meantime Yoshizumi, as well as members of the Committee for the Preparation of Indonesian Independence, had arrived. Members of the youth group were gathering in a waiting room. Maeda came down from upstairs and gave a lengthy warning that independence should not be won through bloodshed. Naturally, however, the excited Indonesians would not listen to such pious advice. Then we all began to argue strenuously.

While we were arguing, Sukarno suddenly asked Sukarni, ‘Will it really be all right?’ Sukarni stood up in surprise and replied, ‘It will be dangerous!’ He knew of a planned uprising by the youth group, and explained that its timing was imminent. The plan had been adopted on the morning of the 16th, for an uprising to be launched mainly by former members of the Giyugun and Heiho and by students at 1 a.m. on the 17th. Sayuti Melik and I stood up and followed Sukarni out. The three of us stopped at Hatta’s house first, whence Sukarni emerged dressed once more in military uniform, and bearing a pistol and sword. The car finally stopped in front of a dormitory for students of the Medical School in Parapatan, after passing along Jalan Menteng. The dormitory was the headquarters of the youth group. Sukarni and Melik went in alone while I stayed in the car.

I could see soldiers of the former Giyugun on trucks, all armed and looking tense. Sukarni and Melik soon came back. They must have announced, ‘The uprising is called off for tonight!’ Our car then moved in the direction of Koningsplein and eventually arrived at the broadcasting station, which was strongly guarded by military police. Since the youths had been expressing their desire to proclaim the independence of Indonesia to the world, I could well imagine that their plan of rebellion included the seizure of the broadcasting station. Even Maeda had once asked the Army to guard the station, so it

was not surprising that the Kempeitai knew some, if not all, of the plan. There seems to have been a mutual understanding between the Indonesians inside the station and Sukarni that the former would commence activities in response to a sign from Sukarni outside. Sukarni suddenly shouted, ‘The plan is called off for tonight!’ Hearing his voice, kempei rushed towards us. They seemed surprised to find the two of us – Sukarni, who had been arrested by the Kempeitai several times, and myself, who had once been under its surveillance. We were immediately placed in custody by the kempei. I demanded that one of them contact Maeda, explaining that we were on an urgent mission. The kempei immediately telephoned Maeda, who ordered, ‘Release them at once. This is an emergency’. In this way we were released.

Indoneshia ni Okeru Nihon Gansei no Kenky? * makes it clear that Maeda asked Gunseikan Yamamoto of the Army to come to his house while we were out, but that the request was refused. Maeda asked Yamamoto because he wanted to have somebody representing the Army, as he did not want to give the impression that the Navy had handled the independence issue unilaterally, and he therefore wanted to invite an Army authority to join him in investigating the subject. Moreover he thought it might facilitate finding a solution to the problem if both Army and Navy authorities talked directly with the Indonesian leaders.

<b>

Since Maeda’a request had been turned down by Yamamoto, Maeda visited the Chief of General Affairs of the Gunseikambu, Maj.-Gen. Nishimura. Sukarno, Hatta, Maeda, Yoshizumi and I went together to Nishimura’s house. It was past 1 a.m. in the morning of the 17th. Nakatani had been called to the house as an interpreter. Although Nishimura did not refuse us an interview, his attitude was cool. Sukarno and Hatta demanded that Nishimura allow immediate independence, and call a meeting of the Committee for the Preparation of Indonesian Independence one day earlier than had been scheduled. Maeda supported these demands, but Nishimura would not give his consent, and tried to pursue a policy of maintaining the status quo.

Yoshizumi, Saito Shizuo (the present Ambassador to the United Nations) and I were in a waiting room. I was becoming irritated by the stalemate. Saito said accusingly to me, ‘What you are doing is clearly disloyal to the Emperor. The Emperor

has said that everything is over. If you take any action [like supporting Indonesian independence] the result may affect the status of the Emperor’.

Although my memory is rather vague, I think Saito even used the word kokuzoku [traitor] of Maeda. Anyway I was infuriated by what he said. I said to myself, ‘What an absurd thing to say. Did not the Greater East Asia War aim at the liberation of Asia? Was not the initial aim of the war to bring Japan closer to Asia? We have striven towards that very end! We must bring the issue to its conclusion in a responsible way. Why else have we propagated the slogan, “To live with [ Asia] and to die with [ Asia]“?’

I unconsciously put my hand in the pocket where I kept my pistol. As everything was in chaos at that time we carried arms with us. I glared at him, my hand on the pistol. Daisan no Shins? shows how I felt about Nishimura’s stubbornness:
</b>

We took our decision. There was no way left but to pursue our policy at our own discretion. The only things we had to be cautious about were that the measures taken should not appear to be associated with Japan in any way, that they would not affect Japan (in this case innocent Japanese living in Java), and that they would not incur reprisals from the Army.

It was past 2 a.m. when the meeting was re-opened at Maeda’s residence. Sukarno, Hatta, Subardjo, Maeda, Yoshizumi and I sat down around a round table in the dining room. Members of the youth group and the Committee for the Preparation of Indonesian Independence occupied a reception room and a waiting room. Just before the meeting began, Maeda said, ‘We must request the presence of somebody from the Army’. He called Saito by telephone, but Saito refused to come on the pretext of being busy with his work. Next he called Miyoshi and said, ‘Please come over, since we have some people gathered here’. Kiyoshi was a sociable person and a Shiseikan [Civil Administrator] with a good reputation among the Indonesians. He willingly agreed to come there, perhaps encouraged by being a little tipsy. He arrived at the residence shortly afterwards, but seemed to find himself out of place in the highly charged atmosphere of the room. ‘Please take a seats’, I said. Since the Army was in charge of Java and the Navy had only a secondary position, we needed somebody from the Army to avoid the criticism that the Navy had dealt with the matter unilaterally. Miyoshi was to serve as an Army witness.

The youths in Maeda’s house were exerting pressure upon the meeting from the adjacent room. They were unwilling to make the draft declaration at the same table that the Japanese were using. Moreover they opposed every point. For instance, when Sukarno and Hatta proposed to sign a document and read it

the members of the Committee for the Preparation of Indonesian Independence at noon on the 17th, Sukarni and Saleh strongly opposed the proposal. They insisted that there was no need to use the Committee, which was closely identified with Japan, and that the participation in the declaration of the members of the Committee was anathema since they had done nothing for independence. On another occasion, when Sukarno suggested consulting the highest Japanese authorities before making the declaration, the youths bitterly criticized this on the grounds that independence was purely the concern of the Indonesians, and had nothing to do with the Japanese. It was finally decided that independence was to be declared regardless of Japanese approval. The draft declaration was put in order by Sukarno after a heated argument between the leaders’ group [centring on Sukarno], which included Hatta, and the youth group.

The first draft read: ‘The Indonesian people hereby declare their independence. The existing administrative organs must be seized by the people from the foreigners who now hold them’. In this text the greatest problem was the use of the term ’seized’. If the Indonesians were to ’seize’ power from the Japanese Army by force this might exasperate the Japanese and lead to a tragic collision between the two. The surrender notwithstanding, the Japanese Army still remained intact. Here again I will quote from Daisan no Shins?:

We were not necessarily unable to understand what the youth were thinking, nor the leaders. However, as the latter group admits, the present Japanese Army now, or at least immediately before the surrender, promoted Indonesian independence and approved it. Sukarno’s group wanted to avoid a situation where the Indonesians, by issuing a declaration which would immediately cause a Japanese reaction, would compel the Japanese Army to play a role as effective agent to the Allied Forces. As Hatta correctly says, revolution can only be achieved by force, but Indonesian power is still inadequate. Moreover, the enemy – the real enemy the Indonesians have to face is not the Japanese Army, which is deprived of its authority to exercise power, but the Dutch, who are preparing to suppress the Indonesian people again. It is brave but not wise for the Indonesians to fight the Japanese Army with such inadequate power.

The discussion continued for a long time. Finally the term ’seize’ in the text was replaced by ‘transfer’. In the expression, ‘the transfer of power and so forth should be attempted in a careful manner and as quickly as possible’

the word ‘attempted’ was changed to simply ‘carried out’. This text was written by Sukarno himself on paper brought from upstairs in Maeda’s residence, and still exists. One can clearly observe the corrections on the document. Thus the draft of the famous independence declaration was completed. It read: ‘We, the Indonesian people, hereby declare the independence of Indonesia. Matters concerning the transfer of power and so forth should be carried out in a careful manner and as quickly as possible’.

Miyoshi was requested to convey to the Army that the term ‘power’ (pemerintahan) † in the declaration meant ‘administrative authority’. The transfer of administrative authority had already been pursued as a basic policy and should therefore not provoke any opposition from the Army. Although it took only two or three hours to complete the draft, I felt that never in my life had I concentrated my mental powers more intensely. Everybody there seemed to feel the same and to be exhausted by the great strain of the moment, whether they were conscious of it at the time or not. This exhaustion might have been responsible for compromises on both sides. All of the participants did what they could, which the youths also must have appreciated. The final draft was typed out by Sayuti Melik.

At last the time had come for Sukarno to read the text to the members of the Committee who had been waiting in the next room. I heard Radjiman # asking, ‘Is this approved by the Gunseikan?’

I was irritated: ‘How stupid to say such a thing at this stage!’ I could also hear voices asking, ‘Who is going to sign?’ and ‘Who is to read it?’

According to Subardjo, Sukarni again opposed the contents

_
[

___________________
*     Footnote from previous page: Nishijima has compressed things here. This phrase had been substituted, at Hatta's suggestion, for the second sentence in the draft proposed by the youth group.
#     Dr Radjiman Wediodiningrat ( 1879-1952) had been a stalwart of Budi Utomo since its foundation in 1908. He was one of the first Indonesians to obtain a Dutch medical degree ( Amsterdam, 1910), and thereafter became official doctor of the Surakarta kraton (palace). As an elder statesman he was named chairman of the Committee to Investigate Indonesian Independence (BPKI) in June 1945, and had travelled to Saigon with Sukarno and Hatta in August to receive the promise of early independence.
†     The word used in the proclamation was in fact kekuasaan (power) not pemerintahan (government).
]

__

of the draft on the grounds that it lacked revolutionary spirit and was too weak in the way it was expressed. As Sukarni’s criticisms were supported by the youths, arguments over the draft broke out again. However, the members of the Committee overrode the opposition and decided in favour of the draft.

It was really an extraordinary declaration. It is often said that ‘ Sukarno and Hatta represented the people’, but there are no signs of the two on the document. * Such an independence document is probably rare anywhere in the world. Also we noticed only afterwards that the document was dated ‘17-8-’05′, i.e. 17 August 2605. The year 2605 was based on the Japanese calendar system. The fact that nobody, myself included, realized this may reflect the atmosphere of the meeting. Finally, I should like to raise the question of whether there were any Japanese present. It is true that there were Japanese, including myself, at the place where the draft was written, and that we even expressed our opinions. However, we did not attend the actual reading of the declaration, which was to the members of the Committee. Hatta has recorded his denial of our involvement. † However, Hatta and the others who support his claim confuse the place where the draft was written with the place where independence was declared.

Thus one act in the drama of independence had ended. It had indeed been a critical task. I myself was unable to indulge in the relaxed mood which would be normal after accomplishing such a difficult task, but I did notice that the youth group, the leaders’ group, and the Japanese looked relieved of tension, having reached a mutual agreement through compromise. I could not think of the future, perhaps because I was too exhausted by the prolonged strain. All those who had attended went their way with their own thoughts.

___

Neoliberalisasi , Kultur dan Sejarah.

Kutipan tulisan dibawah berasal dari “Privatizing the State (The CERI Series in Comparative Politics and International Studies) ” by Hibou. Tulisan ini menguraikan hubungan kompleks antara sejarah , antropologi dan sosiologi Indonesia terhadap Budaya “Asal Bapak Senang” , Kecendrungan Korupsi dan Neo-Liberalisasi di Indonesia.

Bagian2 terakhir sengaja dipotong. Untuk pemerhati Indonesia, beberapa analisa dibawah tidak jauh berbeda dengan kesimpulan Ben Anderson. Bahkan Pramoedya !

‘ASAL BAPAK SENANG’
(AS LONG AS IT PLEASES THE MASTER):
THE PASTORAL GOVERNMENT IDEA AND PRIVATISATION OF THE STATE IN INDONESIA
Romain Bertrand

‘Who knows, maybe there is no “state” at all? The government offices are closed. Official vehicles gravitate around the beach and the cinemas. Maybe what is taking place during twilight periods like now does not derive only from laziness and corruption, but is equivalent to a display.. .of a more elaborate form of “civic privatism”. The state, in fact, is getting fatter with new functions. It has penetrated in an unprecedented way into the heart of [ expanding] areas of human life. But.. .this state looks less and less like a state, because it is less and less the focal point of our loyalty and devotion.’ (Goenawan Mohamad, ‘Twilight in Jakarta’, 10 April 1982)’

‘Maybe there is no state at all?’: this disillusioned question deserves con sideration, because in fact it expresses more than ordinary anguish over the inability of administrative institutions to respond to social expecta tions. Goenawan Mohamad, a leading figure in independent journalism in Indonesia, was not out to echo the laments of those who consider the absence of the state—an unpardonable crime in exotic societies—as ex plaining and prolonging situations of chaos and social disorder. His pur pose was different, and definitely more pertinent: to pose the problems surrounding the links between state intrusions into private space on the one hand and private takeover of sovereign functions of the state on the other. The recent history of Indonesia, that of the New Order (1965-1998) but also of the Reformasi which began after Suharto’s resignation in May 1998, gives food for thought on this correlation.

[....deleted]


Intrusion of the state into private space: the legacy of the colonial government

The hypothesis that a pastoral idea of powers prevails in the organisation of authority relations in Indonesia may cause surprise. According to Michel Foucault pastoral power is 


‘a form of power that cannot be exercised with out knowing what is going on in people’s heads, without exploring their very souls.. .coextensive with life.. .and linked to production of truth: the truth of the individual himself.’ 

This form of power is derived from the ‘Christian technology of the flesh’. In other words, it is linked to the prac tice of penitential confession which became standardised and regular in Western Europe in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries, in the wake of the Catholic Counter-Reformation.’° It is known that the Church’s idea of guardianship of conscience very quickly spread into the arguments justi fying the monarchical state. Robert Muchembled has shown that in the absolute monarchy system, the image of the sovereign was reinforced with the image of a father of a family, and vice versa. Church and State together contributed to the definition and spread of a paternalist imaginaire of

authority relations. Pastoral power, a fruit of the simultaneous invention of the subject and the faithful in the West, thus belonged to a particular historically and geographically located trend in the political sphere, which cannot be identified with a general pattern of development of doctrines of kingship.


But how is it, then, that Indonesia, a stranger to feudalism as to Christianity,” has experienced that form of power? 

The ‘colonial encounter” may well have been one of the points of contact between Christian traditions of pastoral government and the creation of ideological preferences among the Indonesian political elite. Not through the Church and the missions, but through the state, permeated by religious ideas and practices. 

The origin of the authoritarian ‘family-state’ model, however, corresponds closely with an endogenous process . It appears as the product of the reappropriation by the Javanese administrative elite of a theme derived from the Dutch colonial government’s efforts to legitimise its domination. 

At the end of the nineteenth century the Netherlands East Indies’ went through profound change, linked with the transition from a regime of monopoly state capitalism to a free enterprise system. Dismantling of the state monopolies of production and marketing of horticultural surpluses began in 1862. This marked the end of the Obligatory Cultivation System (Cultuurstelsei) that Governor-General van den Bosch had instituted in the early 830s. The vast tea, coffee and sugar plantations of the interior of Java, and especially the mountainous estates of the Preanger region and the Oosthoek Regencies, were broken up amid competition among private entrepreneurs. From then on the character of the indigenous labour force 
had to be adapted to this new style of production. There was no longer any question of packing tens of thousands of koelies, snatched from their native lands, into insanitary hutments. On the contrary, mobility of energy and talent needed to be encouraged so as to improve the skills of the workforce and thus keep up with technical innovation.’ So the state had to take more systematic and effective responsibility for questions of collective public health, education and ‘moral improvement’ of the indigenous population.

The primary aim of the colonial government became—to quote Michel Foucault’s Les mots et les choses again—’care of the people’, that is, methodical management of their energies and their movements. It was in the course of this redeployment of administrative tasks that there emerged a concern by the state to ‘know everything’ about the state of the indige nous people’s minds. An alert observer of life in the Netherlands East Indies, the Frenchman Joseph Chailley-Bert, a publicist for the colonial movement in the Third French Republic, noted:


At this moment [ the 1860s] [ Dutch] resigned themselves to abandoning, with the State Cultivation, their function as agents for cultivation, but not their position as government officials; they looked around them to find how to make themselves useful, after their first use had disappeared. It was at that moment that there began to arise in people’s minds the outlines of a system of protection for the Javanese, especially the lowliest of them, those who were commonly called the small people (de Kleine Man). . . But this new departure had unexpected conse quences for them. The Dutch became passionate about their work and let themselves be carried away beyond what they had foreseen. It was certainly a different matter from managing cultivation. . . For entering men’s lives, finding out about their needs and desires, watching over their interests and securing respect for their rights, the difficulty increased with the number… 
[ Dutch] wanted to see everything, know everything and do everything. They substituted themselves for the native chief; seeing him as suspect, and for the native himself, seeing him as incapable, and they assumed the whole burden. . public affairs and even private affairs. The result was what one might expect. This huge task required extra staff, swelled government departments, imposed expenditure, burdened the budget.

‘Entering men’s lives, finding out about their needs and desires, watch ing over their interests’—that was the colonial government’s new plan, after the privatisation of the plantation economy had deprived it of the mission which had been its justification for police intervention in society.

This structural change in the imperatives and methods of surveillance of the indigenous people called for a corresponding reformulation of the ‘imperial project’. The old language of conquest, indifferent to the productive aspects of indigenous life as to its ‘cultural’ aspects, was no longer sufficient to explain and legitimise the colonial order. A ‘civilising’ argument had to be added, which meant taking care to listen to what the indigenous people were saying—to urge them to speak, note what they said, and question them with a new sort of fervour and concern.

As Chailley Bert shrewdly observed, the colonial state ‘assumed the whole burden. . .pu blic affairs and even private affairs’. It insinuated itself ever further forward into the daily workings of indigenous life. Multiple regulations interfering with the private lives of the colonial subjects— with their ritual calendars, their methods of cultivation, even their sexuality—led to a gradual blurring of the dividing line between the public domain and private interests.

The reformulation of the imperial project was based on two connected lines of thinking: colonial anthropology and the missionary pastoral approach.’ It is important to describe these briefly, because it was within them that the arguments still used by the Indonesian state power today, to maintain a system of domination conducive to predation of public re sources, were developed. Colonial anthropology was one of the many ‘in vestigative procedures’ through which the colonial state at the end of the 

nineteenth century sought, with an obsession never equalled before, to penetrate to the innermost depths of the ‘native mystery’. For the Dutch Orientalists at the beginning of the twentieth century, fully integrated into colonial decision-making circles, anthropology had to be turned into a therapeutic means of acculturation. If the ‘mentality of the natives’ needed to be better known, said the director of the Anthropology Section of the Royal Colonial Institute in Amsterdam, J. C. van Eerde, it was to minimise the perverse effects of their entry into the modern capitalist order. Better to know ‘them’, so as better to assess their potential for attaining the norms and rules of Western civilisation; better to decipher the movements of their consciousness and culture, to stifle their inclinations towards resistance as quickly as possible; better to translate their thinking and decode their myths, to be able to conform better to their own criteria of legitimacy. That, according to van Eerde, was the ultimate aim of Orientalist knowledge. Thus anthropology had to become a ‘pedagogy of the natives’ if it hoped to contribute to the success of the colonisation enterprise:

If pedagogy is a policy for children, we may call colonial policy pedagogy for the natives: its aim is to adapt to their civilisation what is useful and desirable for them in our civilisation. . .In the Tropics, we can envy the native his dark skin, but to put a fur coat over his shoulders to assuage this resentment would be to lead him to his downfall; similarly, he would not endure the superfluous burden of the European’s intellectual baggage… So it is up to anthropology to indicate what the native’s psy chological state makes it possible for him to endure.. .Does the scientific and well- balanced way of thinking that Western Europe has acquired after so many centu ries really fit the mystic sphere of thought of the East? Does the inflammatory slo gan of freedom not lead to license in a society that has hardly emerged from despotism? Are egoism and presumptuousness not levers used for undermining native society, the family, the tribe, the village and the region with all the mutual aid systems attached to them?… To take account of the general lack of spontaneity in the human mind, a long period of incubation is needed to get a new civilisation accepted.

It would however be highly unjust to believe that the sole aim of all the anthropological writing of the years from 1900 to 1930 was to serve the

brutal advances of the colonial power. Quite the contrary: the corporatist concern to preserve one’s subject of study—’primitive cultures’—often led anthropology to denounce the modernising aims of the imperial state. Thus it opposed the too rapid opening up of a territory, or became indig nant about the outlawing of customary practices. But what needs to be remembered about the premises of anthropological research is its obsession with uncovering the ‘mystery of the natives’, its persistent effort to make the intimate knowledge of the colonised people a shadowy zone of government. Even if it often condemned the intrusion of the colonial state into ever extended domains of the indigenous people’s private lives, anthropological study instilled in the heart of the imperial project a desire to know, a frenzy for uncovering which profoundly influenced the way that state codified and tried to exercise its power. In that sense this type of knowledge served as a wellspring of the state’s ‘documentation pro gramme’, and hence as backing for a pastoral form of government. By making the indigenous person an object of questioning, something unsta ted and calling for comment, colonial anthropology also made him an area for state intervention. By that very process it encouraged the tendency of the state power, first colonial and then independent, to establish thousands of disciplinary provisions aiming to bring the individual to confession. Thus colonial anthropology formed part of the origin of ‘pastoral power’—that is, the mode of government which forces the individual not only to obey but also to admit, before institutions playing a perpetual game of truth, his love and obedience.
So it is no accident that, in the history of the missionary pastor and the amateur anthropologist, the preach , thhe scholar wre so often one and the same person. Behind the will for knowledge immanent in the aim of controlling souls there was, invariably, a desire for confessions. 

Confessing was a sign of the congruence of the imperial aims and the missionary enterprise. Just as true conversion had value only through expiatory confession of the pagan faults that preceded it, genuine inclusion in the order of colonial subjection required repudiation of para

sitical loyalties. The colonial state, even though it sometimes strengthened the guardianship role of clans and lineages so as to make better use of them, excluded in principle any object of loyalty apart from itself.

In the modem colonial history of Indonesia, this congruence of language and practice between colonialism and the missions reached its paroxysm when, after fiercely disputed general elections, a Christian government coalition acceded to power in the Netherlands. This coalition adopted the aim of giving the Dutch the religious exaltation of the middle class , which were then engaged in a cyclve of collective introspection following a large-scale Puritan revival. The leader of the Anti-Revolutionary Party, Abraham Kuyper, who saw in the state apparatus ‘the arm of God’, became the head of this govern ment. Queen Wilhelmina then mentioned, in her Speech from the Throne in September 1901, the ‘ethical duty that the Netherlands, as a Christian nation, has to improve the living conditions of native Christians, to pro vide missionary activities with the funds that they needed, and to inform the [ administration as a whole that Holland has a moral obliga tion to fulfil towards the people [ the Netherlands East Indies].’

The Ethical Colonial Policy implemented from 1901 onwards, under the impulse of Queen Wilhelmina and Kuyper, aimed at the ‘development’ (opvoeding) of the Javanese. 
The ‘improvement of native wellbeing’, the watchword of the ‘Ethicis’ (supporters of the Ethical Policy), had a social aspect (fighting against serious poverty) and a moral one (conversion of the indigenous people to modernity, Christian and capitalist). The Ethical Colonial Policy, fruit of the conjunction of Christian doctrine and the doctrine of scientism, rooted itself in the idea that there was an ‘exact science’ of colonial government, for which new statistical knowledge was the instrument, and the transformation of the ‘Native’ into the Individual was the ultimate aim. It is true that the Ethical Policy never attained the ambitious objectives it had set itself, certainly not in terms of raising the standard of living of the popular masses. But it altered from top to bottom the perception of government action.

The theory of state action among the scribes of the Javanese Mataram Empire in the eighteenth century had been that government must keep the ‘world’s business’ going while not interfering with invisible checks and balances. The sovereign, by propitiatory inaction proclaimed as ascetic prowess, ensured harmony between the divine macrocosm (buwana agung) and the social microcosm (buwana alit). 

Javanese royalty found signifi

cance through rituals of silence and privation. Authority and austerity blended, since abstinence (tapa) and meditation (samadi) were evidence of the legitimacy of claims to the right to rule. The legitimate ruler acted in the invisible world (dunia kang samar) to which he had access on the strength of his self-denial exercises. Conversely, the Ethicis of Batavia had an ultra-voluntarist concept of political action, linked to an evolutionist view of indigenous societies. The idea that society could be transformed by decrees and regulations then progressed among the Javanese administra tive elite.
The emphasis on seeking the love and gratitude of the Javanese, which was an important theme of Dutch colonialist literature at the beginning of the twentieth century, reveals a real upheaval in the imperial domination strategy. It was no longer a matter of obtaining obedience by repression, but of winning confidence by persuasion. In other words, the colonial state embarked, at the beginning of the twentieth century, on a search for legitimacy. In that way it strove to consolidate its ideological base at a time when rivalry of imperial appetites and anticolonialism were getting stron ger on the international scene. That was why use of the vocabulary of kinship to describe relations between colonised and colonisers became over-emphasised.


The historian Akira Nagazumi observes: ‘The use of this metaphor of parent and child to describe the relationship between the government and native people is a recurring theme throughout the Ethical Period.’ The analogous images of teacher, guardian (voogd) and guide (gids) gained acceptance on a massive scale in textbooks of anthropology, digests of colonial law and the colonialist periodicals of the time. Since the 1 860s members of the European branch of the imperial administration had in fact been urged by the Governor General to call their Javanese counter parts ‘younger brothers’.

This model of the ‘just’ colonial relationship was also found at the lower levels of administrative contact. Heather Sutherland has shown for exam ple that 


‘The priyayi’s 
[ Javanese service nobility, integrated into the ) imperial administrative system] relationship with the people was authoritarian and paternalistic; they were expected to take care of the peasants as if they were their children while ruling them with a rod of iron.’

The Orientalists contributed in this way to the freezing, through a legally regulated form of etiquette, of a code of behaviour that had hitherto been extremely fluid in expression. In the pre-colonial period, precedence protocols were constantly modified by court intrigues, while the Orientalists gave them an unchangeable character. Directives on the ‘code of honour’ (hormat), claiming to ‘restore a tradition’, reinvented it according to the functional demands of the colonial situation. The most famous of those directives, made officials of the Pangreh Praja—the indigenous branch of the colonial administration—to act towards any European in the same way as towards a member of one of the two great dynasties of Solo and Jogja (with bowing on one’s knees, prostration, keeping the head bowed during conversation). Worshipping a European sub-chief like a sacred monarch was a terrible humiliation for the Javanese aristocracy. The practice of ‘friendly pressure’ (perintah alus) exerted by district chiefs on village chiefs reuctant to implement government decisions was also intensified in the years from 1900 to 1920. 
This new method of persuasion gradually replaced the insults and physical vio lence that had characterised relations between village chiefs and Euro pean officials in

In September 1902 the reform-minded A. Idenburg, who declared that ‘the aim of colonial rule was not to expand possessions but to encourage the advancement of indigenous people’, was appointed Minister of the Colonies. A wind of reform then blew through the colonial administrative edifice. An official of the Binnenlandsch Bestuur—the European branch of the colonial administration—described in laudatory terms, in his memoirs, the great transformation in the administrative staff of the Netherlands East Indies at the beginning of the twentieth century :

Never, perhaps, has any Government set itself so wholeheartedly and with such zeal and comprehensive thoroughness to building up the welfare of its subjects as the Government of Netherlands India in the beginning of the present centuly. Most of the officials at that time had fallen under the spell of Multatuli during their studies at Leiden, and came to India as enthusiastic idealists, filled with ardour to take part in the great civilizing mission of the Netherlands. On their arrival they found a welfare programme as the official policy of Government; zeal for the well-being of the people was a condition of promotion, as any who were reluctant to interfere with native life were likely to be regarded with disfavour as ‘weak and recalcitrant administrators’ 

When the Ethicis finally came to power in Batavia, they reoriented the imperial administrative apparatus towards collecting information on indigenous life. In the significant expression of De Kat Angelino, adviser on Native Affairs to the Governor General in the 1920s, ‘The government did its utmost to get first hand information relating to the intimate nature of Indonesian society.’ 

The idea that there was an ‘intimate nature’ of the subjected society, an indigenous shadowy silence that needed to be brought to light, was the guiding principle of the redeployment of the state. Map ping of the territories, balancing of resources and population, recension of specific religious features, collection of Javanese manuscripts, were all res ponses to the supposed enigma of the indigenous people, which Oriental ist studies had constructed while constructing themselves.

Spread of the language of kinship

At the end of the nineteenth and the beginning of the twentieth centuries, then, the Netherlands East Indies, direct ancestors of modern Indonesia, were structured by a dense network of power relations expressed through the language of kinship. The colonial government was the ‘father’ of the colonised people, indigenous officials were the ‘younger brothers’ of their European colleagues, peasants were the ‘devoted sons’ of the service aristo cracy responsible for keeping them docile. The idea behind this language offensive could be explained in a corresponding way: the problems of the colonial situation were, after all, just simple ‘family affairs’. The kinship

vocabulary rebuilt from scratch an illusion of proximity between rulers and ruled, colonised and colonisers. It symbolically bridged the gap of contradiction of interests between colonial power and colonial subjects. It aroused among the colonial elites the reassuring feeling of being able to understand, and hence domesticate, the indigenous world at any time.
However, this language of kinship should not be seen as exclusively the arm of the colonial government. In fact the leaders of the nationalist movement readily adopted it, because it enabled them to marry revolu tionary zeal with social hierarchy. Since a family is ordered around the uncontested power of a father whose word is law, the national family must obey the orders of an unchallenged chief. Nationalist ‘unanimism’, that frenzied desire for communion between the People and its Guide, thus flowed into the imaginaire of the political elite toJ2i any social revolution in the bud. A radical overturning of the structures of authority would inev itably have endangered the privileged status of the elites of the nationalist movement, who sprang from the merchant bourgeoisie or the service nobility of Java.
Ki Hadjar Dewantara, a prince of Yogyakarta who became in the early 191 Os a revered figure of resistance to the colonial oppressor, established in the early 192Os a network of alternative schools, Gardens of Knowl edge (Taman Siswa). The aim of these schools was to turn Javanese youth away from the seductions of the West, described as decadent. In those schools, true nurseries of the nationalist movement, absolute obedience was due to the teachers, whom the pupils called Bapak. Ki Hadjar in turn reigned as unchallenged master over his teachers, who called him ‘Fa ther’. The kinship analogy also made it possible to give meaning to the nationalist struggle. The struggle against the coloniser was always pre sented as the accomplishment of ‘family fullness’:

Borne up by the principle of the ‘fullness and holiness of life’, we can do no other than give primacy to the complete and holy Family, with its Father and Mother, who in every good family, stand side by side, have the same rights but different tasks, have a unity of interests, a unity of strengths, and a unity of soul.


The image of the national family thus soothed the consciences of members oft hepriyayi caste, who refused to consider the end of colonialism as involving a passage to egalitarianism. 

Ki Hadjar Dewantara’s work was to have profound influence on Sukamo, who borrowed from him the con cept of ‘guided democracy’ and declared him ‘his friend and master in everything’. This idea of the state as a living being, consisting of interde pendent but not equally dispensable organs, is also found in the writings of Raden Soepomo, an influential figure in the Investigating Committee for the Preparation of Independence which met from 1943 onwards with the approval of the Japanese occupation authorities. Soepomo influenced the rejection of a proposal to mention individual rights in the text of the 1945 Constitution. An occasional admirer of Mussolini and follower of the theories of Social Darwinism, he conceived what he called the ‘inte gral state’ a whole, not differentiated from the body of society:

If we want to establish an Indonesian state in accordance with the characteristic features of Indonesian society, it must be based on an integralist state philosophy, on the idea of a state which is united with all its people, which transcends all groups in every field… The state is nothing but the entire society.. According to the integralist view of the state as a nation in its ordered aspect, as a united people in its structured aspect, there is basically no dualism of state and the individual, no conflict between the state organization on the one hand and the legal order of indi viduals on the other… There is no need to guarantee the fundamental rights and liberties of the individual against the state, because the individual is an organic part of the state, with his own position and an obligation to help realize the state’s greatness..

Raden Soepomo’s language shows how the kinship analogy, when allied with nationalist ‘unanimism’, slips towards a totalitarian conception of the state. This conception exalts harmony and the national community while reifying differences of status between rulers and ruled. The former— warriors (ksatria) and ascetics (pandita)—must govern; the latter—the common people (wong cilik)—must obey. If everyone fulfils the role assigned to him by the cosmic order, the political community will know prosperity. But if anyone departs from his essential duty (darma), chaos will befall the kingdom. This fatalistic vision of the social order was already present in the pre-colonial kingdoms, strongly marked by Hindu 
influence. It was revived and amended in a ‘fascist’ sense by the theorists of the Javanese nationalist movement, who claimed Hindu descent. The later, nationalist history of the language of kinship, initially used by the colonial state to cover up the original injustice of its domination, suggests that its use was continuous, through the interruption caused by the Japa nese occupation and the independence struggle.

Since colonial gouvernementalité operated through successive hege monic steps forward and not only by bloodstained gestures of conquest, and wrapped the traumatic experience of subjection in terms of family feeling, as well as institutionalising a ‘plunder economy’ in which holding of state responsibilities was equivalent to a passport to illicit enrich ment, it bequeathed to independent Indonesia—through intellectuals accustomed to those tricks of legitimisation—a principle for the political sphere clean contrary to the classical Western model of separation between the public space and private ambitions. The common culturalist approach can easily attribute the extent of criminal behaviour by the Indonesian administrative elites to the enigmatic survival of a supposed ‘Javanese patrimonialism’. But there it falls into the error of considering the language of kinship as a univocal cultural effect. In fact a careful examination of the colonial foundations of contemporary power relations shows that the art of predation, even if it wraps itself in the finery of tradition that has become folklore, appears as a structural effect. Predation amounts to a functioning principle of a system of domination centred on countless rela tions of subjection. In other words, there is no ‘cultural predisposition’ of Indonesians to robbery.

The language of justification of corruption and nepotism, in addition, can be used in many contradictory ways. The overthrow of despots, as
well as applause of them, can be coded in the language of kinship. An illegitimate father can be repudiated, just as an ‘uncle’ removed from power can be honoured. Some supporters of Amien Rais, leader of the Partai Amanat Nasional and one of the two or three credible candidates for the presidency of Indonesia in 1999, called him Om Rais (‘uncle Rais’, a term often used by a disciple for a spiritual guide).

The inheritance of modern colonial gouvernementalité, in Indonesia, is thus found at two levels. First, this mode of gouvernementalité favoured abolition of the lines of demarcation between the public and private spaces in the name of a pastoral idea of power. Secondly, it made system atic the description of power relations in terms of kinship. Two points need to be made clear here. 

First, it is certainly correct to say, as the culturalist school does, that these phenomena existed at the time of the great pre colonial empires. The term priyayi, referring to the Javanese service nobil ity (entrusted with the administrative tasks in conquered territory) is derived, according to the historian Soemarsaid Moertono, from the expression para yayi (literally ‘the junior brothers of the prince’); so, in the seventeenth century, court circles were using kinship metaphors to signify allegiance or seal an alliance. But to argue from this that the excesses of patrimonialism of the Indonesian state have their roots in the theories of pre-colonial Javanese kingship would be to underestimate dangerously the particular legacy of the colonial period. The colonial state, on the advice of the Orientalists, indeed emphasised certain aristocratic codes, and shamelessly introduced new ones, to satisfy the requirements of its daily operations. 


The period of Dutch imperial domination, in the history of modern Indonesia, is therefore like a moment of rewriting, hence reinvention of Javanese culture’.

And then, speaking of ‘heritage’ does not mean adopting determinism. The procedures of control and systems of justification perfected by the colonial state did not compel Indonesian political actors to adopt this or that sort of language or behaviour. But while they did not dispose Indone sians’ conduct, they were at their disposal—that is, those actors could use those procedures and systems to claim the precious backing of Tradition. So those technologies and narratives of domination, which could be put to almost any number of strategic uses, were only one material among many others in the process of building forms of legitimacy.

[...sisanya baca bukunya saja].

Menganalisa kejadian Seputar Jatuhnya Kabinet Sjahrir pertama

Saya tulis ulang berdasarkan dua buku yakni Indonesian .. by Arnold Brackman yg terbit tahun 1963 dan Sjahrir:exile dari Mrazek yang terbit tahun 1994. Kedua buku ini walaupun ditulis dalam rentang yang sangat lama, tapi saling mengisi walaupun ada kontradiksi antara satu dan lain. 
Timbul pertanyaan kritis baru, seperti :

1. Apakah Bung Karno terlibat dalam pemebentukan Persatuan Perjuangan ?
2. Apakah Pidato Tan Malaka di Purwekerto dimaksudkan untuk menggeser Sjahrir atau justru beraliansi dengan Sjahrir ?
3. Apakah Sjahrir menganggap Bung Karno terlibat dalam usaha kejatuhan kabinetnya yang pertama ?
4. Apa yang terjadi pada sidang KNIP di Surakarta pada 26 February 1946 yang dihadiri tan malaka, soekarno dan Sjahrir ?

Karena ini sejarah yang sangat penting dan crucial, bagian bagian sejarah yang penting saya tebalkan.
MOHON JIKA ADA INFORMASI TAMBAHAN, Silahkan add di comments.

==============

____

MRAZEK BOOK:

…….Pag 312:

….
Tan Malaka’s Politik, as we noticed, had been announced as a book “as big as Sjahrir’s. Muhammad Jamin published his “Tan Malaka: Father of the Indonesia Republic” in Berita Indonesia, where Sjahrir’s influence was also strong. Subadio Sastrosatomo follower of Sjahrir, wrote later:

I saw the efforts of the people’s congress, which took place in Purwokerto, a efforts to put Tan Malaka into the limelight [ menonggolkan Tan Malaka], and to shake [ the position of Soekarno].

I did not see the congress a opposition against the cabinet of Sjahrir….

The emergence of Tan Malaka and his coming up with the Minimum Program at the Purwokerto people’ congress, had, indeed, been an effort… to continue the spirit of the Testament [ Sjahrir together with Tan Malaka were mentioned as Sukarno’ and Hatta’s successorsj. 

Benedict Anderson suggested that Tan Malaka, if he had built a powerful political organization to support him, might have played a role in the Indonesian revolution comparable to that of Ho Chi Minh in Vietnam. According to Anderson,. the only other attempt in the post-surrender years, besides Sjahrir’s “Our Struggle" to analyze systematically and to give a coherent perspective to the Revolution the writings and speeches by Tan Malaka. It is impossible to say what might happened, if these two extraordinary men, during late 1945 and early 1946, had been able to work together 
.
Adam Malik dated the beginning of “separation” of Tan Malaka from Sjahrir at the “time of Purwokerto,” which is at the begining of January. Amir Sjarifoedin wrote later that Tan Malaka and his group were not “wholly in agreement” Sjahrir’s cabinet policies “already in January.” 

According to Sjahrir himself “animosity” and “bitterness” arose between his and Tan Malaka’s camps months” after the cabinet was formed, thus again in mid-January.

One thing was striking. Both men, Sjahrir and Tan Malaka, appeared to play a passive role in the separation. “Others,” neither Sjahrir nor Tan Malaka, appeared to be be the principal actors.

____

According to Subadio’s memoirs:

It was Abdoelmadjid who was sent as a representative of the Socialist Party
[ Amir and Sjahrir] to the people’s congress at Purwokerto. He reported
back about the congress to other party leaders—Amir Sjarifoeddin, Tan Ling
Djie and myself…. He explained the events as a true Marxist-Stalinist, and
in terms of the Comintem and Dimitrov line. Thus, he described Tan Malaka
as a Trotskyist, which is a renegade, an opponent, and an enemy…. Amir
Sjarifoeddin, as a member of cabinet believed that the congress was an effort
to begin an opposition, and thus it was not difficult for him to accept the
ideolOgical explanation which Abdoelmadjid, and also Tan Ling Djie,
gave.

I asked L. N. Sitoroes, a political companion of Sjahrir, and also a man who was
known at the time for his liking of Tan Malaka, if Sjahrir and Tan Malaka could ever
have made it to the top and led the Republic together. “No way,” Sitoroes answered,
“it could not be done. Not in the Indonesia of the time. At least one of them would
have to be a Javanese.”


It seems that Tan Malaka and Sjahrir were increasingly being used. It also seems
that they both failed at the same historical moment, for the same reason and, per-
haps, by the same design. The scene of the failure of both of them was the center, the
fortress—Yogyakarta, the Javanese interior, the place where Sukarno, as we noted
above, “came into his own.” 

On February 6, 1946, in Yogyakarta, the executive of the Masjumi, the Islamic
and strongly nationalist republican political party, making public its loss of patience
with compromises with the West, declared its non-confidence in Sjahrir’s cabinet.
The Indonesian National Party—close to Sukarno, resembling strongly the prewar
Partindo and also led by Sartono, Sukarno’s lifelong ally, and Sjahrir’s life-long
rival—immediately followed suit.

.
On February 17, Sukarno, in Yogyakarta, decided to speak out. Reading his
speech later, one can not but be impressed by how much and how well Sukarno used Tan Malaka’s rhetoric and Tan Malaka’s flame; and how he was able, at the same time, to display truly paternal benevolence when speaking about Sjahrir:

______


Be confident that our prime minster will not swerve in his determination to maintain the demand for 100 per cent independence [ Freedom]. But if it should ever turn out that Sjahrir is not maintaining the demand for 100% independence [ Freedom] that all of you, my brothers, want, then I have the right to dismiss him.

On February 23, Sjahrir, traveling hastily from Jakarta on the Special Train to Yogyakarta,sent Sukarno a secret letter of resignation. This still might have been, and it probably was, just a tactical step. On February 26, according to Tan Malaka, Sjahrir also demanded to see him. “I hurried to Yogyakarta to meet him on February 26, 194 wrote Tan Malaka, “However the meeting never took place.”

On the same day, February 26, in Surakarta, a Javanese princely town an hour’s drive from Yogyakarta, and in the Solo Valley, a plenary meeting of the “Central In donesian National Council,” took place. The delegates did not know about the letter of resignation which Sjahrir had sent three days earlier, and to which Sukarno had not yet responded. The meeting started with Sjahrir reporting “what he had attained through his conferences with the Dutch and the British till now.” 

Then Sukarno took the rostrum.
Sukarno began by handing Sjahrir a big file of “about 250 telegrams from local
leaders.” Then turning to the audience, Sukarno spoke out:

All these telegrams demand exactly the same—”lOO% Freedom,” and that a war against the Dutch be declared. Further, all these men and women ask that the conferences [ the foreigners in Jakarta] be stopped. One has been conferring for four months already and nothing is achieved…. The Dutch made me duck. Each subsequent day they come one more step in my direction. Because they were not in a state to play an open game, they called in the British. My boys are depicted as war criminals by them, and so am

After Sukarno, Tan Malaka was given the platform. This probably was the cru cial speech in the old man’s life. During “a heated exchange of words,” a report says, Tan Malaka urged Sjahrir “not to drift too much to the Dutch side. Sjahrir then asked Sukarno to permit his cabinet to be expanded. This Sukarno waved away by saying that this should be decided by the plenum.

At the next session of the “Central Indonesian National Council,” held two days later, on February 28, many further telegrams from Sukarno’s file were read—so many, indeed, that it took the whole session, and any further decision on the fate of Sjahrir’s cabinet had to be delayed till March 2.

On March 2, more telegrams were read, and then Sukarno gave another speech:


We are in war, the Indonesian Republican Army must be strengthened. Its
strength shall be brought up to 1,000,000 men.. .. A course is already em-
barked upon to develop an “Indonesian atom bomb” filled with nitrogen.
No Dutchman shall be admitted into our offices and into our public enter
prise. Eurasians may be appointed only when this is especially approved by
the President.

Now, it was no more Tan Malaka’s but Sukarno’s flame. It was also announced
that “Soekarno would not go to Jakarta, and would not negotiate with the Dutch.”
This also was the moment when Sjahrir resigned—as he said later—”because I could
not get enough cooperation from the top Ieadership.”


Some people believed that with Sjahrir defeated, Tan Malaka might be offered
Sjahrir’s job. According to Hatta, however, he and Sukarno now decided to block
Tan Malaka’s road to power.

The weakened Sjahrir was used. Hatta announced a new cabinet on the very day
of Sjahrir’s resignation. Sjahrir again was its premier, but, without Sjahrir being able
to resist, a few new people entered his cabinet, representing the Masjumi and the In
donesian National Party. Significantly, Sjahrir called the program of his second
cabinet “Soekarno’s ‘five points’.” Tan Malaka, in his own way, spoke about the
same thing. He criticized the second Sjahrir cabinet, but, as Anderson commented,
It is very noticeable that in his critique Tan Malaka makes almost no mention
of Sjahrir but constantly refers to the “Soekarno-Hatta government,” in effect
attributing the program to those two men.

On March 17, 1946, two weeks after the crisis, Tan Malaka, together with some of
his followers, Abikoesno, Jamin, and Soekarni, was arrested in Surakarta. “I did not
know,” Tan Malaka wrote in 1948, two years later, and when still in prison, “I did
not understand who did it, why, and on what official authority.”
It appears again that “others,” neither Sjahrir nor Tan Malaka, were the main
actors. Of course, Sjahrir was prime minister at the time of the arrest. Amir Sjarifoed
din, the minister of defense—his signature was on the warrant—later claimed that he
……..

BRACKMAN’S BOOK :

P47:

Up to this point in the developing revolution, the orthodox Communists were almost conspicuous by their absence. Not so the national Communists. From the outset, Tan Malaka maneuvered to widen the split between Sukarno and Sjahrir. He first approached Sjahrir and proposed that the resistance forces join with his own group in deposing the “fascist” Sukarno. Tan Malaka was apparently unenthusiastic about making an attempt to seize 

direction of the revolution without first eliminating Sukarno. As Tan Malaka doubtlessly expected, Sjahrir rebuffed him. Accordingly, Tan Malaka embarked on a daring and amateurish scheme to attain power by duplicity. He sought to capitalize on the growing unrest in Batavia by inducing Sukarno to draft a political will designating him as sole heir in the event that harm befell Sukarno and Hatta, which was probable once such a testament was signed. Sukarno, recognizing the need for some kind of a political will, consented, but he cleverly divided his legacy among four heirs-Tan Malaka, Iwa, Sjahrir, and Wongsonegoro–the last-named a respected old-line nationalist with no following. Sukarno felt that this group was representative of the main currents of the revolution–Sjahrir, the Marxist; Wongsonegoro, the nationalist; and Iwa, a devout Moslem, his Communist background notwithstanding. Sukarno preached that only by a blending of these three forces –Marxism, nationalism, and Islam–could the revolution succeed and the republic survive. In his mind, perhaps, Tan Malaka embodied a coalition of these three forces. Although Tan Malaka was disappointed by the will, the very fact that Sukarno had drafted a testament suited his designs admirably. As expected, the news of the testament spread rapidly, although its contents were kept secret (and have yet to be officially disclosed).

Now Tan Malaka drafted a new testament, in which he alone was named political heir. He then proceeded to the interior and spread rumors that Sukarno and Hatta were captives of the Dutch and that Sjahrir was in the pay of the British. By transferring the government to Jogjakarta, Sukarno exposed the absurdity of Tan Malaka’s charges.

Apparently, Sukarno now felt that he could use Tan Malaka to depose Sjahrir, for Sukarno believed that Sjahrir’s democratization program and conciliatory attitude toward the Allies had been pursued too far. Sukarno therefore encouraged Tan Malaka to capitalize on the widespread opposition to Sjahrir’s policy of negotiations with the Dutch and British by constructing a broad united front behind the government. To achieve this, Tan Malaka organized the Persatuan Perdjuangan (Fighting Front) at Purwokerto. Within a short interval, the Persatuan succeeded in enrolling 141 parties and organizations “without the slightest difficulty.”4 Both the Masjumi and PNI entered the Persatuan, as did the Socialists and other parties of the Left that had blossomed after the introduction of the multi-party system. * No party could afford to dissociate itself from a front that enjoyed Presidential ncouragement and was ostensibly organized to marshal the country behind the government.

By January 28, Tan Malaka apparently felt sufficiently secure to draft a seven-point Persatuan program, which, he felt, the moderate Sjahrir would reject. The “minimum demands” called for

Negotiations on the basis of the [100 per cent] recognition of Indonesian independence.

Composition of the government in harmony with the tendencies among the people.

Composition of the [Army] in harmony with the tendencies among the people.

Disarming of Japanese forces.

Confiscation and exploitation of enemy [Dutch] estates.

Confiscation and exploitation of enemy [Dutch] factories.


Sjahrir confounded Tan Malaka by endorsing the program. Tan Malaka countered by demanding its immediate implementation, a move that made it clear that Tan Malaka’s primary objective was to topple Sjahrir. 

The parties of the Left, Sjahrir’s main source of strength, resigned from the Persatuan; the Masjumi, by then in the cabinet, wavered. On February 28, Sjahrir, who considered Sukarno a coarchitect of the Tan Malaka strategy, abruptly resigned as Premier. Sukarno, forced to choose between Sjahrir and Tan Malaka, recognized the ambitious Tan Malaka as the greater personal threat and turned again to Sjahrir.On March 2, Sjahrir returned to office. 


Tan Malaka, enraged by Sukarno’s deception, set about to attain power by a coup d’etat. His plans were thwarted, however, when the government arrested him and a number of aides, including Yamin and Chaerul Saleh, on March 17. His arrest, meanwhile, generated disorders at Soerakarta, Central Java, largely between the Barisan Banteng (Buffalo Legion) and the Pesindo (Socialist Youth), which supported the government. 

==============================================================

Sejarah Pulau Jawa dari VOC hingga Politik Etis.

Ini ada sejarah singkat tentang pulau jawa yg cukup ringkas, bagaimana perkembanganya dari masa VOC, CulturStelsel , Liberal Free Market lalu dilanjuti oleh Ethical Policy.

Banyak yang lupa sebenarnya kalau Indonesia yang sekarang mengadop policy 100 percen Neo-Liberal Policy, sebenarnya hal ini merupakan pengulangan sejarah 130 tahun lalu ; dimana setelah masa Culturstelsel , belanda mengadopsi sistem Free Market Liberal, dimana kepemilikan kekayaan alam Indonesia sebenarnya tidak 100 persen dimiliki oleh Belanda, melainkan dimiliki enterpreneur2 dari banyak negara. Kalau saya tidak salah, sekitar 60 persen kekayaan Java saat itu dikuasai oleh enterpreneur Belanda. sisanya dibagi2 ke enterpreneur Jerman , Prancis, Inggris, AS dan Jepang. Lalu dimana masa inilah taraf hidup orang di pulau Jawa turun drastis selama 30 tahun. Dan baru nanti pada 1900, muncul kesadaran untuk ngebenerin kondisi sosial ekonomi yang sudah teramat rusak.

———————-
THE EMERGENCE OF THE MODERN INDONESIAN ELITE
by Robert Van Niel Associate Professor of History Russell Sage College

QUADRANGLE BOOKS, INC. – CHICAGO W. VAN HOEVE LTD – THE HAGUE AND BANDUNG 1960

In 1900 Java was a principal part of the Dutch colonial empire. Ultimate control over Java and other parts of the empire had resided, since the middle of the nineteenth century, in the hands of the Netherlands’ parliament, or States General, as it is called. Practical control over colonial affairs was in the hands of the Minister of Colonies who was one member of a cabinet responsible for its actions to the States General. The Minister of Colonies carried out the general colonial policy of the government. This general colonial policy was formulated, since mid-century, by public opinion as expressed through the States General. This general policy was relatively constant and was not basically altered by changes of cabinet or parliament. The Minister of Colonies was responsible for implementing the general colonial policy in a fashion compatible with the colonial aims of his party and any other parties included in the cabinet. To assist him in this task he had a Colonial office or a Ministry of Colonies in The Hague in which many persons with colonial experience were employed. These persons were often able to influence the decisions of the Minister of Colonies.

Political parties in the Netherlands were anything but indifferent to colonial affairs. Each political party had its colonial experts, usually men with experience in the colonies, who formulated the party’s colonial program and defended it in the parliament and in the press. The colonial program of many parties about 1900 bore little relationship to their position within the political spectrum of domestic politics. Virtually all parties were agreed on a humanizing reorientation of colonial policy at this

__

time, but there were differences on means and methods of applying this new orientation. 
The most far reaching in their desire for alterations in the colonial policy were the socialists and the conservatives — both of whom had come to regard the prevailing liberal ideology with distrust.

In 1900 no political party advocated a termination of the colonial tie between Java and the Netherlands.

By 1900 the Dutch had been on Java for about 300 years. During this time they had tried only a few long term policies in regulating their relationship to the bulk of the island’s inhabitants. Basic to each approach toward the colonial relationship was a desire to keep regulation as indirect as possible and an implicit understanding that the relationship must be as profitable as possible for the Netherlands. The Dutch East India Company ( 1602-1798) had assumed sovereignty over most of Java in order to protect its commercial and mercantile position. The company’s chief interest lay in obtaining and exporting and selling certain basic commodities grown on Java. Political and administrative control was ancillary to this major interest, and consequently assumed an indirect form which almost bordered on indifference. 


During the Napoleonic Wars the Dutch lost control of Java to the English for a few years, and when they regained control of the island in 1816 they discovered that a new system of monetary land tax and more direct administrative control had been instituted. The Dutch attempted to continue the former and to modify the latter, but this makeshift system proved incapable of producing revenue to meet the unusual expenses of war on Java and war with Belgium. 

In order to raise more revenue the Forced Cultivation System (Cultuur Stelsel) was introduced in 1830. This system reverted to taxation in selected produce. This produce was to be grown and partly processed by Indonesians under the supervision of their own administrators and under the watchful eye of European civil servants. The produce from this controlled system was to be delivered to the government in lieu of monetary taxes. During the first decade of operation this system raised great amounts of revenue for the motherland, but during the

__

early 1840’s certain unfortunate occurrences within Indonesian society connected with the impact of the system came to light. When the King of the Netherlands lost his personal control of colonial affairs to the States General in 1848, a gradual review of who was making money and how it was being made on Java began to take place.

The Forced Cultivation System collapsed during the 1860’s under the weight of internal corruption, under the pressures placed upon it by private business and commercial interests who had grown politically powerful in the Netherlands, and under the ambitions of European entrepreneurs on Java who wished to terminate governmental land control so they might make individual fortunes. The economic rationale was supplied by the dwindling revenues from the system, and the moralistic rationale appeared in the form of illiberal treatment of the Indonesian people whose energies had made the system work. The parliamentary speeches of Baron van Hoëvell and the writings of E. Douwes Dekker (Multatuli) which were directed against various aspects of the system found great response among the people of the Netherlands.During the 1860’s the government allowed private enterprise to enter the island of Java. In order to avoid economic chaos or collapse, the Forced Cultivation System was dismembered slowly: by 1870 the major products and plantations had been placed in the hands of private entrepreneurs, but the last vestiges of the system were not swept away until 1917. 


After about 1870 the policy of the Dutch government toward Java comes to be known as the Liberal Policy.

Under this policy the island (and eventually the entire archipelago) was opened to the penetration of private capital. 

The wealth of Java was now no longer to flow into the coffers of the government, but instead was to benefit the Dutch middle class who had now also come to control the political process in the Netherlands. From 1870 to 1900 private entrepreneurs made and lost fortunes in Java. 

Those who were successful became financially powerful — those who failed often became managers for the successful. The economic fortunes in Java were such that by 1900 most enterprises on the

island were owned or managed by a nucleus of corporations and banks in Europe. These financial interests exerted great, though not exclusive influence, upon Dutch colonial policy and practice.

The Liberal Policy of the Dutch government toward Java also had a strong humanitarian impulse. After 1870 measures were taken to protect the Indonesian peasant against the full impact of a free functioning money economy. Indonesian landholding was protected against foreign acquisition; a leasehold arrangement was the most that was permitted to non-Indonesian interests. The European civil administration in Java now showed an increasing concern for the welfare of the people of the island. Yet, despite these safeguards, the prosperity of the Indonesian people seemed to be declining, and it was feared that Javanese social solidarity would be affected. Both humanitarian and financial interests were concerned by the decreasing welfare of the Javanese: the former, because of the inability to rectify social and economic injustices; the latter, because of the growing need for markets for produced consumer goods. As early as 1874 the conservative ( Anti-Revolutionary Party) statesman, 
A. Kuyper, was speaking in the States General of a humanized capitalism which would fulfill a moral obligation to the peoples of the East Indies.8 This urge toward a new orientation of the existing policy grew not only in the motherland, but in the European sector of East Indian society as well.

After 1870 the composition of the European community in Java began to change. This change was largely the result of the rapidly increasing numbers of private citizens introduced into an area that had previously been the exclusive preserve of government civil servants and administrators.8 The new group of Europeans, working either for themselves or for corporations, began to create for themselves in Java another type of life than had existed under a society made up of government employees. Urban centers became not only commercial centers, but came to be centers of European society as well. Better educated and middle class Europeans brought their Western way of life with them, creating a microcosm of the West in the urban centers

of Java. About 1900 European women began to arrive in Java, and from that date forward European society grew more exclusive with regard to other ethnic groups in Java. European society on Java now came to have a new internal solidarity of its own, and also came to have ideas about regulating its own internal affairs on Java and about the colonial policy of the motherland.


The European community on Java was not only concerned about the diminishing welfare of the Indonesian people, but was also greatly irked by the completely centralized control of the government over Europeans in Java. 

The newly emerging European society wanted to regulate its own internal affairs and demanded from the government a greater degree of financial autonomy and local self government. This demand was principally viewed in terms of the European community on Java, but it was only a short step to envisioning similar rights for Indonesians who through heightened prosperity and increased education would eventually be placed on the road to self government. In 1888, P. Brooshooft, editor of the Semarang newspaper De Locomotief, openly voiced the desire for greater local autonomy and improved conditions for the indigenous peoples of the East Indies in an open letter to a number of influential Netherlanders. This started a series of articles against the economic liberalism of the prevailing colonial policy which was culminated in 1899 by C. T. van Deventer’s famous article on the “‘Honor Debt.’”11 This article called upon the Netherlands to make a financial settlement upon the needy colony as partial recompense for the fortunes that had been withdrawn from Java under the Forced Cultivation System. As of 1900 Van Deventer estimated the sum involved slightly under two hundred million guilders. Attacks on the government were also occurring within the States General where the colonial authority for the Social Democratic Party, H. H. van Kol, took the lead in harassing the government on matters of colonial policy and practice.

From this widespread dissatisfaction with the prevailing policy a new orientation emerged after 1900. This new orientation in the colonial relationship was called the Ethical Policy. It found

wide acceptance among all groups, for while continuing to advocate development of the colony by private capital, it also sought to increase prosperity and welfare and to extend autonomy. Such a policy contained something for persons of virtually every political inclination. In addition, the Ethical Policy would also provide the Netherlands with an irreproachable colonial policy toward the East Indies. This was sorely needed, for some foreign powers, viewing the desultory conflict in Atjeh ( North Sumatra) which had been going on without decision since 1874, were wondering about the application to other areas of the rule of ‘effective occupation’ which the Berlin Convention of 1885 had established with regard to African claims. 13 The Ethical Policy would provide the Netherlands with a proper moralistic foundation from which to ward off any foreign claims. The greatest advantage of the Ethical Policy, however, was its ability to inspire Hollanders toward a more glorious colonial future in Java while also opening the way for Indonesians to share in the glory of their own future.

The government which controlled affairs on Java in 1900 and against which the European community on Java was raising its claims for autonomy, was the Netherlands Indian government. It was indeed a centralized government with ultimate control residing in a governor general who stood at the head of an administrative hierarchy which branched down into the local districts. This government had been designed to deal with and control Indonesian society; by default it had for the past couple of decades been obliged to control the newly emerging European society of the urban centers on Java. The administrative corps of the Netherlands Indian government probably had no serious objection to granting autonomy to local communities who were in democratic fashion able to provide for their own needs. Soon after 1900 the legal basis to make this possible was provided (see below, p. 42 ). The administrative corps for its part was principally concerned with Indonesians, even though its members were part of the European social group and, as such, subject to pressures and influences from that group.

The governor general who stood at the head of the Netherlands

Indian government was appointed by the Crown upon recommendation of the Minister of Colonies. A governor general normally served a five year term though this was not legally prescribed and might be shortened or extended as the situation seemed to warrant. The governor general was responsible to the Crown for the implementation of colonial policy on the spot: he was the supreme authority in the colony.

In practice, of course, he was expected to follow the instructions of the Minister of Colonies from The Hague, but his advice as the man on the scene helped in turn to shape these instructions. In actuality his position was an extremely powerful one, for the distance from the motherland allowed him great freedom of initiative. His power, just as that of all administrators, was dependent upon the assistance and cooperation of others — he could not personally supervise all activities. That a governor general was sometimes sheltered from the stark realities of events by subordinates or was subtly influenced and pressured by close associates is probably true. In general, however, most of them managed to have a fairly accurate picture of the state of affairs within the colony. This does not mean they always accomplished everything they wished.

Next to the governor general was a high ranking advisory body known as the Council of the Indies. The governor general was president of this council ex officio, but his relationship to its members was that of primus inter pares. The Council of the Indies was composed for the most part of high ranking civil administrators with lengthy colonial experience. The degree of reliance the governor general placed upon the Council varied with individual cases.

In general by 1900 it can be said that the Council of the Indies was losing power and importance while the governor general’s General Secretariat gained correspondingly. The burgeoning governmental tasks after 1870 found the monolithic Netherlands Indian government ill prepared to deal with them. The first, and for many years only, functioning bureau of the government was the General Secretariat. All correspondence, reports, requests for interviews, orders, legislation and official suggestions directed

to or from the governor general passed through this body. By 1900 it had interjected itself between the governor general and all his relationships in and out of the government. It was generally regarded at this time as the most powerful organ of the government. 14 Gradually as departments of government were created it acted as coordinating agent for the work of these departments. Not until after the First World War when the creation of the Volksraad (People’s Council) made frequent oral contact between the governor general and the chiefs of departments imperative, did the power of the General Secretariat decrease.

Conducting the actual operation of the functions of state in 1900 were various departments of the government. Each department had its chief, its staff employees, advisers, and clerks. The great majority of the persons were Europeans (many were Indo-Europeans); few were Indonesians. In 1900 the departments of the Netherlands Indian government were: Finance, Internal Administration (which controlled the administrative corps and police), Public Works, Education, Religion and Industry, Justice, Military Affairs, and Naval Affairs.


Administering the island of Java and forming the sinews of the colonial government was the European administrative corps. Since earliest times the Dutch control of the Indonesian population had been based on a concept of indirect rule. The Dutch were merely to act as advisers, as big brothers if you wish, to the Indonesian administrators who functioned within the pattern of the traditional hierarchy. In practice this theory was more ignored than applied. In order to fulfill the growing demands of the government upon Indonesians during the 19th century the European civil administrators had to assume ever more power and deal ever more directly with the masses of the people. By 1900 the European administrative corps was wielding almost absolute power throughout Java, over both Europeans and Indonesians. 

The enlargement of power of the European administration was accompanied by a change in the nature of the corps. The Netherlands Indian administration no longer came to be a refuge

for European social outcasts and adventurers, but instead came to be staffed by well-educated sons of substantial middle class European families. These men were eager to advance and assist the welfare of the Indonesian people, and just because of this were often unable to tolerate the indifference and lack of enlightenment on the part of their Indonesian counterparts. The government adviser, C. Snouck Hurgronje (of whom more later) envisioned a solution to this dilemma by proving Indonesians with good Western education so they might extract from Western culture the virtues which would enable them to assume the responsibilities and duties of European administrators. Gradually the Europeans would be entirely withdrawn and an enlightened Indonesian administration would run the country. This notion ran head on into the newly emerging sense of exclusiveness in European society on Java, and also failed to fit in with the increasing amount of governmental concern with the details of Indonesian life after 1900. The growing concern of the European administrators in protecting and shielding the Indonesian common people led to innumerable clashes with the European financial and entrepreneurial interests on Java. These interests began to use their political power to curb the operations and limit the authority of the European administrators. The twentieth century was to witness a gradual diminution of the power of both the European and Indonesian civil administrative corps.


In 1900 there were about 70,000 Europeans on Java. Probably only about one quarter of these were full blood Europeans who had been born in Europe and made their way out to Java. 

Yet this one quarter contained most of the businessmen and entrepreneurs, most of the representatives of financial interests, and most of the European civil administrators. These were for the most part the people who were voicing grievances and complaints against the government and its practices. With the exception of a few Japanese who had been granted equal status with Europeans in 1899, the remainder, or about 75%, of the European community on Java was made up of Indo-Europeans or Eurasians. The fifty-odd thousand Eurasians regarded as part of the

European community were certainly not all persons with part European blood on Java. Many Eurasians had been absorbed into the Indonesian population and no longer regarded themselves as European. 

The general social and economic position of the Eurasian part of the European community was far from good in 1900. True, some whose fathers had taken an interest in them and provided them with some education had obtained clerical and technical posts with government bureaus and departments or had become artisans and craftsmen in the urban centers. Those so fortunate might be said to make up the middle levels of the European community. But many others, probably the majority in 1900, had been ignored by their European fathers, had been unable to adjust to their inter-cultural position, and had found the government unwilling to do anything for them as a group. These Eurasians had drifted onto the peripheries of Indonesian life where their constant identification with European status, despite their degraded position, prohibited an adjustment. These people became the flotsam of East Indian society. About 1900 the plight of this group was more openly recognized by humanitarian Europeans. Organizations such as the Masons and the Order of Eastern Star and Christian mission groups began to take an interest in the poorer Eurasians. Vocational and technical training schools were started to permit these persons to develop a skill which would enable them to fit into the European community. During the 20th century the Eurasians’ situation gradually improved. 

In summary, the European community on Java was far from homogeneous, yet there was an apparent striving toward a common cultural base. The common ground toward which increasing numbers of Europeans on Java moved was the common denominator of middle-class European social tastes. Such a common ground, while neither especially good nor markedly evil, did provide a certain solidarity and sense of standards for Europeans removed from their home environment but always envisioning an eventual return to the land of their forefathers. But

this social solidarity had the disadvantage of enforcing a marked gulf with the Indonesian community. Even the European civil administrator and plantation manager, through improved communications, could have frequent contact with the urbanized European social milieu. No longer did the European live among the Indonesians on the Indonesian standard as had frequently been the case carlier. 24 This social solidarity sometimes also had the effect of reducing mass sentiments of the Europeans toward the Indonesians to the lowest common denominator. Often little interested in Indonesian life, and finding contact with that life only through household help or hired employees, many of the Europeans developed a certain fear through ignorance of the Indonesian and his ways. Paradoxically enough, those who knew least were often the ones to shout the loudest that they knew the Indonesian, and that his ways were treacherous and deceitful. Naturally not all Europeans believed this — many knew better. But the insecurity within the European community was great enough that sentiments against the native peoples were easily encouraged — rumors, gossip, and petty incidents aggravated all this — until it was impossible for wiser counsels to prevail. A large part of the European community on Java did not hold the Indonesian and his way of life in high regard.

Sejarah detail penyerangan Bala Tentara Jepang ke Hindia Belanda 1942

ON DECEMBER 7, 1941, came the treacherous attack of Japan on Pearl

Harbor. Immediately afterwards the Netherlands government in London

declared war on the Japanese Empire.

 

In his announcement of this decision, Governor General A. W. C. Tjarda

van Starkenborgh Stachower said:

 

“People of the Netherlands East Indies: In its unexpected attack on

American and British territories, while diplomatic negotiations were

still in progress, the Japanese Empire has consciously adopted a

course of aggression. These attacks which have thrown the United

States of America and the British Empire into active war on the side

of already fighting China, have as their object the establishment of

Japanese supremacy in the whole of east and southeast Asia. The

aggressions also menace the Netherlands East Indies in no small

measure. The Netherlands Government accepts the challenge and takes up

arms against the Japanese Empire.”

 

Full mobilization of the army was ordered immediately and defense

forces were sent into the Outer Possessions to guard against attacks.

 

The Netherlands East Indies army was estimated at a strength of about

100,000-125,000 men, including home guards and militia. The nucleus of

the army consisted of professional soldiers, many of them Amboynese

and Menadonese. All able-bodied Netherlanders in the Netherlands East

Indies had been conscripted about a year earlier. By a law of July 11,

1941, conscription had been extended to the native part of the

population as well, but through lack of  equipment and some hesitancy

on the part of the government, only small contingents of this native

militia were inducted into the army towards the end of October, 1941.

 

Good progress had been made with the mechanization of the army while

the air force consisted of about 250-300 planes, many of them,

however, almost obsolete. Much equipment that had been ordered did not

arrive on time in the Indies.

 

The greatest part of Duch naval strength, consisting of five cruisers,

seven destroyers, over twenty submarines and a number of smaller craft

was concentrated in the Indies.

 

When the war with Japan broke out, all Japanese citizens were interned

immediately. The interned group consisted of 1069 Japanese, 301

Formosans and 25 suspect Europeans.

 

The Netherlands East Indies Army planes went to the aid of the British

in Malaya while Naval units were despatched to Singapore: on December

13 naval forces sank four Japanese army transports off the coast of

Thailand, while, from then on, news about the sinking of Japanese

ships became almost a daily item.

 

The Indonesian political parties issued a statement in which they

urged the people “to render all possible assistance to the government

in maintaining order and to keep calm.”

 

Occasional Japanese air attacks were the only enemy activity which

reached the Netherlands Indies in the first period.

 

On January 10, 1942, the all-out war on the Indies was started when

the Japanese launched a full-fledged attack on the Island of Tarakan,

off east Borneo, and on three different parts of the Minahassa, the

“northern arm” of Celebes. Dutch army and air forces put up strong

resistance and damaged several Japanese naval units. The Dutch were

quite aware that the odds were strongly against them, but destruction

of oil installations and other equipment was carried out according to

plan.

 

Bombing attacks on several points of the Archipelago in-creased in

intensity with the naval base of Ambon as one of the main targets.

 

Parachutists succeeded in completing the conquest of the Minahassa

where infiltration had also been used with some success. Dutch and

Australian air forces gave a good account of themselves, and Japanese

losses were reported at that time to have been heavy.

 

A great success was achieved by air attacks on January 23 on enemy

naval and transport concentration in Makassar Straits, between Celebes

and Borneo. Twelve direct hits were scored on eight Japanese warships

and transports. Next day, several transports of the same large convoy

were sunk. Attacks on ship concentrations near Balikpapan in Borneo

were also successful.

 

American air and naval forces joined in the various attacks and

achieved considerable results with torpedo attacks and bombings.

 

On January 25, landings on Borneo and at Kandari, in Southern Celebes,

took place.

 

Naval and air resistance to the Japanese invasion continued to inflict

serious damage but land resistance was whittled down quickly in most

cases by the superiority of the Japanese in numbers and equipment.

 

Resistance of Netherlands East Indies troops around Balikpapan

continued for some time while the scorched earth policy was carried

out completely in most regions. Ambon also became the subject of a

concentrated attack, while fighting in Celebes continued throughout

January.

 

In the beginning of February air attacks on Java increased in

intensity. By that time Borneo was largely in Japanese hands although

resistance in the interior continued. Naval activities around Ambon

resulted in the sinking of several Japanese cruisers, as well as of a

destroyer and a submarine.

 

On February 14, heavy raids on Palembang, Sumatra, took place which

were followed by the landing of paratroops as

 

the Japanese were eager to stop the demolitions of the oilfields. They

succeeded in preventing some of the demolitions, but most of them had

been carried out successfully. Around the middle of February fighting

around Palembang as well as on Celebes continued.

 

On February 19, when the Japanese had surrounded Java on all sides,

the first reports came in of the arrival of detachments of British,

American and Australian troops, however, only in very small numbers.

The occupation of Bali caused the Japanese several naval losses.

 

Air raids continued to be successful and the “ship a day” tradition of

the Dutch was kept up pretty well. Official figures on the number of

Japanese ships sunk are still not available.

 

On February 27, strong Japanese formations were reported to be

approaching Java. They were attacked repeatedly by Allied squadrons.

On the 28th, the first phase in the battle of Java opened when

Japanese invasion troops established three beach heads on the north

coast.

 

In this period the Dutch navy, with the naval forces of some of its

Allies, played an heroic role. When the news of the attack on Bali

came, Admiral Karel Doorman raced his small fleet to the South Cape on

Bali, and, in the dark of night, they made a daring attack on the

Japanese fleet, the cruiser “De Ruyter” leading, followed by the

“Java” and the “Piet Hein,” with Dutch and American destroyers making

up the rear. When, by firing star shells, the “De Ruyter” could see

the enemy, she was too close to train her guns properly. But the

“Java” had that chance while the “Piet Hein,” coming up astern, caught

the withering fire of the 8-inch guns.

 

Later in the night, a similar attack was made by four American

destroyers and the “Tromp.” The Japanese took heavy punishment that

night in Bandia Strait, but the small fleet of Admiral Doorman was

further depleted. He was left   with the “De Ruyter,” the “Java,” the

damaged “Houston,” the “Perth” and the “Exeter.”

 

On February 26, this fleet was looking for the enemy around Madoera

Island. Finally at 4 o’clock, when they were racing northward, the “De

Ruyter” sighted the enemy. She opened fire immediately, and in the

beginning Allied gunnery was good although the Japanese guns outranged

them. One Japanese destroyer was hit, but the “Exeter” was put out of

action. The destroyer “Kortenaer,” trying to cover her limping

retreat, was hit by a torpedo and broke in two. A little later the

British destroyer “Electra” fell victim to a Japanese torpedo also.

However, in this stage of the encounter, three Japanese destroyers

were sunk.

 

Admiral Doorman in an effort to break off the struggle in which he was

so hopelessly outnumbered, tried to find the convoy where he could do

more damage. He failed, and later at night he came once more upon the

enemy fleet. With all guns blazing, his small force, now entirely

without destroyer protection, went into action. Then he flung his

force sharply around, but it was too late: torpedoes caught the “Java”

as well as the “De Ruyter” and both went down into the blazing sea.

 

The Allied navy had done all it could to prevent the Japanese

landings, and nothing was left to do except the blowing up of all

shore installations.

 

The invasion of the Japanese army was resisted valiantly by the

Netherlands East Indies army, reinforced with American, Australian,

and British units but the battle was hopeless from the beginning and

demoralization set in at an early stage. The air force continued its

attacks as long as possible but its strength was wearing down rapidly.

 

The Japanese fanned out from their three beachheads and succeeded in

making pretty steady progress.

 

On March 3, the Allied Commander, General Archibald P. Wavell, left

Java for British India, leaving the command of the Allied forces in

the hands of the Dutch.

 

On the same day, it was admitted that air control had passed into the

hands of the enemy.

 

From that time on, fighting spread throughout the island without

taking on a definite front line. The situation had become hectic, and

coordination between the defenders was more or less lost.

 

On March 6, Batavia was evacuated and the government moved to Bandoeng

where the last ditch defense was being organized.

 

The complete control of the air made Allied troop movements

practically impossible. On March 7, the northern defenses of Bandoeng

were cracked, and the situation was admittedly critical. On March 8,

the official radio station at Bandoeng sent its last message: “We are

now shutting down. Goodbye until better times. Long live the Queen.”

 

Except for guerilla activity in the outlying possessions, and for some

parts of New Guinea, which were not occupied by the Japanese, the

entire archipelago was in the hands of the enemy.

 

The Japanese were surprised about these things in the Netherlands

Indies: the European population had stayed behind except for a few

high officials whom Governor General van Starkenborgh Stachouwer had

sent away in the interests of the country; there was order in the

archipelago; the population on the whole was loyal to the Dutch.

 

As the Japanese regarded the Westerners as the leaders of the East,

they began by interning all Europeans and by removing all Dutch signs.

The interned Europeans were given small rations but received

considerable aid from the Indonesians and the Chinese.

 

The Japanese started by prohibiting all political activity but on

March 9, 1943, they founded the “Poetera,” intended as the

all-embracing political party. This organization lasted only one year

and was replaced by the Djawa Hoko Kai, or- ganizing the Indies as a

section of Greater East Asia. The organization was on a cooperative

basis, and only those who were members received the materials needed

for their occupations. Soekarno was a leading figure in the “Djawa

Hoko Kai.”

Kumpulan Surat-Surat Moch. Hatta

http://www.iisg.nl/collections/hatta/index.php

Perjalanan Revolusi Indonesia & Relasinya dengan Revolusi di Negeri2 Dunia ke Tiga

Tulisan Titipan seorang kawan ….. copyright for him :-)

______________________________________________________

 

TANGGAPAN DARI KAMI……….. 

Kepada mbak atau mas atau siapa saja yang mengakui bahwa diri anda adalah seorang nasionalis tulen, kami sungguh senang karena ada teman dari Indonesia yang menanggapi tulisan kami yang sangat singkat, kami tidak anti kritik karena dengan kritik itu akan dapat membangun tapi tentunya dengan kritik yang berbobot dan berkualitas tidak karena emosi atau subjektivisme semata-mata serta kami sangat menghargai apabila kritik itu dapat memajukan gerakan rakyat revolusioner di Indonesia. 

Bicara soal nasionalisme (cinta kepada tanah air), dimasa lalu banyak kita saksikan sekelompok atau segolongan orang orang atas nama nasionalisme (Jendral Tanaka pemimpin Bala Tentara Dai Nippon karena cintanya kepada Tenno Hekka titisan dewa matahari…J mengangkangi habis seluruh Asia Pasific dan merampok seluruh rakyatnya dan dijadikan Romusha diperas tenaganya habis-habisan sampai mati sambil menggembar-gemborkan Nippon Pemimpin Asia, Nippon Cahaya Asia, Nippon Pelindung Asia, Mussolinni di Italia yang menggembar-gemborkan (“to believe, to obey, to combat”)akan mengembalikan kejayaan kekaisaran Roma sewaktu dia dan para 40.000 pengikutnya melakukan parade rally kemenangan menuju Roma yang di sepanjang jalan sambil mengintimidasi semua lawan politiknya terutama kaum Komunis dan dengan angkuhnya mengirimkan ratusan ribu pasukannya untuk melalap Afrika dengan sasaran pertama Abesinia (sekarang Etophia) yang kaya akan tambang batu baran dan emasnya, dan Hitler seorang anak keturunan yahudi yang merasa dirinya ras bangsa arya tulen dengan slogan (“Ein Reich, Ein Volk, Ein Fuhrer- Satu Negara, Satu Bangsa, Satu Pemimpin) membantai jutaan orang di seluruh dataran Eropa dan lagi-lagi kaum komunis yang menjadi sasaran utamanya tapi lihat apa yang terjadi sejak tahun 1943 setelah kemenangan pertempuran di Stalinggrad yang berjarak 80 mil dari Moscow yang memakan korban jiwa sampai 20 juta rakyat soviet, pasukan nazi jerman yang berjumlah 330.000 luluh-lantak dihajar habis-habisan oleh Tentara Merah dan para anggota Partisan Rusia yang dipimpin oleh Towarich Stalin, pasukan sekutu tidak bisa mendarat di Normandia (selatan Perancis) pada tahun 1944 yang terkenal dengan pertempuran D-Day nya yang memakan korban jiwa di pihak sekutu sampai 100.000 orang, jika Sovyet Rusia pimpinan Towarich Stalin tidak dapat meluluh lantakan pasukan Nazi dan mengusir mereka keluar dari tanah air Sosialis sambil terus mengejar sisa-sia pasukan nazi jerman kearah barat eropa (contoh pertama nasionalisme kaum komunis),  

Tiongkok 

Tiongkok tanggal 7 juli 1937 imperialis jepang menimbulkan peristiwa Lukuotjhiao dalam usahanya mencaplok seluruh tiongkok dengan kekuatan bersenjata. Rakyat di seluruh negeri dengan bulat menuntut supaya dilancarkan perang melawan jepang, Chiang Kai Shek baru mengeluarkan pernyataan di Lushan untuk menyatakan perang perlawanan terhadap jepang 10 hari sesudah peristiwa itu. Pada tanggal 8 Juli 1937 Comite Central Partai Komunis Tiongkok mengumumkan pada seluruh negeri sebuah manifest yang menyerukan perang perlawanan yang berbunyi:  

“Saudara-saudara setanah air! Peiping dan Thientjin dalam bahaya! Bangsa Tionghoa dalam bahaya! Jalan keluar bagi kita hanyalah perang perlawanan yang dilakukan oleh seluruh bangsa. Kami menuntut supaya segera memberikan perlawanan yang tegas terhadap tentara jepang yang sedang menyerang dan segera mempersiapkan diri untuk menghadapi peristiwa besar yang baru. Rakyat seluruh negeri, dari atas sampai kebawah harus segera melepaskan setiap maksud berdamai dengan aggressor jepang untuk keselamatan sementara. Saudara-saudara setanah air! Kita harus memuji dan menyokong perang perlawanan yang gagah berani……………….Kami minta kepada seluruh rakyat tiongkok dengan sekuta tenaga membantu perang suci anti jepang dan bela diri. Semboyan kita ialah: Belalah Peiphing, Thientjien dan tiongkok utara dengan bersenjata! Belalah tanah air kita sampai titik darah yang penghabisan! Bersatulah rakyat seluruh tiongkok, pemerintah dan seluruh angkatan bersenjata untuk membangun Tembok Besar front persatuan nasional yang kokoh guna melawan agresi jepang! Bekerja-samalah Kuomintang dan Partai Komunis Tiongkok dengan erat untuk melawan serangan baru dari aggressor jepang! Usirlah aggressor jepang dari Tiongkok! (contoh kedua nasionalisme kaum Komunis). 

Program Sepuluh Pasal Untuk Menyelamatkan Tanah Air: (Berjuang Untuk Memobilisasi Semua Kekuatan Demi Perang Perlawanan, Kumpulan Tulisan Mao Tse Tung Jilid II) 

  1. Menghancurkan Imperialisme Jepang.
  2. Mobilisasi umum atas kekuatan militer seluruh negeri.
  3. Mobilisasi umum atas rakyat seluruh negeri.
  4. Merombak aparat-aparat pemerintahan.
  5. Politik luar negeri Anti Jepang.
  6. Politik keuangan dan ekonomi masa perang.
  7. Memperbaiki penghidupan rakyat.
  8. Politik pendidikan Anti Jepang.
  9. Menyapu bersih penghianat bangsa, penjual Negara dan kaum Pro Jepang serta mengkonsolidasi daerah belakang.
  10. Persatuan Nasional Anti Jepang.

 

Kami kutipkan sedikit pendapat kawan Mao TseTung dalam hal dalam hal Patriotisme dan Internasionalisme, adalah sbb: 

“Dapatkah seorang anggota Partai Komunis, sebagai seorang Internasionalis, sekaligus juga seorang Patriot? Kita berpendapat bahwa bukan saja dapat tetapi juga harus. Isi kongkrit Patriotisme ditentukan oleh syarat-syarat sejarah. Ada patriotisme aggressor Jepang dan patriotisme Hitler dan ada pula patriotisme kita. Anggota Partai Komunis harus dengan tegas menentang apa yang dinamakan patriotisme Jepang dan patriotisme Hitler. Orang komunis Jepang dan orang komunis Jerman adalah kaum defaitis terhadap perang yang dilakukan oleh negeri-negeri mereka. Berusaha dengan segala cara supaya perang yang dilancarkan kaum aggressor Jepang dan Hitler itu kalah adalah untuk kepentingan rakyat Jepang dan rakyat Jerman dan semakin total kekalahan itu semakin baik…………………karena perang yang dilancarkan oleh kaum aggressor jepang dan Hitler merugikan rakyat sedunia tetapi juga merugikan rakyatnya sendiri…………………Kita adalah kaum Internasionalis dan juga kaum Patriot dan semboyan kita ialah berperang membela tanah air melawan kaum aggressor. Bagi kita Defaitisme adalah suatu dosa, sedangkan berjuang untuk kemenangan Perang Anti Jepang adalah kewajiban yang tidak dapat dielakkkan. Karena hanya dengan perang membela tanah air barulah kita dapat mengalahkan kaum aggressor dan mencapai pembebasan nasional. Dan hanya dengan tercapainya pembebasan nasional barulah mungkin tercapai pembebasan proletariat dan rakyat pekerja lainnya…………………………..Dengan demikian Patriotisme adalah pentrapan Internasionalisme dalam perang Pembebasan Nasional.(Kedudukan Partai Komunis Tiongkok dalam Perang Nasional) 

Vietnam, awal 1930an  

setelah kegagalan pemberontakan Partai Nasionalis Vietnam di Vietnam partai hanya berjumlah satu buah yaitu Partai Pemuda Revolusioner (PPR), akibat tindakan yang kejam dari pemerintah Perancis terhadap rakyat Vietnam maka menyebabkan mempercepat hidup-suburnya Partai Pemuda Revolusioner (PPR) ini karena seluruh rakyat ingin melawan dan menghancurkan kekuasaan penjajah tetapi dibelakang hari PPR itu pecah menjadi tiga golongan, masing2 memperbaharui susunannya dan menambahkan corak komunis, jadinya di Vietnam terdapat 3 partai komunis yang demikian itu sangat membingungkan para pecinta kemerdekaan, mereka insyaf perpecahan pasti akan membawa kelemahan perjuangan. 

Setelah NguYen Ay Quo (The Old Man who has an alias name Ho Chi Minh) tiba dari Tiongkok, wakil2 tiga partai komunis itu dipanggilnya datang ketempat kediamannya, mereka diajak berunding bersama-sama, Nguyen memberikan keterangan dan menganjurkan demikian: 

“Di negeri2 merdeka seperti Inggris, Perancis, Amerika dan Tiongkok dan lain-lainnya ada berdiri Partai Komunis. Di negeri2 jajahan seperti Indonesia, India dan lai-lain partai komunis itu juga ada. Jadi di Vietnam pun boleh didirikan Partai Komunis tapi di tiap-tiap negeri itu hanya ada satu Partai Komunis, tidak dua tidak tiga. Jadi kalau akan menghidupkan Partai Komunis di Vietnam juga harus satu Partai Komunis saja, tidak tiga! 

Kekayaan negeri kita, kebahagiaan rakyat kita bahkan anak cucu dan wanita-wanita kita – semuanya telah di rampas oleh penjajah perancis. Tidak seorangpun dari bangsa kita yang mempunyai industri, yang mempunyai Bank dan lain-lainnya lagi. Yang kita miliki hanya kemiskinan. Miskin besar dan Miskin kecil, tepat seperti kata dokter Sun Yat Sen. Kita semua bangsa yang telah dirampas segala-galanya. Tidak ada lagi hak-hak pada kita. Kita menjadi budak belian dari penjajah Perancis. 

Oleh sebab itu, kewajiban kita mutlak adalah: 

  •  
    1. Mempersatukan seluruh tenaga bangsa Vietnam untuk memperjuangkan kemerdekaan.
    2. Mempersatukan lagi seluruh tenaga bangsa Vietnam untuk membangun kembali Negara kita.

 

Untuk melaksanakan itu semua kita harus bergabung di dalam satu organisasi. Partai yang kita dirikan boleh diberi nama apa saja. Boleh tetap di beri nama “Partai Pemuda Revolusioner “ dan juga boleh di beri nama “Partai Komunis” seperti sekarang ini. Tetapi yang penting dan yang pokok, harus mempunyai program politik nasional, yang garis besarnya akan memperjuangkan dan melaksanakan: 

Kemerdekaan Bangsa

Kebebasan Demokrasi, dan

Kesejahteraan Sosial….”

Akibat penyembelihan besar2an dari pemerintah terror penjajah perancis terhadap pemogokan2  dan demonstrasi2 di tahun 1930 dan penangkapan2 terhadap seluruh kaum revolusioner maka hubungan paman Ho dengan pergerakan masa dari tahun 1931-1933 terputus perjuangan revolusioner di Vietnam mengalami masa surut tapi sejak tahun 1934 nyala api perjuangan kemerdekaan itu sudah mulai hidup kembali. 

1940 dunia mulai di hantui oleh bayangan akan pecahnya perang dunia II akibatnya pemerintahan penjajah perancis semakin reaksioner dalam meghadapi setiap gerakan rakyat dalam keadaan demikian muncullah suara baru. Suara baru yang menggelora mendengung-dengung meliputi seluruh negeri, seluruh Vietnam! Suara-suara baru yang menggelorakan semboyan-semboyan demikian: 

  • Kita berdiri di pihak sekutu!
  • Kita bertempur menentang Fasisme Internasional!
  • Kita akan mengusir kaum Fasis Perancis!
  • Kita berperang untuk kemerdekaan Negara leluhur kita!
  • Rakyat Vietnam Bersatulah!

 

Semboyan-semboyan ini diserukan oleh “Persatuan Pergerakan Kemerdekaan Vietnam” nama persatuan ini di singkat menjadi “VietMinh”. VietMinh merupakan organisasi Front Persatuan Nasional. Pemimpin VietMinh atau Front Persatuan Nasional itu tidak lain adalah Nguyen Ay Quo (Ho Chi Minh) yang kini telah berada di tengah-tengah rakyat Vietnam di negerinya sendiri. 

Pada waktu itu VietMinh pimpinan Paman Ho mengadakan pengumuman kepada seluruh rakyat Vietnam, demikian: 

“Mulai hari ini, musuh pertama dari Negara leluhur kita adalah kaum Fasis Jepang !”  

Himbauan ini disambut gegap-gempita oleh seluruh rakyat dan seluruh kekuatan yang ada mulai dipersiapkan termasuk pembentukan sayap bersenjata (pasukan gerilya). 

1944  

Empat tahun lampau senjata kaum gerilya itu sangat primitive. Pedang, tombak dan senjata-senjata primitive lainnya, disamping itu ada dua pucuk pistol, tiga pucuk senapan dan sebuah pucuk senapan kuno, anggotanya juga Cuma sedikit hanya 35 orang saja. Pemimpinnya seorang pemuda, guru sekolah menengah. Namanya Bu Nguyen Chea (Dia yang nantinya akan menjadi seorang jendral besar yang terkenal dengan nama Jendral Vo Nguyen Giap yang meluluh-lantakan benteng pertahanan Perancis yang terbesar dan terakhir Dien Bhien Phu pada tahun 1954 yang menyebabkan Perancis lari lintang pukang dari Vietnam). 

Sekarang pasukan itu telah menjadi besar. Prajuritnya ada seratus ribu orang, ini belum terhitung dengan satuan-satuan gerilya yang kecil-kecil yang masih bersembunyi di berbagai tempat. Pertempuran-pertempuran terus terjadi besar atau kecil tentara boneka dan tentara jepang mulai kewalahan. Pasukan gerilya Vietminh tidak dapat dibersihkan. Bahkan sebaliknya bala tentara Dai Nippon sendiri yang banyak menderita kekalahan dimana-mana. Pemerintahan boneka Jepang tidak berdaya lagi sampai2 menarik pajak saja tidak mampu karena waktu itu kaum VietMinh telah mengeluarkan seruan sebagai berikut: 

  •  
    1. Berperang melawan Penjahat Jepang! Berperang melawan Pemerintah Boneka!
    2. Jangan diberikan sebutir beras! Jangan diberikan uang sepeserpun!
    3. Kita berjuang untuk kemerdekaan 100%

 

Agustus 1945 VietMinh tengah mengadakan konggres seluruh negeri tetapi konggres baru berjalan satu hari semua peserta dikejutkan oleh berita yang menggemparkan, Jepang telah menyerah dan takluk tiada bersyarat! Maka konggres segera memutuskan untuk mempersiapkan keputusan untuk mengadakan pemberontakan bersenjata di seluruh negeri dan perebutan kekuasaan di seluruh Vietnam. Setelah perlawanan di seluruh negeri dilakukan maka pada tanggal 16 Agustus Vietnam dibawah kepemimpinan Ho Chi Minh mendeklarasikan kemerdekaan (Contoh ketiga nasionalisme kaum Komunis). 

Indonesia  

Pertengahan tahun 1942 Ir Sukarno berangkat dari Palembang kembali dari pembuangan yang dilakukan oleh pemerintah Hindia Belanda dulu ketika masih berkuasa di Indonesia  karena semenjak awal 1942 Hindia Belanda telah diduduki oleh pemerintah Dai Nippon dengan dikawal oleh sekelompok Kampetai perajurit Jepang dengan menaiki perahu motor itu dilakukan oleh pemerintah Jepang karena Sukarno Berhasil di bujuk agar mau bekerja-sama dengan pemerintah Dai Nippon dalam mendukung Perang Asia Timur Raya. 

Diwaktu yang sama disebuah pelabuhan kecil di daerah Lampung Sumatra bergerak sebuah kapal kecil yang sudah reot “Sri Renjet” nama kapal itu, dalam keadaan yang sudah sangat payah berlayarnya dan dijejali oleh penumpang yang padat yang terdiri dari kaum gembel dan pedagang kecil, diantara para penumpang itu terlihat seorang yang sudah kelihatan tua berumur kurang lebih 45 tahun yang terlihat dari raut wajahnya lebih tua dari umur yang sebenarnya. Orang tua itu terus mengamati sekelilingnya melihat orang-orang di sekitarnya tidak terasa mengalir air mata dari matanya melihat saudara sebangsa setanah airnya yang dia tinggalkan selama kurang lebih 20 tahun ternyata masih bernasib sama tetap miskin, melarat dan tetap dianggap budak oleh para penjajah. Sejenak pikirannya melayang mengingat masa lalu ketika itu dia masih berumur tidak lebih dari 25 tahun, pada saat itu dia berjalan di depan memimpin barisan seratusan anak-anak berselendang merah dengan tulisan “Rasa Merdika” melalui jalan-jalan sempit lagipula kotor dikampung-kampung kotapraja Semarang. Seraya menyanyikan lagu “Internasionale”, tujuan rombongan itu jelas, yaitu daerah pemukiman pontjol dimana sedang berlangsung pemogokan buruh pabrik mebel Andriesse. Dengan sudut matanya yang awas dan jalang para reserse polisi colonial terus mengamati setiap derap langkah defile mereka, siang hari yang terik itu tidak menjadi halangan anak-anak itu untuk menuju Openbare Vergadering (rapat umum) kaum buruh Pontjol…..defile para moerid bertjelana merah, berbaris, ber saf-saf didepan chalajak dan menjanjikan lagoe Internasionale …pertama kali diantara rakyat Indonesia. Setelah semoeanya berlaloe dengan tjepat rapih dan teratoer oleh murid sendiri beberapa penonton yang menyambut dengan ari mata yang berlinang, takjoeb! Sedih? Gembira? Kedoeanya. Sedih, karena insyaf akan nasib anaknya dan diri sendiri, sekolah dan alat serba kekoerangan. Gembira karena para moerid ini  dididik boekan menjadi golongan perkakas pendjadjahan melainkan boeat mengangkat deradjat rakyat tertindas, terhisap dan terhina ialah golongan mereka sendiri….. 

Dia terkejut karena orang-orang sekelilingnya gaduh berbicara karena di depan sana sayup-sayup terlihat ada daratan yang itu adalah daratan pulau jawa….. 
 

Your browser may not support display of this image.

  •  

      Pemuda adalah saripati tanah air, terutama pemuda yang progresif adalah milik kita yang paling berharga dalam perang perlawanan (Mao Tse Tung, Sepuluh Tuntutan kepada Kuomintang) 
       

Jakarta 15 Agustus 1945 

Menteng 31 disana terdapat rumah besar yang menjadi markas para pemuda yang bergerak dibawah tanah memperjuangkan kemerdekaan Indonesia, para pemuda disana di dominasi oleh pemikiran-pemikiran kiri atau anggota organisasi bawah tanah dari partai-partai terlarang karena berhaluan komunis (PARI-TAN MALAKA dan PKI-MUSSO). 

Pasca pemberontakan yang gagal (Premature Rebellion) tahun 1926-1927 Partai Komunis Indonesia hancur berkeping-keping sebanyak kurang lebih 13000 orang di tangkap, disembelih dan di hukum gantung para kader yang masih selamat tercerai berai tanpa adanya hubungan, pemimpin yang masih tersisa tercerai berai diluar negeri karena waktu itu kepemimpinan PKI sudah terpecah dua antara yang setuju dengan pemberontakan (Musso, Alimin, Sardjono Cs–Komunis Jawa) dengan yang tidak setuju (Tan Malaka, Djamaludin Tamim, Sugono, Subakat, Rustam Effendi Cs–Komunis Sumatra) – (Semaun & Darsono tidak bersikap) antara kedua pihak tetap mempertahankan pendapatnya dan sudah tidak dapat di damaikan lagi (ini akan terlihat ketika zaman revolusi nasional 1945-1949, bentrokan bersenjata antara dua kelompok itu tidak bisa di hindari walaupun keduanya menclaim mewakili golongan Marxis-Leninis di Indonesia dan mempunyai pendapat yang sama bahwa Republik Indonesia yang merdeka harus bersifat Sosialis dan dalam pertempuran melawan dunia Kapitalis keduanya sefaham harus berada dalam barisan Sovyet Rusia). 

 

Sebuah Commite Van-Actie dibentuk oleh para pemuda menteng 31 dengan susumam sebagai berikut: (Mahasiswa)  

Ketua Umum   : Sukarni (PARI-TAN MALAKA)

Wakil Ketua I : Chairul Saleh (PARI-TAN MALAKA)

Wakil Ketua II : Wikana (PKI-MUSSO)

Anggota:  Adam Malik (PARI-TAN MALAKA) 

           Pandu Kartawiguna (PARI-TAN MALAKA)

                 Maruto Nitimiharjo (PARI-TAN MALAKA)

                 Djohar Noer (PARI-TAN MALAKA)

                 Darwis (PARI-TAN MALAKA)

                 A.M Hanafi (PARI-TAN MALAKA)

                 Armunanto (PARI-TAN MALAKA) 

(Pelajar) 

D.N Aidit (PKI-MUSSO)

M.H Lukman (PKI-MUSSO)

Sjamsudin Tjan (PARI-TAN MALAKA)

Sidik Kertapati (PARI – TAN MALAKA), dll 

Pada tanggal 16 Agustus para pemuda tersebut menculik Sukarno dan Hatta ke Rengasdengklok atas alasan untuk diamankan disana para pemuda memaksa Sukarno dan Hatta untuk memproklamasikan kemerdekaan Indonesia karena pada saan itu jepang sudah kalah bertekuk lutut tanpa syarat karena di bom atom kota Hirosima (9 Agustus) dan Nagasaki (14 Agustus) oleh pesawat pembom B-52 dan pada tanggal 8 Agustus Sovyet Rusia mengumumkan perang melawan Jepang pada tanggal 10 Agustus Jepang menyerah tanpa syarat kepada pemerintah Tiongkok. 

Pada waktu itu Sukarno-Hatta masih percaya terhadap kemerdekaan yang akan diberikan oleh pemerintahan Dai Nippon yang dijanjikan ketika mereka menemui Marsekal Terauchi di Saigon (Vietnam) — Kaum Borjuis dalam situasi seperti ini tidak mampu melihat peluang yang ada karena mereka selalu mempunyai sifat ragu dan takut karena nanti dituduh boneka jepang (itulah sifat pengecut Sukarno-Hatta). Setelah berulang kali dipaksa barulah mereka berani memproklamirkan kemerdekaan Indonesia pada tanggal 17 Agustus 1945. 

Pada bulan November 1945 wakil presiden Moh.Hatta mengeluarkan Maklumat X yaitu sebuah maklumat yang mengizinkan agar bebagai aliran-aliran politik yang bermacam coraknya itu nasionalis, agama, sosialis, komunis untuk mendirikan partai-partai politik kenapa hatta yang didukung oleh perdana menteri pertama Indonsia yaitu Sutan Sjahrir mendukung dikeluarkannya maklumat X ini karena mereka menggangap bahwa ketika didalam alam demokrasi Indonesia yang merdeka ini tidak boleh mendirikan partai2 politik ini sama saja kembali ke zaman fasis Jepang. Keputusan ini sangat berbahaya karena akan mengakibatkan tumbuhnya partai-partai politik yang bermacam-macam corak aliran itu seperti tumbuhnya cendawan (jamur) di musim hujan dan pasti setiap aliran partai politik itu akan memperjuangkan kepentingannya masing-masing sesuai dengan fahamnya. Sebulan setelah dikeuarkan maklumat X itu mulai terlihat gejala yang tidak sehat karena partai-partai itu mempunyai kelompok bersenjatanya masing-masing dan apabila dikalangan partai politik itu dilanda konflik maka sayap bersenjatanya juga akan terlibat konflik ini jelas-jelas akan merugikan persatuan dalam kerangka menghadapi Imperialisme Belanda dan dikalangan pemimpin politik Indonesia (Sukarno, Hatta, Syahrir dan para pemimpin politik borjuis kecil yang lain) mulai berpikiran agar melakukan perjuangan melawan imperialisme Belanda hendaknya memakai jalan diplomasi saja agar perjuangan kemerdekaan Indonesia tidak usah berdarah-darah seperti di Vietnam, Malaya, Philipina, Tiongkok, dan lain-lain. 

 

Ini suatu kesaksian Sujatmoko seorang pengikut setia Sjahrir dia menceritakan bagaimana sjahrir memberitahukan kepadanya mengenai sepucuk surat dari Ho Chi Minh yang diterima Hatta melalui perantaraan Harold Isaacs, seorang pengamat terkenal mengenai soal-soal Asia dan Amerika. Ho Chi Minh mengusulkan agar kedua revolusi – diIndonesia dan di Indocina — dipandang sebagai satu dan hendaknya diupayakan untuk mengkordinasikan keduanya sampai tingkat tertentu…..Sujatmoko yang semangatnya di bangkitkan oleh visi itu secara otomatis mengira bahwa Sjahrir akan memberi respon positif terhadap persepsi ho mengenai berbagai peristiwa, menjadi sangat terkejut ketika Sjahrir berkata bahwa ia tidak akan melakukan hal itu. Bagi Sujatmoko hal itu adalah sebuah penghianatan terhadap gelombang revolusi di Asia, Sjahrir lalu membela diri dengan mengatakan bahwa Indonesia akan memenangkan revolusinya sebelum Indocina memenangkan revolusi mereka. Perancis merupakan negara yang lebih besar dan lebih kuat disbanding Belanda dan sementara nasionalisme Indonesia di pimpin oleh kaum nasionalis, nasionalisme Indocina dipimpin kaum Komunis, oleh sebab itu musuh Indonesia di Internasional akan lebih sedikit, Indonesia pasti akan lebih cepat merdeka (Ini adalah pendapat Borjuis kecil yang picik dan pengecut yang memandang rendah semangat Internasionalisme Proletariat dan pernyataan dari sifat pengecut yang takut akan berkobarnya api revolusi dan pernyataan dari orang yang tidak percaya akan kemampuan rakyatnya sendiri dalam merebut kemedekaan karena mempercayai perjuangan diplomasi untuk merebut kemedekaan)   

 

Melihat situasi seperti ini atas bantuan para pemuda menteng 31 seorang pejuang tua Indonesia yang selama puluhan tahun dikejar, ditangkap dan dicari oleh Negara-negara imperialis inggris, Belanda, Perancis dan Amerika, seperti kawan-kawannya yang lain yang dianggap sebagai meneer Bolshevik seperti Ho Chi Minh — Vietnam, Mr Crisanto Evangalista – Philipina, Chin Peng – Malaya yang kepalanya kalau bisa dipotong dan dipajang di muka umum inilah hukumannya kalau menjadi pengikut Lenin atau Stalin (agen Bolshevik) muncul kembali secara legal dan memakai namanya yang semula yaitu Tan Malaka karena selama berpuluh-puluh tahun menggunakan berbagai nama samaran seperti: “Ilyas Hussein – Malaya, Tan Ho sheng – Singapura, Ellias Fuentess – Philipina dll. Pada tanggal 3 januari 1946 di Purwokerto diadakanlah konggres pertama Persatuan Perjuangan (PP) yaitu sebuah Volksfront (Front Persatuan) guna menyatukan berbagai macam partai dan laskar bersenjata yang berbagai macam aliran itu, konggres tersebut dilakukan dalam situasi yang sangat gegap gempita karena dimana-mana digaris depan para pemuda dan seluruh rakyat baik itu si Marhaen, Si Murba, Si Proletariat, Si Kromo bahu membahu tanpa ada sedikitpun rasa takut akan kematian karena mereka menginginkan kemerdekaan yang selama ini yang mereka rasakan di alam penjajahan adalah ketertindasan dan kemiskinan serta dianggap sebagai budak sehingga ketika kemerdekaan yang sudah di raih ini akan kembali dikangkangi oleh penjajah Belanda maka mereka tidak peduli walaupun harus mempertaruhkan jiwanya. 

 

Konggres tersebut berlangsung selama 3 hari dihari terakhir Jendral Sudirman memberikan pidato dukungannya atas konggres Persatuan Perjuangan (PP) disitu ada kata-kata Jendral Besar Sudirman yang sangat terkenal “LEBIH BAIK DI BOM ATOM DARIPADA TIDAK MERDEKA 100%” 

 

Konggres tersebut menghasilkan 7 pasal yang menjadi paduan untuk perjuangan seluruh rakyat Indonesia dalam berjuang (Minimum Program): 

  1. Berunding atas pengakuan kemerdekaan 100%, sesudah tentara asing meninggalkan pesisir dan lautan Indonesia.
  2. Pemerintahan Rakyat
  3. Laskar Rakyat
  4. Melucuti jepang
  5. menyelenggarakan tawaanan-tawanan Serikat
  6. Mensita kebon-kebon musuh dan mengusahakan pertanian (distribusi tanah)
  7. Mensita pabrik-pabrik musuh dan mengusahakan perindustrian

 

DIPLOMASI BAMBU RUNCING atau MERDEKA 100%

  

Ketika itu situasi politik mencekam karena ada 2 kepemimpinan satu ditangan pemerintahan Borjuis-Feodal (Sukarno-Hatta) dengan Perdana Menteri Sutan Sjahrir (Sosialis Kanan – Sosial Demokrat) dan Persatuan Perjuangan (Tan Malaka, Moh Yamin, Iwa Kusumasumantri, Sukarni, Chairul Saleh, Dr Buntaran Martoatmojo – PSII ,adik HOS Cakroaminoto, Wali Alfatah, Dr Sukiman dan SM Kartosuwirjo – Masjumi) dari golongan pemerintah dalam perjuangan melawan Belanda menggunakan strategi diplomasi sedangkan dari pihak Persatuan Perjuangan (PP) dalam melawan Belanda menggunakan strategi Perjuangan Bersenjata dan tetap menolak setiap usaha perjuangan diplomasi yang tidak didasarkan atas Kemerdekaan 100%, karena pertentangan ini kabinet sjahrir jatuh tetapi PP tidak dapat mengajukan calon alternative karena pada saat itu sukarno-Hatta tetap menginginkan perjuangan diplomasi, cabinet kedua sjahrir terbentuk,tetapi karena PP masih tetap keras dalam mempertahankan prinsipnya maka pemerintah mulai menggunakan kekerasan seluruh pimpinan PP di tangkap tanpa pernah diajukan ke pengadilan selama dua setengah tahun, maka sirnalah perjuangan mempertahankan kemerdekaan Indonesia dengan jalan perjuangan bersenjata sebagai hal primer dan diplomasi sebagai hal yang sekunder.  

Pendapat Tan Malaka mengenai peristiwa ini: 

“Selama dua setengah bulan Persatua Perjuangan berdiri, maka persatuan yang berdasarkan perjuangan itu dikenalkan pada seluruh rakyat dari Sultan-sultan sampai ke kaum gembel. Anti Imperialist Front ini mengambil rakyat sebulat-bulatnya, sepenuh-penuhnya buat mempertahankan republic 100%. Sebagai langkah pertama siasat ini mesti diambil, siasat semacam itu dicocokkan dengan keadaan Indonesia dan dengan sejarah revolusi dimana-mana didunia. Pertarungan dua setengah bulan itu sudah memberi ujian kepada semua lapisan tadi. Ternyata sudah setelah penangkapan Madiun terjadi ujian tadi sudah membawa pembelaan kemerdekaan Indonesia ketingkat kedua. Kaum Borjuis tengah dan atas ialah sebagian kaum saudagar, Pamong Praja dan Intelektual sudah melempem dan berbalik muka. Mereka tidak tahan menjalankan ujian itu dan asyik memikirkan bagaimana menghentikan perjuangan ini dan kembali menduduki kursi di sudut-sudut kantor yang di Tuan-Besari oleh Belanda. Sikap melempem di tengah revolusi itu bukanlah monopolinya kaum tengah Indonesia saja. Memang itu sifatnya kaum tengah, ialah maju mundur, lebih banyak mundur daripada maju kalau terlampau berat lekas mundur dan memilih pihak yang kiranya akan menang, Borjuis tengah Indonesia, seperti saudagar tengah, Pamong Praja dan Intelektual memang tidak bisa konsekuen baik dalam revolusi nasional dan revolusi social. 

Sifat memilih dan membidik siapa yang kuat dan akan menang dalam pergaulan itu memangnya terbawa oleh susunan ekonomi dan social Indonesia. Kaum tengah Indonesia tidak mempunyai tempat bersandar baik dalam ekonomi maupun dalam politik. Saudagar tengah Indonesia tidak kenal dengan kaum IMPORTIR sendiri, PABRIKAN Indonesia sendiri ataupun BANKIR sendiri, mereka bersandar pada Importir asing, Pabrikan asing dan Bankir asing. Demikian pula Pamong Praja dan reservenya, ialah kaum kaum Intelektual bersandar pula dengan Imperialism asing. Tidak ada parlemen atau pemerintahan nasional yang bisa dijadikan tujuan dalam usaha mereka mencari pangkal. Imperialisme Belanda dalam penjajahan 350 tahun itu, jaya menghasilkan satu golongan Pamong Praja dan reservenya, golongan intelektual kantoran yang mempunyai semangat ingin memasuki kantor dibawah perintah Tuan Belanda, “semangat Inlander–budak”. Semangat Inlander iniamat tebal dan tidak gampang di ombang-ambingkan oleh semangat revolusioner. Kalau Tuan Belanda hilang seperti pada waktu penyerahan Belanda tanggal 8  maret 1942, maka “para inlander” merasa berbahagia mendapatkan “Tuan Baru” dan memmpelajari “jongkok baru”, ialah jongkok ala Nippon. Apabila rakyat memproklamirkan kemederdekaan tanggal 17 agustus 1945, maka “para inlander” dengan setengah percaya dan setengah tidak percaya memasuki kantor republic. Tetapi apabila “Tuan lama”datang, maka gelisah lagi. Sekarang dengan memuncaknya perjuangan, maka sudah banyak para inlander tadi yang mengenal kembali “his masters-voice” itu. Mereka kembali bersedia menerima tuan lama untuk keperluan tua lama itu kalau perlu menentang kemauan bangsa sendiri. 

Kini mereka para inlander menunggu saat bilama mereka dengan aman bisa melompat-lompat kembali sambil berteriak-teriak “Tuan Besar sudah kembali”, sifat kaum tengah memang selalu bingung selalu bolak-balik diatas Borjuis besar dan proletar nasional. Akhirnya di tengah-tengah kesukaran perjuangan mereka membelok kepada yang kiranya menang. Di Indonesia Kapital dan Borjuis yang kuat kukuh itu terdiri dari bangsa asing. Mungkin pada permulaan perjuangan para inlanders memihak pada rakyat murba tetapi kalau perjuangan itu sedikit lama dan tampaknya sukar, maka mereka akan mengabdi kepada Kapital dan Borjuis asing manapun juga. Dalam dua setengah bulan PP itu berdiri, aliran “para inlanders” terasa benar. Makin keras desakan sekutu Inggris-Belanda dengan “moderatnya”, makin keras pula semangat para inladers dalam Persatuan Perjuangan membatalkan MINIMUM PROGRAM yang memang revolusioner sama sekali atau mensabot membelokkan melemahkan artinya. Sesudah tangkapan madiun proses ini berlaku lebih cepat dan nyata lagi. Tetapi dengan melemahkan, membelokkan bahkan seandainya membatalkan sama sekali tidak berarti bahwa rakyat Indonesia dengan pemudanya akan bisa dibelokkan, dilemahkan ataupun dipatahkan semangatnya dalam membela kemerdekaan 100% dan menolak Kapitalisme asing. 

Mungkin nama Persatuan Perjuangan atau Minimum Program akan dijadikan barang “bisikan” bahkan mungkin bisa ditutup sama sekali tetapi selama rakyat dan pemudanya terus mempertempurkan kemerdekaan 100% dan menolak Kapitalis asing maka selama itulah pula Persatuan Perjuangan yang berarti Persatuan dari mereka yang Berjuang serta Minimum Programnya akan berlaku. 

Nama kumpulan atau program baru mungkin bisa menipu rakyat dan pemudanya sebagian atau seluruhnya untuk sementara waktu tetapi tidak untuk selama-lamanya. 

Semenjak tangkapan madiun dengan radio Hilversumnya nyatalah sudah bahwa Persatuan Perjuangan dan Minimum Program sudah meningkat ke periode (musim) kedua dalam perjuangan Anti Imperialis dan Revolusi Nasional ini. Dalam periode kedua ini kaum setengah kesana dan setengah ke sini, setengah revolusioner dan setengah kompromi itu mesti disingkirkan sama sekali. Karena mereka sudah nyata, dan memegang terus mereka itu berarti melemahkan barisan perjuangan. Persatuan Perjuangan bukanlah berarti kumpulan kaum revolusioner, atau kaum kompromis yang siap dengan 1001 perkataan untuk menyelimuti politik komprominya. Sesudah tangkapan madiun maka perjuangan revolusioner Indonesia mesti dikembalikan ketangan mereka yang tegas-tegas mengakui kemerdekaan 100% menolak segala macam perundingan yang tidak berdasarkan pengakuan 100% itu dan tegas, terang menolak kapitalisme asing dengan siasat mensita perusahaan musuh. Pembersihan mesti dilakukan.

Dan didalam masa pembersihan itu mesti dilakukan dengan cepat dan kalau perlu dengan deras tangkas kalau tidak maka kaum kompromi akan akan jaya melembekkan semangat perjuangan, membelokkan atau mematahkan perjuangan itu sama sekali dan mengembalikan Indonesia ke status Penjajahan atau tidak dengan nama “Republic”. 

Setengah kaum tengah bagian atas yang dipelopori oleh “ahli” politik dan “ahli” diplomasi serta para Pamong Praja dan kaum Intelektual sudah terjerumus atau sengaja menerjunkan dirinya ketengah-tengah barisa NICA. Kaum pembelok, yang sudah menjalankan rolnya dengan terbuka, setengah tertutup atau sama sekali bersembunyi itu mesti di isolir, dipisahkan atau sama sekali diberantas dari perjuangan revolusioner. Persatuan Perjuangan revolusioner mesti terdiri dari kaum dan golongan revolusioner saja. Dalam periode kedua ini, sesudah ujian selama dua setengah bulan ini, maka golongan yang tetap revolusioner ialah:  

    Pertama. Golongan Proletar Industri, yakni: Buruh pabrik, bengkel, tambang, pengangkutan, listrik, percetakan dll.  

    Kedua.      Proletar tani, ialah burh kebun bersama dengan kaum tani biasa, kaum tani menengah sampai ketani sederhana (kerja dan cukup untuk keluarga sendiri saja) terus kesetengah tani dan setengah buruh tani. 

    Ketiga.    Kaum Marhaen ialah pedagang kecil, warga kecil seperti juru tulis, guru, intelektual miskin dikota-kota. 

Semua ketiga golongan ini menghendaki sungguh lenyapnya Imperialisme asing dan berdirinya terus Republik Indonesia dan banyak sekali memberikan pengorbanan harta dan jiwa dalam semua garis pertempuran. Ketiga golongan yang masih revolusioner dalam periode kedua di masa Revolusi Nasional ini lebih kurang terikat oleh tiga aliran pula, yakni aliran keIslaman, Kebangsaan dan ke-Proletaran (Sosialisme, Komunisme dan Anarcho-Syndikalis). Ketiga aliran ini terus menerus mempengaruhi pergerakan anti Imperialis di Indonesia selama lebih 40 tahu belakangan ini. Dalam periode kedua inipun ketiga aliran itu tiadalah bisa diabaikan………………………….Untuk periode kedua ini cukuplah sudah Minimum Programnya Persatuan Perjuangan yang kalau dirasa perlu bisa ditambah disana dan disini, dengan tiada mengurangi semangatnya yang revolusioner. Setelah Kemerdekaan 100% tercapai maka akan berlakulah Maximum Program yang maksudnya menuju Indonesia yang berdasarkan SOSIALISME……………bersandarkan kekuatan diri dan mengingat keadaan di sekitar Indonesia. Pertama sekali amat tidak bijaksana mengumumkan Maximum Program pada musim Revolusi Nasional Demokrasi ini………..(THESIS, 1946)               

Setelah itu mulailah musim runtuh berjuang karena pada saat itu setiap ada gerakan rakyat yang menginginkan mengadakan perjuangan bersenjata dengan pihak belanda pasti akan dikejar-kejar oleh tentara atau laskar yang berpihak kepada pemerintah, sebagai contoh hasil keputusan perjanjian linggarjati maka wilayah kerawang-bekasi-cikampek harus dikosongkan pasukan Republik harus mundur, padahal selama kurang lebih dua setengah tahun para laskar dari Laskar Rakyat Djakarta Raya pimpinan Sukarni, Wikana, Armunanto, berhasil mempertahankan daerah itu dan selalu membuat kocar-kacir pasukan belanda dan diwaktu malam hari mereka selalu menyusup ke Jakarta untuk membuat sabotase terhadap wilayah Belanda karena para laskar gerilyaitu tidak mau patuh kepada perintah pengosongan maka mereka bertempur sendiri dengan pasukan TNI sehingga banyak yang gugur dan pertahanan gerilya pecah dan begitu juga di jawa barat pertahanan Laskar Rakyat Djawa Barat pimpinan Chaerul saleh dan Laskar Bambu Runtjing Sidik Kertapati yang bersama-sama front Hizbullah pimpinan SM Kartosuwiryo pertahanannya hancur bukan karena diserang Belanda tetapi di serang TNI dan Laskar yang pro pemerintah yang mendukung perjanjian Linggarjati, di Jawa Tengah terjadi peristiwa tiga daerah (Brebes, Tegal dan Pekalongan) rakyat dipimpin oleh kader PKI bawah tanah pimpinan Widarta melakukan revolusi social menggulingkan kekuasaan para birokrat mereka menganggap bahwa para birokrat itu adalah agen jepang dan belanda karena sikap mereka yang menindas rakyat di masa lalu tetapi gerakan ini lagi-lagi digagalkan dan seluruh pimpinannya di tangkap termasuk juga Widarta dan ketika itu kelompok Widarta juga menolak perjanjian Linggarjati oleh pimpinan PKI pada saat itu Widarta dianggap sudah menjadi bagian kelompok Tan Malaka lalu keputusan Partai diambil untuk mengeksekusi mati Widarta karena dianggap tidak taat dengan keputusan partai yang mendukung perjanjian Linggarjati (Kelompok PKI Widarta ini adalah kelompok yang paling konsisten dan gigih menetang Jepang sewaktu pimpinan PKI illegal Amir syarifudin cs ditangkap Jepang maka kepemimpinan diteruskan oleh kelompok Widarta ini — Sikap ini nantinya akan dikecam oleh Musso sekembalinya dia dari Moscow karena menurut Musso sikap yang diambil oleh Widarta adalah tepat, menurut Musso bahwa Partai Komunis tidak boleh membunuh kadernya tetapi sangsi maximal yang bisa dikenakan oleh setiap kader partai Komunis adalah di royerr/pecat dan mengecam pimpinan-pimpinan PKI yang pada saat itu mendukung perjanjian Linggarjati dan Perjanjian Renville). Walaupun para pemimpin Persatuan Perjuangan (PP) berada di dalam penjara tetapi para pengikut Tan Malaka atau Partai politik yang terus memakai program Persatuan Perjuangan atau dipengaruhi oleh ide-ide Tan Malaka seperti Partai Rakyat, Partai Rakyat Djelata, Partai Buruh Merdeka, Barisan Banteng, ACOMA, Laskar rakyat Djawa Barat, Partai Wanita Rakyat (semua bergabung dalam Gerakan Rakyat Revolusioner – GRR) terus tetap mengkampanyekan program PP yang masih relevan dan menolak setiap usaha perjuangan diplomasi yang tidak berprinsip yang tidak berdasarkan atas Kemerdekaan 100% dan menolak segala macam bentuk perjanjian seperti Linggarjati dan Renville dan terus melakukan oposisi kepada pemerintah.  

Ketika awal-awal perang kemerdekaan kenapa Tan Malaka mendorong perjuangan kemerdekan Indonesia dengan menggunakan perjuangan bersenjata karena dia melihat modal yang dimiliki oleh kekuatan republic sangat besar ada Vacum of power (kekuasaan yang kosong karena Jepang kalah tetapi sekutu sebagai pemenang perang di pacific belum datang ke Indonesia dan dia melihat semangat para pemuda khususnya dan rakyat Indonesia umumnya semangat anti imperialismenya tinggi sampai-sampai rela menyerahkan jiwa dan raganya untuk membela tanah air, seharus peluang ini dilihat sebagai modal awal untuk mempertahankan republic (lihat yang dilakukan Ho Chi minh di Vietnam ketika terdengar Jepang sudah bertekuk lutut) ini yang harusnya dilakukan ketika itu belum apa-apa para pemimpin di republic ini Sukarno-Hatta-Sjahrir sudah ketakutan setengah mati melihat kedatangan sekutu ke Indonesia mereka harusnya melihat bagaimana semangat rakyat Surabaya yang tidak takut mati dibawah pimpinan Sumarsono (kader PKI-MUSSO) dan Haryo Ketjik (PARI-TAN MALAKA) walaupun dengan senjata yang serba kekurangan siang dan malam dibawah hujan bom dari pesawat inggris terus melakukan perlawanan sehingga membuat pasukan inggris yang tinggal 30.000 orang itu terdesak sudah di pinggir laut pihak angkatan laut inggris tidak dapat terus membomb daratan karena takut kalau terkena pasukannya sendiri ketika itu para pejuang sudah dalam tahap perang penumpasan terhadap pasukan inggris dan seketikan itu datang para pemimpin dari Jakarta seperti Sukarno-Hatta-Sjahrir dan dengan serta merta menghentikan pertempuran dan memerintahkan kepada semua rakyat untuk mundur kesempatan ini tidak disia-siakan oleh pihak inggris untuk mendrop logistic dan mengganti pasukan yang sudah morat-marit dengan pasukan yang baru yang lebih segar dengan persenjataan yang lebih lengkap sehingga perlawanan rakyat di Surabaya dapat dipukul mundur dan rakyat mundur ke pedalaman. Sampai di sini kita melihat dimana antara kemauan Pimpinan dengan kemauan rakyat yang sudah terbakar api revolusioner berbeda pimpinan politik pada saat itu didominasi oleh kekuatan Borjuis kecil yang mereka di dalam hati kecilnya takut melihat semangat gegap gempita rakyat revolusioner, disini kita melihat kekerdilan jiwa para pemimpin itu. 

Februari 1948 Perdana menteri Amir Syarifuddin (anggota PKI bawah Tanah) menandatangani perjanjian Renville, dengan mendapat dukungan dari sayap kiri “FDR”, PNI dan Masyumi dan setelah menandatangani perjanjian itu sebulan setelah itu Masyumi menolak perjanjian itu dan mengadakan demonstrasi yang didukung oleh front Hizbullah, GPI dan semua ormas-ormasnya yang hanya beratus-ratus orang itu untuk menuntut Perdana menteri Amir Syarifudin untuk mundur lalu cabinet goyang dan PM Amir mengembalikan kekuasaannya pada presiden Sukarno. Lalu sukarno menunjuk PM baru yaitu Moh.Hatta yang didukung oleh masjumi dan bekas PM sjahrir yang sudah pecah koalisinya dengan Amir sjarifudin lalu Amir dengan FDRnya menuntut jabatan Menteri Pertahanan kembali kepada Moh. Hatta lalu oleh Hatta di tolak Amir dengan FDRnya melakukan oposisi terhadap pemerintah lalu pihak FDR menggerakkan pemogokan Delanggu mulai terjadi konflik di massa rakyat mulai terjadi bentrokan antara Pesindo dengan Front Hizbullah, Sabupri dengan STII 

September 1948 Musso kembali ke Indonesia setelah banyak berbicara dengan berbagai kelompok seperti bertemu dengan presiden Sukarno lalu di menemui para pemimpin PKI seperti Alimin, Amir sjarifudin, Sarjono, Setiadjit, Abdul Madjid setelah melihat jalan revolusi Indonesia selama tiga tahun ini setelah menilai jalan yang di tempuh oleh PKI selama ini lalu Musso mengusulkan supaya diadakan fusi tiga partai yang berazaskan Marxis-Leninis yaitu Partai Sosialis, PBI dan PKI semua dilebur menjadi PKI yang berazaskan Marxis-Leninis karena dengan adanya tiga partai yang berazaskan sama akan membingungkan golongan Proletariat di Indonesia kata Musso dan Musso juga mengkritik sikap PKI yang mendukung Perjanjian Linggarjati dan Perjanjian Renville dan harus membatalkan dan menolak perjanjian itu karena dengan adanya perjanjian itu sama saja dengan mendukung penjajahan di Indonesia. PKI Musso menolak perundingan dengan Belanda yang tidak di dasarkan atas hak yang sama. Kaum Komunis secara Prinsipiil tidak menolak perundingan akan tetapi harus didasarkan atas hak yang sungguh-sungguh sama. Dalam perundingan sekali-kali tidak boleh disinggung soal kedaulatan republic atas seluruh Indonesia (Musso — Djalan Baru). 

Musso dan Seluruh pimpinan PKI melakukan vergadering2 untuk mensosialisasikan program baru PKI yaitu Program Djalan Baru berkeliling didaerah-daerah Jawa Tengah dan Jawa Timur yang masih menjadi wilayah kekuasaan republic. 

Tetapi konflik antara partai-partai politik sudah tidak bisa dihindari lagi  bermula dari peristiwa penembekan Kolonel Sutarto panglima divisi Panembahan Senopati yang menguasai daerah Surakarta yang bersimpati kepada FDR, terjadi tembak menembak antara Pesindo dengan laskar Front Hizbullah dan pasukan Siliwangi yang baru datang dari Jawa Barat karena harus mengosongkan daerah kantung gerilya akibat ditandatanganinya perjanjian Ranville,  mulai terjadi beberapa peristiwa penculikan dari berbagai kelompok seperti di culiknya Dr Muwardi ketua Barisan Banteng dan Sekjend GRR organisasi yang bersimpati kepada Tan Malaka lalu kelompok ini menuduh bahwa ini dilakukan oleh anak2 Pesindo lalu anggota Barisan Banteng yang waktu itu laskar terkuat didaerah Surakarta dengan kekuatan bersenjatanya kurang lebih 12.000 orang mengamuk dan mengacak-acak markas Pesindo dan PKI di Surakarta lalu bentrokan besar akhirnya tidak dapat dihindari antara Pesindo dan divisi Panembahan Senopati dan Front Hizbullah, TNI dari divisi Siliwangi dan Barisan Banteng, pertahanan Pesindo dan Panembahan Senopati hancur sisa-sisa pasukannya lari menuju Madiun, komandan Pesindo pada waktu itu Soemarsono mendengar peristiwa di Surakarta itu lalu dia berinisiatif melucuti semua pasukan-pasukan gelap, Polisi dan CPM dan Sumarsono mulai teriak-teriak orasi di radio bahwa telah terjadi tembak menembak di Madiun pasukan dari Surakarta telah sampai di madiun ,ketika itu Musso, Amir cs mendengar peristiwa itu lalu langsung menuju Madiun ketika Musso sampai di Madiun sudah terjadi tembak menembak kurang lebih 2 jam. 

20 september 1948 sukarno berpidato di radio menyatakan bahwa PKI-Musso telah berontak dan rakyat disuruh memilih ikut Sukarno-Hatta atau Musso dengan PKI. Tidak lama kemudia Musso juga berpidato di radio menuduh bahwa Sukarno-Hatta adalah pemerintah Borjuis-Feodal dan kolaborator boneka buatan Jepang yang telah menjual rakyat Indonesia menjadi Romusha budak Jepang. 

Bemtrokan besar sudah tidak bisa dihindari sebetulnya dari komposisi pasukan golongan FDR di Madiun memiliki pasukan lebih besar dari tentaranya Sukarno-Hatta tetapi mungkin karena penguasaan territorial yang kurang dan persiapannya basisnya kurang matang maka pasukan FDR kocar-kacir digulung pasukan Sukarno-Hatta sebagaian besar tertangkap, mati dan ada yang berusaha terus lari kearah djawa timur masuk kedaerah pendudukan Belanda, Musso sendiri tewas dan para pemimpin lainnya tertangkap seperti Amir syarifudin, Maruto Darusman, Supeno, dll. 

Bung Karno pernah berjanji kepada Jendral Sudirman bahwa apabila belanda mengadakan agressi militer kembali untuk menguasai republic maka dia dan semua pemimpin akan masuk kehutan ke pedalaman republic untuk memimpin perang gerilya melawan belanda sampai titik darah penghabisan tetapi apa yang terjadi pada tanggal 19 december 1948 belanda mengadakan aggressi militer yang kedua kali ibu kota jogyakarta di serang para pemimpin partai-partai politik di tangkap pada saat-saat terakhir Jendral sudirman menemui sukarno di kediamannya untuk membawa sukarno masuk ke hutan bersama-sama pasukannya untuk mengadakan perang perlawanan gerilya namun ketika itu apa jawaban sukarno: “Saya dan semua pemimpin partai politik dan pemerintahan akan menyerahkan diri tentara dan para laskar terus saja melakukan perang perlawanan kami akan melakukan perjuangan diplomasi” disitu jendral sudirman diam tertegun karena dia merasa dibohongi akan janjinya sukarno dahulu, lalu dia beserta pasukannya menyingkir keluar kota Jogya untuk melakukan perang perlawanan. (Watak opportunis Borjuasi disini terlihat tidak menepati janjinya yang akan berdiri sama tinggi dan duduk sama rendah dengan para pasukan gerilya dalam mempertahankan kemerdekaan tidak sanggup hidup kelaparan di dalam hutan, tidur beralaskan tanah dan ini nanti akan terbukti ketika zaman merdeka/demokrasi terpimpin bahwa sukarno hanya revolusioner di mulut tetapi nol di dalam tindakan ketika menghadapi bawahannya suharto yang membangkang pasca peristiwa 1 oktober 1965 sukarno terlihat gamang serba ragu dan ketika itu pada bulan januari 1966 Ruslan abdul gani mengajak bung karno untuk mundur ke jawa timur karena disana aman karena masih banyak pengikutnya yang setia terutama angkatan laut karena Ruslan melihat bahwa suharto dan angkatan darat sudah kurang ajar tetapi apa yang dikatakan oleh Sukarno: “Saya tidak ingin melihat bangsa Indonesia terpecah belah imperialisme Amerika sudah terpojok di Indocina ketika melihat ada peluang untuk mengintervensi Indonesia pasti itu akan dilakukannya bangsa ini pasti akan hancur, biarlah saya saja yang menjadi korban” lihat omongan seorang yang sudah menyerah padahal belum bertempur tapi lihat apa akibatnya, jutaan orang mati rakyat Indonesia sengsara sampai sekarang di bawah tindasan system kapitalisme, itu katanya pemimpin besar revolusi penyambung lidah rakyat tetapi ketika situasi revolusioner memuncak malah pemimpin-pemimpin besar layaknya Tan Malaka dan Musso dikhianati lalu dihabisi). 

Sekeluarnya Tan Malaka dan kawan-kawan dari penjara dia sempat ditanyai pendapatnya soal kejadian Madiun jawabnya adalah, soal Musso adalah soal Sukarno dan Hatta kalau kami diminta bantuan maka kami akan menolaknya tetapi tugas mendesak yang harus kami lakukan adalah menyusun sisa sisa kekuatan yang kami miliki baik itu senjata, tentara, laskar semua apapun yang dapat dipakai untuk menghadapi serangan imperialis belanda dan jika itu yang diminta kami akan kerahkan apa saja yang kami miliki sambil terus berusaha mengumpulkan semua kelompok yang masih mau berjuang mempertahankan kemerdekaan Indonesia yang 100%. Pada tanggal 7 November 1948 Tan Malaka masih sempat mendorong pendirian partai yang merupakan fusi dari berbagai partai dan laskar yaitu Partai Murba (beliau masih terinspirasi dengan kemenangan revolusi Rusia tanggal 7 November 1917) lalu meneruskan kembali perjuangan masuk kedaerah gerilya bersama para laskar untuk mempertahankan kemerdekaan Indonesia. Awal februari 1949 di daerah kediri dia masih melakukan berbagai propaganda baik diantara para laskar gerilya maupun di radio yang terkenal dengan siaran Murba terpendam, siaran terakhirnya kurang lebih isinya sebagai berikut:  

“Dimana Sukarno-Hatta? Tinggal di rumah yang indah, dengan makanannya yang mewah. Sambil menerima tamu dari Belanda, ketika kami gerilyawan menderita kelaparan di gunung-gunung. Sukarno dan Hatta semakin jauh. Mereka tidak akan pernah kembali lagi………lihat situasi di sekitar kita dengan bantuan politik kompromi Hatta, Belanda menyerang kita. Lihat persenjataan yang digunakan oleh Belanda. Belanda Negara miskin. Dari mana mereka mendapatkan senjata semacam itu? Itu semua dari Amerika. Panser-panser, pesawat-pesawat, jep-jep semua buatan Amerika…… 

Atas perintah Jendral Gatot Subroto panglima komando jawa memerintahkan untuk melucuti semua satuan laskar yang menentang pemerintah Borjuis-Feodal Sukarno-Hatta, semua satuan gerilya yang mendukung Tan Malaka dilucuti dan dia sendiri ditangkap dan dibunuh oleh TNI akhir bulan februari 1949 pada waktu semua pejuang gerilya baik itu dari gerilyawan Murba, Hizbullah, PSII, FDR semua bahu-membahu mempertahankan Republik Indonesia Merdeka dari serangan Imperialis Belanda. 

SANG GERILYA 

Ditengah-tengah Masyarakat Rakyat Murba

Ikut serta bekerja di sawah, kebon, pabrik dan tambang

Diwaktu tiada berlatih atau berjuang !

Berlaku sebagai guru kepada murid

Dan sebagai juru rawat kepada yang sakit

…………………………………………..

Tetapi sekonyong-konyong laksana Kilat-Halilintar

…………………………………………..

Mengejar halaukan musuh yang tersebar kesasar!

…………………………………………..

Langit atap-rumahnya, rumput kasurnya

mortir, mitraliyur karabin bantalnya

Atau dengan granat dan bamboo runtjing

Dalam panas dan hudjan dia berbaring…………….

………………………………………….

Semua musuh hantjur atau terpelanting !!!

Kembali dia ketengah Masyarakat Rakjat Murba

Sebagai Sang Gerilya !

Putera dan puteri, Tua dan Muda

Sampai Indonesia Merdeka ! 

(Apakah Putra dan Putri Indonesia yang mempertahankan kemerdekaannya dari Penjajahan Kaum Modal Belanda itu bukan seorang nasionalis, yang rela sampai-sampai mempertaruhkan segala harta dan jiwa raganya…???) 

 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

Book: The Indonesian Story (C. Wolf, 1948)

THE 

 

INDONESIAN 

STORY 

 

 

 

The Birth, Growth and 

Structure of the 

Indonesian Republic 

 

CHARLES WOLF, Jr. 

 

 

 

Issued under the auspices of the 

American Institute of Pacific Relations 

 

THE JOHN DAY COMPANY, NEW YORK 1948 

 

 

 

All rights reserved 

 

Copyright* 1948, by the International Secretariat 

Institute of Pacific Relations 

 

1 East 54th Street 

Nezv York 22, 2V. Y. 

 

 

 

PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA 

AMERICAN BOOKSTRATFORD PRESS, INC., NEW YORK, N. Y 

 

 

 

To 

 

T. W. 

 

 

 

PREFACE 

 

 

 

It is not surprising that the islands of the 

 

Indies have more than once been referred to as the cultural “melting 

pot of Asia.” The founding of the Hindu kingdom of Taruma in 

Western Java brought the rich heritage of ancient India to Indonesia 

over 1200 years ago. Later, pilgrims from India introduced Gau- 

tama’s teachings to the islands, and in the 8th and 9th centuries 

Buddhism reached its apogee with the hegemony of the Sumatran 

Empire of Shrivijaya. The remarkable Borobodur, with its countless 

carved stone figures of the Buddha, still stands in Middle Java as a 

monument to Buddhist art. 

 

In the 14th century the Madjapahit Empire, extending from 

New Guinea in the East to Sumatra in the West, brought about 

a fusion of the Brahman-Buddhist strains in Indonesian culture. 

Madjapahit later fell before the crusading vigor of Islam. By the end 

of the 15th century Mohammedanism had been accepted in all of 

Java and thence it spread to other parts of the archipelago. The 

acceptance of Islam was in many cases merely nominal. To this day 

Hindu influence remains in Indonesia as a sort of subtle pantheism, 

combined with a naturalist paganism in the more remote parts of the 

islands. In Bali and several of the remoter parts of Indonesia, Islam 

has never been adopted. There the Brahman-Buddhist-naturalist 

traditions have endured to the present day, still basically unchanged. 

 

Western penetration into Indonesia began in the 16th century 

with the arrival of the Portuguese, who were ousted in 1595 by the 

Dutch. Gradually bringing the outer islands under formal control, 

the Dutch erected a colonial structure which was to last until World 

War II. But as the Dutch colonial structure matured, Indonesian 

nationalism evolved. The nationalist movement gathered increasing 

momentum after the turn of the century. When the Japanese occu- 

pied the islands at the start of 1942, it grew at an accelerated pace 

and with Japan’s surrender, the nationalists prepared for what they 

hoped would be a new era in Indonesia’s history. On August 17, 

 

vii 

 

 

 

PREFACE 

 

1945, the Republic of Indonesia proclaimed its independence. This 

is where the present book begins. 

 

For the people of Indonesia, the surrender of the Japanese to the 

Allies meant the beginning rather than the end of war; or more pre- 

cisely, it meant the beginning of their war and the end of a foreign 

war. They had been affected by World War II. It had been waged 

partly on their lands and seas. They had suffered during four years 

under a Japanese misrule harsher than anything they had expe- 

rienced during three hundred and fifty years of Dutch colonialism. 

But in Indonesia, and the other areas of Southeast Asia, the people 

had never really become a party to or partisans of the war. There 

were small pro-Ally resistance groups in Indonesia, and a few ardent 

Japanese supporters as well. But in general, World War II remained 

for the people of Indonesia a struggle among alien forces. 

 

During the Japanese occupation, the seeds of Indonesian national- 

ism burgeoned. To some degree this was the result of Japanese 

propaganda. To a larger degree it was independent of Japanese in- 

fluence and quite often a reaction against it. Starting from the as- 

sumption that the Japanese overlord was only a temporary master, 

the intellectual leaders of the nationalist movement in Indonesia 

began to prepare for their real problem: resistance to a post-war 

restoration of colonialism. Taking advantage of the opportunity, 

they began the task of organizing and mobilizing the ignorant masses 

of the population in preparation for the future. They collaborated 

with the Japanese to secure these ends. They also supported the 

Japanese propaganda of “Greater East Asia” and “Asia for the Asi- 

atics” largely because it was a useful and practical tool. The Japa- 

nese gave the people of Indonesia sufficient grievances against them 

to make antipathy against the Japanese keener there, two and a half 

years after the occupation, than it is today in the United States. Yet 

the nationalist leaders were in many cases willing to collaborate be- 

cause of the ends they had in view. Much had been done toward the 

achievement of these ends when the Japanese capitulated, and the 

struggle for a new Indonesia began. 

 

This was the position in Indonesia when the British prepared to 

re-occupy the islands in September 1945. Much of the background 

is feeling and impression psychological and emotionalwhich per- 

meated almost all of Southeast Asia at the time of re-occupation. 

The forces of the past and of the future met and began to be 

resolved, as opposing political and sociological forces usually are, 

partly by statesmanship and partly by military pressure. This book 

 

 

 

PREFACE IX 

 

deals with the meeting and resolution of these forces. More partic- 

ularly, it deals with the political and economic struggle which has 

been going on in Indonesia since 1945 and with the young Repub- 

lic’s record during this turbulent period. Notwithstanding the ex- 

tremely fluid situation prevailing at the time of writing, an attempt 

has been made to analyze the Republic’s longer-range prospects, and 

to suggest their implications. 

 

Many of the issues discussed are highly controversial. Both the 

Indonesian and Dutch viewpoints are held strongly, if not violently, 

by their adherents. A sincere effort has been made to be objective 

in the analysis; that is, to present each side of the controversy in its 

own terms and from its own point of view. Where comparison and 

evaluation are undertaken, I have tried to be fair. It is, however, not 

always easy or valid to subsume the irrational components of revolu- 

tion under the rational. Nevertheless, on both sides of the dispute, 

material which was felt to contribute heat rather than light has been 

left out. Where value judgments have been made/ 1 think they will 

stand out clearly as such to the reader. Reactions and comments 

elicited by the manuscript prior to printing have indicated that the 

above efforts will not prove fully satisfactory to either Dutch or 

Indonesian partisans. That is probably unavoidable. 

 

It should be noted that the scope of the present work is necessarily 

limited. No attempt has been made to deal with cultural develop- 

ments in modern Indonesia. Only brief reference has been made to 

the complicated problem of Chinese and Eurasian minority groups. 

Nor is the presentation of Republican economics as complete or 

analytical as would be warranted in a work of more exhaustive scope. 

Finally, limitations of time and space have made it impossible to dis- 

cuss fully certain aspects of events in Indonesia which are of partic- 

ular interest to the student of international law, e.g. the issues con- 

nected with de facto and de jure sovereignty, recognition, etc. 

 

Attention is called to the seeming anomaly that in Chapter VIII 

and in earlier chapters, Dr. Hatta is referred to as the Republic’s 

vice-president, whereas in Chapter IX an account is given of the 

cabinet crisis of January 23, 1948, which led to Hatta’s designation 

as Prime Minister and cabinet formateur. The inconsistency was 

due to a substantial rewriting of Chapter IX after the earlier chap- 

ters were already in print. Since completion of the manuscript, the 

Security Council’s Committee of Good Offices has received official 

commendation from the Council for its work in bringing about the 

Renville truce agreement and the political principles of January 17, 

 

 

 

X PREFACE 

 

1 948. With the major part of its work still lying ahead, the Commit- 

tee has returned from Lake Success to Indonesia to launch the second 

phase of its task: implementation of the truce and assistance to the 

parties in framing a final political settlement. After several incidents 

in mid-April, which threatened to nullify the Committee’s earlier 

work, negotiations between the parties, under the Committee’s aus- 

pices, appear ready to begin anew. Decisive results remain to be 

achieved. 

 

Much of the material used was derived from personal observation 

and experience in Indonesia during the period February 1946 to 

June 1947, when the author was a vice-consul in Batavia. For docu- 

mentary material which has been made use of, I am indebted to Dr. 

N. A. C. Slotemaker de Bruine of the Netherlands Embassy in Wash- 

ington, Dr. H. J. Friedericy and Dr. B. Landheer of the Netherlands 

Information Bureau in New York, and the Messrs. Charles Thamboe, 

Soedjatmoko Mangoendiningrat and Soedarpo Sastrosatomo of the 

Republican Ministry of Information. The manuscript was read by 

Miss Virginia Thompson, Professor Raymond Kennedy, Mr. Richard 

AdlofE, and Mr. Bruno Lasker, whose comments have been of con- 

siderable value. I am also grateful for the suggestions and criticisms 

which Mn William L. Holland of the Institute of Pacific Relations 

has offered at various stages in the preparation of the manuscript. 

The Institute, though sponsoring the publication of the book, does 

not assume responsibility for the views I have expressed. For all opin- 

ions and conclusions presented in the book I am alone responsible. 

 

CHARLES WOLF, JR. 

Harvardevens, Mass. 

April 19, 1948 

 

 

 

CONTENTS 

 

 

 

AUTHOR’S PREFACE 

 

PART I 

 

THE BEGINNINGS OF THE REPUBLIC OF INDONESIA 

 

CHAPTER PAGE 

 

I. Birth of the Republic 3 

 

II. The British Occupation 15 

 

III. Proposals, Counterproposals and the Linggadjati Agreement 29 

 

PART II 

 

THE REPUBLIC IN OPERATION 

 

IV. Political Organization of the Republic 49 

V. Economic Problems and Policies 68 

 

VI. Republican Leadership 88 

 

PART III 

 

DEVELOPMENTS AFTER LINGGADJATI AND THE OUT- 

LOOK FOR THE FUTURE 

 

VII. Failure to Implement the Linggadjati Agreement and the 

 

Final Breakdown 105 

 

VIII. Military Action and the Role of the Security Council 128 

 

IX. Recent Developments and the Outlook for the Future 145 

 

APPENDIX 

 

Preamble and Constitution of the Republic 165 

Political Manifesto of the Indonesian Government 172 

Text of the Linggadjati (Cheribon) Agreement 175 

Letter from Sjahrir to the Commission-General, June 23, 1947 179 

Text of the United States Aide Memoire to the Indonesian Repub- 

lic, June 27, 1947 180 

Memorandum of July 20, 1947, from the Lieutenant Governor 

 

General to the Government of the Republic of Indonesia 181 

 

Interests of American Firms in Indonesia 185 

 

Truce Agreement Signed Jan. 17, 1948 184 

 

Radio Address of Queen Wilhelmina, Feb. 3, 1948 189 

 

INDEX 193 

 

 

 

PART I 

 

THE BEGINNINGS 

 

OF THE REPUBLIC OF INDONESIA 

 

 

 

CHAPTER ONE 

 

 

 

BIRTH OF THE REPUBLIC 

 

 

 

On August 17, 1945, the Republic of Indonesia was 

proclaimed by a small group of determined men, 

 

“Since independence is the right of every nation, any form of subjuga- 

tion in this world is contrary to humanity and justice, and must be abol- 

ished. The struggle for Indonesian Independence has reached a stage of 

glory in which the Indonesian people are led to the gateway of an inde- 

pendent, united, sovereign, just and prosperous Indonesian state. 

 

“With the blessing of God Almighty, and moved by the highest ideals 

to lead a free national life, the Indonesian people hereby declare their 

independence.” 

 

At its inception the new government claimed jurisdiction over a 

land area of more than 700,000 square miles and a population of 

more than 70 million. To some its birth came as a complete surprise; 

as far as they knew it had no roots in the past that preceded the 

Japanese occupation. Actually, this is only partially true, During 

the nineteenth century there had been no less than thirty-three 

revolts against Dutch authority in the Indies. For the most part, 

however, these were Batak or Atchenese or other local revolts; that 

is, they came from sectional minorities and did not have a national 

character. 

 

The formal nationalist movement in the Indies began in Java in 

1908 with the organization of the Boedi Oetomo or “High Endeavor” 

society under the leadership of a pacifist social reformer, Soetomo. 

From that time until World War II, Indonesian nationalism was 

characterized by division and disunity, by factionalism of both ex- 

tremist and moderate groups, and by the constant addition of new 

elements to the movement. The nationalist movement came to repre- 

sent different things to different people. It was linked to social re- 

form as advocated by Soetomo. It put its faith in traditionalist or 

Taman-Siswo mass education, according to the ideals of Dewantara. 

It sought autonomy within the Dutch Empire swayed by the pleas of 

 

 

 

 

4 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

Soetardjo. It was revolutionary Communism when led by the Mos- 

cow-trained Tanmalaka. It was non-cooperative and radical, a call to 

resistance to Dutch authority, as advanced by the fiery Soekarno 

and the professorial Hatta. It was imbued with the concept of 

social democracy and economic betterment under independent In- 

donesian auspices, led by the young Western-educated socialists 

Sjahrir and Sjarifoeddin. All these elements attached themselves to 

the nationalist cause in the course of its evolution. 1 For thirty years, 

the diversity of these groups and the conflicts among them, no less 

than Dutch suppression of overt acts, stood in the way of Indian 

nationalist unity. 

 

At last, in May 1939 a federation of all Indonesian nationalist 

parties, the Gaboengan Partai Indonesia or G A.P.I., was formed by an 

alliance between the cooperative nationalists in the Parindra party 

and the radical nationalists in the Gerindo party, together with a 

number of smaller groups and religious organizations. This first coali- 

tion was a significant achievement in the development of Indonesian 

nationalism, although for some time world events were to prevent 

the G. A.P.I, from consolidating and exerting a constructive influence. 

Nevertheless, however unstable, the unity which it represented was to 

become a symbol of profound importance. 

 

With the start of the war in Europe in September 1939, shortly 

after the formation of the G.A.P.L, and the fall of Holland in May 

1940, the colonial government of the Netherlands Indies was at that 

time obliged sharply to curtail the activity of the nationalist move-^ 

ment in the interest of the European war effort. Great Britain and the 

United States were making urgent demands for strategic stockpiles of 

the produce of the Indies for rubber, tin, quinine, fibers, and drugs. 

To meet these emergency requirements the Dutch sought to place 

the Indies on a semi-war footing. 

 

In accomplishing this economic and strategic aim the Netherlands 

Indies Government was eminently successful. As an index of the ef- 

fectiveness of this policy, a comparison of exports from the Indies to 

the United States in 1938 and 1940 shows an increase for tin of 412 

per cent, for rubber of 331 per cent, for drugs and spices of 227 per 

cent, for fibers of 218 per cent, and a total increase in Netherlands 

Indies exports from about $330,000,000 in value to approximately 

$450,000,000. 2 

 

l Cf. Paul Kattenburg, “Political Alignments in Indonesia,” Far Eastern Survey, New 

York, September 25, 1946. 

 

* See Rupert Emerson, The Netherlands Indies and the United States, World Peace 

Foundation, Boston, 1942, pp. 45-7. 

 

 

 

BIRTH OF THE REPUBLIC 5 

 

The heated Japanese negotiations for oil concessions in the Indies, 

and the unmistakable signs of trouble appearing on the Pacific hori- 

zon, strengthened the Dutch resolve to eliminate dissension and to 

render the nationalist agitation ineffectual, at least for the time be- 

ing. The Penal Code, forbidding any agitation which might foment 

disorder, was narrowly construed and rigidly enforced. Free assembly 

was curtailed. The nationalist press was made to toe the line of un- 

yielding resistance to the Japanese and of support of the European 

war effort. Nationalist pamphleteering was repressed, and many of 

the pamphleteers and nationalist leaders were jailed or exiled. 

When the Japanese occupied the Indies in March 1942, three of the 

future “Big Four” of the Republic Soekarno, Hatta and Sjahrir 

were in prison or exile, although their prison sentences had begun 

before 1940, and the fourth, Amir Sjarifoeddin, had spent part of 

1940 in prison for dangerous incitement, after which he went to 

work with the government in the Department of Economic Affairs 

because of his antipathy to fascism. 

 

As a result, largely, of Dutch colonial policy from 1939 to 1942, 

the Japanese did not have a consolidated Indonesian nationalist 

front to contend with when they occupied the Indies. In fact, even 

such effective unity as did exist among the nationalists was dis- 

rupted still further over the issue of collaboration. 

 

On the one hand, there was a group headed by Sjahrir and Sjari- 

foeddin: the young, Western-educated intellectuals who, on purely 

ideological grounds, refused to have anything to do with Japanese 

fascism. Some of them were immediately jailed. Others, like Sjahrir, 

pretended to be only passive toward the Japanese. Released from in- 

ternment, Sjahrir went to Tjipanas in the mountains of West Java to 

work quietly and plan for the future. Here he and his colleagues 

gradually built up the Javanese resistance organization that later be- 

came a driving force behind the Republic’s Declaration of Independ- 

ence. Here he wrote his Perdjoeangan Kita (Our Struggle) and what 

was to become the Political Manifesto of the Republic. 

 

Sjarifoeddin also entered the small underground resistance move- 

ment. He was imprisoned by the Kempeitai^ or Japanese Secret 

Police, in 1943, and placed under sentence of death, later commuted 

to life imprisonment. 

 

On the other hand there was the group, headed by Soekarno, 

Hatta, Mansoer and Dewantara, who felt that the defeat of the 

Dutch armed forces and the internment of the remaining white 

Dutch civilian population promised the dawn of a new era for 

 

 

 

6 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

Indonesia. This group contended that the new era could best be 

prepared for by dealing with the Japanese in the open, rather than 

by taking the nationalist movement underground. There is little 

evidence to support the charge that this group dealt with the Japa- 

nese from choice. In fact, even those whose dislike for the Dutch 

originally induced some sympathy for the Japanese soon were alien- 

ated completely by the harshness of the Japanese occupation policy, 

and by the decidedly unfavorable turn which the war began to take 

for Japan. 

 

It is not hard to understand the initial reaction of many of the 

nationalist leaders in 1942. In many cases they recognized the Japa- 

nese as the victors over a colonial government which, whatever its 

merits, had coerced them in peace-time. A certain feeling of grati- 

tude and a desire to cooperate with the Japanese were inevitable in 

these instances, and yet after the first year of the occupation it be- 

came clear to even the most sympathetic nationalists that the na- 

tionalist cause would have to be advanced by exerting constant pres- 

sure on the Japanese, and not by simply cooperating with them. 

There were, furthermore, enough short-wave radio sets operating 

clandestinely, despite the untiring efforts of the Kempeitai to ferret 

them out, for the nationalists to hear and to become convinced by 

1943 that the war was definitely turning against the Japanese in the 

Pacific, and that the Japanese hold on the islands was to be short- 

lived. Under such conditions, honest and sincere collaboration with 

the Japanese was very rare. What at first appeared to be collabora- 

tion seems now, upon closer examination, to have been a hard and 

tenacious bargaining to secure concessions for the nationalist move- 

ment. 

 

THE JAPANESE OCCUPATION 

 

The introduction of Japanese rule after the capitulation of the 

Dutch in March 1942 meant the elimination of Dutch officialdom, 

and the imposition of military authority over an indigenous adminis- 

trative substructure. There was no wholesale overhauling of the 

governmental organization despite the elimination of the Dutch, 3 

but not the Eurasian, personnel a distinction which was almost im- 

possible to draw accurately after many generations of miscegenation. 

 

s In Soerabaja, in 1942, several hundred Dutch officials and petty officials were actu- 

ally taken from internment by the Japanese to help solve the city’s food distribution 

problem, which the Japanese could not handle themselves after several weeks of try- 

ing. Within a relatively brief span of time the Dutch had reorganized food distribu- 

tion, and in fact they remained out of internment for over a year until 1943 when the 

Japanese felt they themselves were able to control food distribution again. 

 

 

 

BIRTH OF THE REPUBLIC 7 

 

With their own military authorities firmly placed at the helm, the 

Japanese had as their principal aim that of making the islands self- 

sufficient and of gearing agricultural production to the needs of the 

war machine. 

 

Where necessary new directing organizations were set up by the 

Japanese. For example, an Agricultural Industrial Control Board 

(Saibai Kogyo Kanri Kodan) was set up, early in 1942, connected with 

the former Department of Economic Affairs, with broad powers to 

handle overall financial and procurement requirements for agricul- 

tural industries. The S.K.K.K. was also empowered to deal with 

storage and distribution of the produce of these industries, and to 

gear estate production to the needs of the war effort. In June 1943, 

the powers of the S.K.K.K. were extended still further to include 

not only large estate industries such as rubber and cinchona, but 

also the small estates, particularly those engaged in the production of 

fibers and cacao. 

 

In general, however, the exploitative economic war aims of the 

Japanese were prosecuted within the framework of an unchanged 

administrative set-up. Political measures, including propaganda and 

limited concessions to the nationalists, were regarded by the Japa- 

nese as means to achieve the main economic goals, and to enlist 

popular support for total economic mobilization. Quinine, tin, 

petroleum products, fibers, textiles and food products, especially 

rice and cassava, were needed; and the Japanese ruthlessly con- 

scripted labor into the Hei Ho or Work Corps, to step up produc- 

tion. Actually, in the case of all production except quinine which 

was increased by 16 per cent, and ramie, a flax plant for making tex- 

tiles which was newly cultivated by the Japanese output fell 

considerably under Japanese direction. No figures concerning 

petroleum or tin production from 1942 to 1945 are available, but 

according to both Japanese and Indonesian statistics covering Java, 

rice production dropped by 25 per cent during this period, corn by 

36 per cent, cassava by almost 50 per cent, rubber by more than 80 

per cent in both Java and Sumatra, tea by over 95 per cent, coffee by 

about 70 per cent and palm oil by almost 75 per cent. 

 

The labor reservoir also had to be drained to supply men for the 

auxiliary army, and for police and air-raid protection. For all these 

purposes the method of conscription was employed. 

 

To enlist popular support for such drastic economic measures, the 

Japanese launched successive propaganda campaigns which met with 

varying degrees of success depending upon the nationalist support 

 

 

 

8 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

which they received. The first campaign aimed at the glorification 

of Japan and the Greater East Asia Co-Prosperity Sphere, with Indo- 

nesia as a part. This so-called Tiga A (Triple A) movement extolled 

Japan as the “Savior, Leader and Life of Asia” and at the same time 

banned all labor and political organizations, and placed a tighter 

clamp on the press than the Dutch had ever imposed. Tiga A was 

dropped after December 1942, when it had become clear that its 

lack of popular support made it a failure. 

 

The Poesat Tenaga Rajat (Central People’s Power) followed in 

its wake. The Poetera, as it was called, was a centralized organization 

of all political parties (united formally for the first time since the 

defunct G.A.P.I.), including also labor organizations and religious 

and youth societies. Led by Soekarno, Hatta, Mansoer and Dewan- 

tara, the Poetera acquired a strong nationalistic character, and be- 

cause of its broader base, became a potentially stronger nationalist 

force than the G.A.P.I. had been. The Poetera movement spread 

rapidly after its formation in March 1943. While its immediate 

effect was to contribute to a more united war effort, it represented a 

force and a threat to the Japanese which they were never quite able 

to eliminate. In a sense the Poetera was the first formal nationalist!- 

cally-mclined organization to manifest itself during the occupation. 

As its strength grew and it came to include an Auxiliary Army force 

(Tentara Pembela Tanah Aer) and an armed Police Force as well, 

the resistance of the nationalists to Japanese demands stiffened. 

 

The Poetera never broke openly with the Japanese, but neither 

did it express opposition to the revolts which broke out in Blitar, 

Indramajoe and Tasikmalaja as the occupation wore on. The Poe- 

tera carried on a continual tug-of-war with the Japanese military 

authorities for concessions to the nationalist cause, for higher posi- 

tions in the government for Indonesians, and for a withdrawal of 

Japanese officialdom. In exchange for these concessions the national- 

ists promised support of the war effort. 

 

The relation between the Poetera and the Japanese military was 

thus a dynamic one of stress and strain. As the military situation in 

the Pacific grew more and more precarious for the Japanese, the 

pull exerted by the Poetera intensified. As the Japanese war position 

grew still weaker, the Poetera and the nationalists grew stronger, and 

the concessions which they were able to elicit widened in scope. 

 

Finally, after considerable earlier pressure from the Poetera, a 

Commission for the Preparation of Independence was set up in 

April 1944 with Soekarno and Hatta as its guiding lights. By June 

 

 

 

BIRTH OF THE REPUBLIC 9 

 

1944 the nationalists were able to exert sufficient economic pressure 

on the Japanese to bring about the end of the centralized Agricul- 

tural Control Board. In its place, an Agricultural Industrial Trust 

(Saibai Kogyo Renokat) was set up, exercising the same functions 

and with the same powers as the former S.K.K.K., except that it was 

now controlled not by the Japanese military but by private estate 

owners and agricultural companies, Indonesian and Chinese as well 

as Japanese. 

 

In September 1944, under increasing pressure both from the na- 

tionalists and the deteriorating military situation in the Pacific, 

Premier Koiso made the first formal Japanese promise of independ- 

ence to the Indonesians. The red and white independence flag and 

the national anthem, Indonesia Raja (Great Indonesia), which the 

Preparatory Commission had adopted, now were recognized by the 

Japanese authorities. In addition, new regulations were adopted to 

increase the participation of Indonesians in the government as the 

nationalists had demanded. 

 

In July 1945, with American forces in the Pacific closing in for the 

kill, Count Terauchi, the Japanese Commander-in-Chief for South- 

east Asia and the Indies, received instructions from Tokyo to 

make preparations for independence discussions with the Indonesian 

leaders. The original Tokyo plan provided that independence would 

be declared in the name of the Emperor as soon as Russia entered 

the war, and it was further hoped by the Japanese that, with this 

inducement, the Indonesian Auxiliary Army might then be counted 

on to fight side by side with the Japanese against the expected in- 

vasion forces. 

 

In early August, Soekamo and Hatta left Batavia for Japanese 

Asia Headquarters in Saigon by special Japanese plane at Terauchi’s 

invitation. There is every reason to believe that they knew what the 

purpose of their visit was to be and what the underlying motives of 

the Japanese were. 

 

Less than one week after their return to Batavia the Japanese 

capitulation was announced, and somewhat hastily and boldly two 

days later, on August 17, Soekarno and Hatta proclaimed the Re- 

publicnot in the name of the Japanese Emperor, but in the name 

of the Indonesian people. 

 

THE ISSUE OF COLLABORATION 

 

Under the confused conditions which prevailed throughout South- 

east Asia at the time of the unexpected Japanese surrender announce- 

 

 

 

10 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

ment, it was inevitable that suspicion of collaboration should be- 

come attached to the new-born independence movements in Burma, 

Indo-China, and Indonesia, and that these suspicions would crystal- 

lize into definite charges against the new regimes by the returning 

colonial powers. 

 

The charges were not long in making an appearance. In Septem- 

ber 1945, Dr. Hubertus J. van Mook, the Lt. Governor General of 

the Netherlands Indies in exile in Australia, advised Admiral 

Mountbatten, the Supreme Allied Commander for Southeast Asia: 

 

“It is obvious that this republican movement is a restricted one and 

that its pattern is a dictatorship after the Japanese model. … It is to be 

seriously doubted that the puppet government has much of a following, 

and it is of particular importance that this extremist organization not be 

recognized in any way directly or indirectly [since it is] … simply a 

Japanese creation/’ 

 

Allied intelligence concerning Indonesia during the occupation 

was more meager than for any other area in Southeast Asia. The 

charges of collaboration thus found the world at large unable to 

judge the situation which had existed during the occupation, or 

to recognize the larger scope which the nationalist movement was 

to attain immediately after the Japanese capitulation. There had 

been no O.S.S. or Allied intelligence teams operating regularly 

throughout the archipelago as there had been in other parts of the 

region. Indeed, Japanese broadcasts and one or two brief landings 

on the Java and Sumatra coasts from submarines by Dutch and 

Allied operatives furnished most of the sparse information which 

came from Indonesia during the war. The landings of British forces, 

in October 1945, in insufficient strength and after a critical six 

weeks’ delay, reflected this dearth of intelligence. 

 

Even after the re-occupation it was difficult to obtain the informa- 

tion necessary for a candid appraisal of the collaborationist charges. 

Released Dutch internees and P.O.W.’s were either too biased or too 

out of touch to offer a fair index of the real state of affairs. Un- 

biased Indonesians were just as difficult to find, and the Chinese 

and Eurasian minorities often were too afraid either of the returning 

Dutch or of the Indonesians to speak freely. 

 

One of the few Europeans fully qualified and sufficiently open- 

minded to judge these charges and to appraise the Republic at its 

inception was a British Army officer, Lt. Colonel Laurence van der 

Post Colonel van der Post had been assigned by British Army 

 

 

 

BIRTH OF THE REPUBLIC 11 

 

Intelligence to remain behind in Java -when Field Marshal Wavell’s 

Southeast Asia Headquarters In Bandoeng decided to evacuate in 

February 1942. He had been assigned the mission of continuing 

guerrilla operations in the hills as long as possible, and specifically 

of keeping au courant of general events during the Japanese occupa- 

tion, looking toward the day when Allied troops would return to 

the Indies. He himself was interned by the Japanese after the guer- 

rilla activities which he had directed in the hills were brought to 

an end. Nevertheless, he maintained sufficient contact with the out- 

side to remain probably the best authority on the Republic’s pre- 

natal history and formation. Unfortunately, however, Colonel van 

der Post’s wide fund of information was never given the attention 

that it merited. 

 

Actually, an accurate appraisal of the collaborationist charges 

which have been directed against the Republic’s leaders depends 

primarily on an initial adjustment in viewpoint. In analyzing 

collaboration with the Japanese in Indonesia a basically different 

approach must be adopted from that applied to the same issue in 

the occupied countries of Europe. 

 

In Europe, the populations of the occupied countries knew what 

the war was about. Despite blundering and corruption in pre-war 

Europe, they knew that fundamentally it represented a struggle for 

existence against the expanding forces of aggressive Fascism. They 

had the clear evidence before them that the Fascist enemy had 

“blitzed” through their defenses, beaten their armies, and forced 

their governments into exile. They maintained contact with these 

exiled governments through the active underground movements 

which flourished under the eyes of the invader. They received news 

and pamphlets from their governments by way of the underground 

and by air; and they could carry on in the assurance that their 

forces and those of their allies were growing stronger day by day and 

would eventually return to liberate their soil. In short, despite harsh 

and discouraging conditions and deprivations, they still had some 

feeling of “belonging,” of being a part of the fight against an enemy 

of long standing; a fight that was being prosecuted by their brothers- 

in-arms outside the motherland. 

 

Under such conditions collaboration with the enemy by an indi- 

vidual citizen was tantamount to treason against his nation’s still- 

continuing fight. In Europe a patriotic and thinking citizen’s duty 

and attitude toward the invader were clear. Collaboration generally 

stood out clearly when judged in this light. 

 

 

 

12 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

In Indonesia, on the other hand, a patriotic nationalist’s duty and 

attitude toward the Japanese were by no means as simple or as clear. 

In the first place, the struggle which the war represented between 

fascism and democracy was obscure and distant to all but the most 

sophisticated and Westernized intellectuals, such as Sjahrir and 

Sjarifoeddin. Furthermore, the Japanese were not an established 

enemy of long standing with whom the Indonesians had already had 

contact before and of whom they had already formed a definite im- 

pression. The existence of anti-white racialism, which Japanese 

propaganda exploited, led some Indonesians to identify their op- 

position to foreign white rule with the Japanese war against the 

Western powers. 

 

The Indonesian nationalists did not have the feeling that the 

enemy had fought against their defenses, beaten their forces, or 

driven their government into exile. In fact, the Indonesian people 

had not had any arms with which to fight the invader, since the 

Dutch Government had avoided arming or training any large groups, 

except for the loyal Ambonese, “and had particularly avoided the 

training or arming of educated or nationalistic Indonesians. The 

emergency conditions of the period from 1939 through 1942 had not 

changed this policy. During this period the Dutch had been even 

more circumspect in their building of an Indonesian armed force, 

lest it might come under the influence of the nationalist movement. 

 

Finally, the patriotic Indonesian had little feeling of attachment 

to or contact with the distant Netherlands Indies Government in 

Australia. The underground resistance movement maintained no 

liaison with the exiled Dutch. Such resistance as the Indonesians 

organized was their own and was neither in close touch with nor 

was it supplied by the exile government outside. The Dutch Govern- 

ment had gone, and the Dutch civilians remaining behind were 

interned and for the most part effectively removed from the scene. 

The Indonesians were now alone. They were isolated and left on 

their own to sink or struggle to shore as best they could. The resent- 

ment and sense of isolation felt were summarized by Sjahrir in his 

Political Manifesto: 

 

“When the Netherlands Indies Government . . . surrendered to the 

Japanese in Bandoeng in March 1942, our unarmed population fell prey 

to the harshness and cruelty of Japanese militarism. For three and a half 

years our people were bent under a cruelty which they had never before 

experienced throughout the last several decades of Netherlands Colonial 

rule. Our people were treated as worthless material to be wasted in the 

 

 

 

BIRTH OF THE REPUBLIC 13 

 

piocess of war. From the lowly stations of those who were forced to ac- 

cept compulsory labor and slavery and whose crops were stolen, to the 

intellectuals who were forced to propagate lies, the grip of Japanese 

militarism was universally felt. For this, Dutch colonialism is respon- 

sible in that it left our 70,000,000 people to the mercies of Japanese 

militarism without any means of protecting themselves since they had 

never been entrusted with fire-arms or with the education necessary to 

use them. . . . 

 

“A new realization was born in our people, a national feeling that was 

sharper than ever before. This feeling . . . was also sharpened by the Japa- 

nese propaganda for pan-Asianism. Later attempts by the Japanese to 

suppress the nationalist movement were to no avail. During three and a 

half years of Japanese occupation, the whole state organization . . . which 

had been controlled by the Dutch, was handled by the Indonesians under 

the authority of the Japanese. . . . Our nation acquired greater confidence 

and our national awareness grew towards the Japanese as well as towards 

other nations. 

 

“The millions of people lost during the occupation and the miseries 

under which the rest of the population lived . . . must be attributed to 

the inadequate preparation which we were given by the Dutch. Because 

of these facts the Dutch have not the moral right to accuse us of having 

cooperated with the Japanese. . . .” 4 

 

It is certainly true that there were instances of collaboration and 

corruption stemming from purely selfish and servile motives. In 

general, however, it appears that the overall collaborationist charges 

directed against the Republic and many of its leaders must be 

judged in the extenuating light of the complex psychological and 

emotional factors referred to above. It is in this light that the 

occupation records of Soekarno and Hatta and their coterie are actu- 

ally regarded by Indonesian public opinion, and it is this factor 

which has constituted a major source of strength for both the 

Republic and Soekarno. Public opinion in Indonesia regards Soe- 

karno and Hatta not as having been pro-Japanese, but as the leaders 

who cheated the Japanese by political cunning and who brought the 

Republic to life as a result. This is one reason why the colorful per- 

sonality of Soekarno, rather than the more profound and more so- 

phisticated Sjahrir, has the backing of the Indonesian people today, 

It is, of course, impossible not to admire the self-contained in- 

tegrity of Sjahrir who staunchly resisted dealing with the Japanese. 

Nevertheless, Soekarno and Hatta, largely through their own names 

and personalities, preserved the continuity of the nationalist move- 

ment throughout the occupation. It is doubtful whether, without 

 

4 Translated from Sjahrir’s Political Manifesto, Batavia, November 1945. See Ap- 

pendix, p. 172- 

 

 

 

14 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

this continuity, the Republic would have had either the organiza- 

tion or the popular support which it was to need for survival. 

 

After August 17, 1945, the Sjahrir and Sjarifoeddin group united 

firmly with the Soekarno and Hatta group in supporting the Re- 

public. Later attempts of the Dutch to drive a wedge between the 

two by refusing to deal with the collaborationist Soekarno but 

warmly accepting Sjahrir for negotiation failed. Dr. van Mook 

finally withdrew his earlier hasty appraisal of the Republic by ad- 

mitting at Pangkal Pinang in October 1946: 

 

“Our knowledge of the happenings and conditions in the occupied ter- 

ritory of Indonesia was deficient and incomplete during the war This 

 

was particularly true in respect to Java and Sumatra. Misled by outward 

appearances … we originally reported the Republic too much as a 

Japanese invention, and when in October and November the movement 

developed with the speed of tropical growth into a sort of popular revolt 

comparable to the September days of 1792 in the French Revolution, it 

was difficult to gauge properly the inherent lasting power of this 

phenomenon. When we look back into history, it is apparent that in the 

Republic forces were at work which signified more and were rooted 

deeper than a mere surge of terrorism. …” 

 

Once the Republic had been established, the internal issue of 

collaboration was dead. All of the nationalists, whatever the dictates 

of conscience had led them to do during the occupation, were solidly 

united behind the Republic and its watchword Merdeka! (Freedom). 

 

 

 

CHAPTER TWO 

 

 

 

THE BRITISH OCCUPATION 

 

 

 

One of the most controversial vignettes in the whole 

controversial picture of post V-J Day Indonesia has been the activity 

and policy of the British re-occupation forces during the fourteen 

months of their military controlbetween September 1945 and 

November 30, 1946. 

 

Criticism and invective heaped upon the British for their role in 

the Indies have been abundant, violent, bitter, and often contra- 

dictory. On the one hand, the British were excoriated for being the 

protectors and restorers of imperialism, for ruthlessly helping to re- 

press the awakening people of Indonesia, for ‘ ’setting the clock 

back” in Southeast Asia, and for violating the spirit of both the 

Atlantic and the United Nations Charters. 

 

On the other hand, the British were criticized by the Dutch for 

impeding rehabilitation in the Indies in order to secure competitive 

economic advantages for British Malaya, for bolstering and dealing 

with an illegal, Japanese-inspired extremist revolution at its incep- 

tion, and for flagrantly violating even the minimum obligations of a 

faithful ally. 

 

November 30, 1946, was the day set for the official departure of 

the last British occupation forces and for the end of the Allied Forces 

Headquarters in the Netherlands East Indies (A.F.N.E.I.). It is inter- 

esting to note that after official thanks had been formally accorded 

the British forces by the Dutch Governor General, Dr. van Mook, 

and the Indonesian Prime Minister, Mr. Sjahrir, on the morning of 

November 30, both the Dutch and the Indonesian daily newspapers 

in Batavia, the Dagblad and Merdeka> carried long and violently 

bitter editorials criticizing the British occupation record. Paradoxi- 

cally, they both had a modicum of fact on which to base their 

opinions. 

 

During most of the Pacific war, Sumatra and its dependencies 

were included in the Southeast Asia Command under Admiral 

 

15 

 

 

 

l6 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

Mountbatten; the remainder of the Netherlands East Indies had 

been placed under General MacArthur’s Pacific theater of operation. 

By decision of the combined Anglo-American Chiefs-of-Staff at the 

Potsdam Conference in July 1945, military jurisdiction of the whole 

Southwest Pacific below the Philippines was transferred to S.E.A.C. 

 

It is true, this transfer took place despite the fact that the United 

States had already made preparations for specialized operations in 

the Indies at its Malay and Dutch language schools at Stanford and 

Yale Universities, and in its Military Government Schools at Vir- 

ginia, Harvard, and Columbia. It is also true that this transfer was 

made despite strenuous objections by the Dutch. 1 

 

Nevertheless, at the time the transfer was made, the war was ex- 

pected to last another year rather than another month, as turned 

out to be the case. Despite later allegations to the contrary, it appears 

certain that military and not political considerations supplied the 

main motivations for the transfer of authority. Military considera- 

tions may well have been reinforced by political factors, since, on 

the one hand, the British had a particular interest in the archipelago 

because of its strategic political and economic proximity to Malaya, 

and since, on the other hand, the United States was not anxious to 

undertake any re-occupation operations on behalf of colonial powers. 

 

The suddenness of the Japanese capitulation found S.E.A.C. un- 

prepared to fulfill its expanded commitments immediately, and what 

turned out to be a highly critical delay in the re-occupation ensued. 

It was not until September 15 that the first Allied Mission of about 

fifty people, as well as Mountbatten’s personal representative, Rear 

Admiral Patterson, arrived in Batavia on board H.M.S. Cumber- 

land. And it was not until September 29 that the first battalion of 

British troops, the Seaforth Highlanders, landed in Batavia more 

than six weeks after the Japanese surrender. 

 

During the six weeks hiatus between the Declaration of Independ- 

ence by Soekarno and Hatta and the landing of the first small British 

forces, the Indonesian nationalists consolidated rapidly and worked 

strenuously to set up a functioning “government.” All shades of na- 

tionaliststhe former cooperatives and non-cooperatives, moderates 

and extremists, collaborationists and non-collaborationistsunited 

 

*At the Pangkal Pinang Conference in early October 1946, Dr. van Mook stated 

that- “Notwithstanding great objections on our part, the Allied Supreme Command in 

this area was transferred from the Americans, who had for years been preparing them- 

selves for their task in this part of the world, to the British whose operational field 

up to that time had been much more limited. . . .” 

 

 

 

THE BRITISH OCCUPATION *7 

 

in the common effort. Six weeks was not a long time, but the na- 

tionalists were bent on making the most of it. 

 

After the Declaration of Independence had been issued by Soe- 

karno and Hatta on August 17 in the name of “the whole Indo- 

nesian People,” the Preparatory Commission, which had been set up 

in April 1944, met from August 18 to August 29 and acted swiftly. 

Soekarno and Hatta were elected by the Commission as the first 

President and Vice-President of the Republic. The Constitution 

which had been drafted during the last month of the war was 

adopted. The original document was hastily prepared and not always 

thorough or detailed; nevertheless it clearly showed the influence of 

the American Constitution that had been used as its model. It pro- 

vided inter alia for a President and Vice-President exercising strong 

executive control and command of all armed forces, a Congress and 

a Council of Representatives to exercise the legislative function, and 

a Supreme Court vested with the judicial power. 

 

Under the emergency conditions and pending the election of the 

People’s Congress and the Council of Representatives, the Prepara- 

tory Commission, guided predominantly by Hatta, decided that the 

President and Vice-President would exercise all governing powers 

with the advice and consent of a new Central National Indonesian 

Committee (Komite National Indonesia Poesat K.N.I.P.). The 

Preparatory Commission hastily set up an administrative blueprint 

for the republican areas of West, Central and East Java, Sumatra, 

Borneo, Celebes, the Moluccas and the Lesser Soendas. This blue- 

print roughly restored the former Dutch administrative system with 

a governor for each province, with residencies, and with semi- 

autonomous sultanates within the provinces. Provision was made for 

a cabinet of twelve ministers, 2 all responsible to the President, ac- 

cording to the American system. The Preparatory Commission 

finally called for the formation of a National Army under the Presi- 

dent, from the various armed auxiliaries and “People’s Armies’* 

(Laskar Rajaf). On August 29 the Preparatory Commission went 

out of existence. The new K.N.LP. was chosen by Soekarno and 

Hatta with a broadened base. It consisted of one hundred and 

twenty of the outstanding national leaders and included all shades 

of nationalist opinion. Republican headquarters were set up in 

 

2 The portfolios in the Cabinet consisted of Home Affairs, Foreign Affairs, Justice, 

Finance, Economic Affairs, Health, Education and Culture, Social Affairs, Defense, 

Information, Communications, and Public Works. 

 

 

 

l8 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

Batavia-now called by the Indonesian name “Djakarta.” Shortly 

thereafter, Soetan Sjahrir, the leader of the Indonesian intellectuals, 

was made chairman of the Working Committee of the K.N.LP. 

 

In quick succession the following steps were taken: Djakarta was 

proclaimed the Republican capital; regional governors for the eight 

provinces were selected; Soekarno chose his Cabinet; 3 the Sultanates 

of Djokjakarta, Soerakarta, Mangkoenegaran, and Pakoealaman an- 

nounced their support of the Republic; and the Japanese Hei-Ho 

was disbanded. 

 

When the first British troops landed in Batavia on September 29, 

1945, the Republic was a going, if still untested, organization. Al- 

most all buildings flew the red-and-white Merdeka flag. Government 

buildings were conspicuously labeled Kementerian Kasehatan 

(Ministry of Health), Kementerian Oeroesan Dalam Negeri (Minis- 

try of Home Affairs), Kementerian Loear Negeri (Ministry of For- 

eign Affairs), and so on. Posters in English, quoting from the Ameri- 

can Declaration of Independence (since American re-occupation 

forces had been anticipated by the Indonesians) and from Lincoln’s 

Gettysburg address, were in evidence. Indonesian civil police, armed 

with Japanese equipment, made their regular rounds through the 

streets of Batavia. Despite the run-down appearance of the capital 

with its olive-drab coated buildings and pit-holed streets, the city 

was orderly and peaceful. The situation was quiet but confusing, 

and the natural reaction to this unexpected state of affairs on the 

part of the handful of British troops who first arrived was one of 

bewilderment. 

 

THE BRITISH DILEMMA 

 

The British forces came to the Indies with two main objectives, 

purely military in character. The first was to accept the surrender, 

to disarm, and to repatriate the 283,000 Japanese troops concen- 

trated in Java and Sumatra, but scattered also over the Celebes, the 

Moluccas and Borneo. The second was the liberation and protection 

of over 200,000 Dutch and Allied prisoners of war and internees, the 

so-called A.P.W.L That these aims could be attained without affect- 

ing the political situation, and that British military commitments 

could be fulfilled without touching on the thorny problems of 

colonialism and imperialism among a sensitive people and in a sensi- 

tive world, was a fantasy to start with. 

 

3 Including Sjarifoeddin as Minister of Information, Soebardjo as Minister of Foreign 

Affairs, and Dewantara as Minister of Education* 

 

 

 

THE BRITISH OCCUPATION 1Q 

 

The presence of a functioning and self-conscious “Republic” 

could not be disregarded, and the necessity for some kind of attitude 

however vacillating or indefinite or “unpolitical” toward the Re- 

public could not but provoke antagonism on one side or the other. 

A simple restoration of the legal pre-war Dutch colonialism would 

certainly have meant not only serious trouble from the nationalists 

but also harsh criticism from a sensitized world press, which Britain, 

already under fire in the United Nations and in the press for her 

role in the Middle East and in India, could ill afford. 

 

On the other hand, support of the as yet unrecognized Republic 

and cooperation with it would certainly alienate the Dutch and 

might provoke Holland’s opposition to Britain in the United Na- 

tions Security Council, where Britain was in great need of friends. 4 

The British met the dilemma by a policy which at least temporarily 

had the effect of antagonizing both sides. 

 

With the meager forces 5 of British and British Indian troops 

available for the execution of the tasks of re-occupation, it was felt 

that extensive operations would not be feasible. The decision was 

therefore made to establish secure bases at eight key points in Java 

and Sumatra, and later on two or three in the Outer Islands, and to 

use these bases as bridgeheads from which to tackle the tasks of dis- 

armament and internment of the Japanese and relief of the A.P.W.I. 

 

Realizing the magnitude of his task and the insufficiency of his 

forces, the commanding officer of the Allied Forces in the Nether- 

lands East Indies (A.F.N.E.I.), Lieutenant General Sir P. A. Christi- 

son, issued a proclamation immediately upon his arrival in Batavia 

at the beginning of October to the effect that he “intended to re- 

quest the present party leaders to support him in the exercise of his 

task,” and that since only limited operations could be undertaken by 

his forces “the present Indonesian authorities [would remain] re- 

sponsible for the government in the areas under their control.” 

 

From the point of view of the Dutch, both pronouncements were 

highly and understandably objectionable because of the implied 

recognition which they accorded to the “party leaders” and the 

“Indonesian authorities,” whom van Mook’s Government did not 

wish to have countenanced, officially or unofficially. When Dr. van 

der Plas the former Dutch Governor of East Java, and the first of- 

ficial representative of the Netherlands Indies Government to return 

 

4 Holland held one of the six elected seats on the Council at the time. 

 

5 It was not until October 31 that the equivalent strength of a full British division 

was in Java. 

 

 

 

2O THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

to Javaoffered to conduct preliminary discussions with some of the 

Indonesian leaders including Soekarno, he too incurred the severest 

criticism from his government in Australia. 

 

The Indonesian authorities regarded this initial British attitude 

with cautious and reserved approval. They cooperated to the extent 

of continuing to run the civil administration, the telephone, power, 

and trolley services and of maintaining civil law and order. 

 

In accordance with the British tactics of setting up key bases for 

the further execution of their assigned objectives, Batavia was occu- 

pied first, on the 29th of September, 1945, Bandoeng by a small force 

on about October 10, Semarang on October 17, Soerabaja on Oc- 

tober 25, and Medan, Palembang and Padang in Sumatra somewhat 

later. At first little resistance was encountered by the small British 

forces, and the Republican authorities remained cautiously coopera- 

tive. In Soerabaja, a local branch of the Laskar Rajat or People’s 

Army furnished some opposition, but actually this was only slight. 

When trouble came afterwards, it was largely the result of a dispute 

over the return of Dutch troops to the Islands. 

 

Some Dutch and Ambonese troops that had been interned as 

P.O.W/s during the war were soon released and attached to the Dutch 

echelon at A.F.N.E.L under the command of the stern old Dutch 

General van Oyen, who had arrived from Australia on October 3. 

The Indonesian authorities, led by Soekarno and Hatta, were de- 

termined, however, that no new Dutch troops should be allowed to 

land until recognition of the Republic had been granted. This atti- 

tude resulted from a deep-seated distrust and suspicion of the inten- 

tions of returning Dutch armed forces, and of the returning Dutch 

civil administration whether technically under Allied command or 

not. This same distrust and suspicion was, in fact, reciprocated by 

the Dutch, and was the cause of much of the unpleasant relations 

between the Dutch and the Indonesians during the negotiations of 

the next two years. Mutual hatred, despite early reports, was rela- 

tively scarce, but suspicion and distrust were widespread. 

 

In the early part of October 1945, two small companies of volun- 

teer combat troops from Holland arrived in the Indies, and shortly 

after were followed by the disliked Netherlands Indies Civil Ad- 

ministration (or N.I.C.A.), which returned to the Indies from 

Australia. Their return occurred over the heated protest of the na- 

tionalists, who claimed as the minimum price for their continued 

cooperation with the Allied re-occupation that no additional Dutch 

armed forces or civil administration personnel be allowed to land 

 

 

 

THE BRITISH OCCUPATION 21 

 

on Indonesian soil until the Republic’s status had been clarified. 

 

As an ally of the Netherlands, the British could not, even if they 

had wanted to, give this guarantee. Only the fact that Holland- 

weakened by five years of German occupationwas in no position 

economically or militarily to undertake the re-occupation herself as 

the de jure pre-war sovereign in the Indies, was responsible for the 

assignment of this difficult task to the British and British Indian 

troops. When Soekarno and Hatta renewed their protests to the 

British and reiterated their demand for this minimum guarantee, 

their request was, and under the circumstances had to be, turned 

down. Although in fact no large numbers of Dutch combat troops 

really landed in the Indies until March 1946, no guarantee could be 

given to the Indonesians that their demand would be satisfied. Thus, 

the Indonesians’ worst fears and suspicions began to crystallize, and 

after public protest to the Dutch and renewed private demands to 

the British and to the American Strategic Services Unit in Batavia, 

they began to feel that action must be taken. 

 

Soekarno and Hatta adopted a more and more militant attitude 

and, in early November, convinced that nothing further could be 

accomplished by verbal requests for the guarantee they wished, 

moved to Djokjakarta and thereby gave the go-ahead signal for the 

unbridled terror which was to ensue in the next two months. At any 

rate, not only the Tentara Republik Indonesia (Republican Army), 

but the more irresponsible Japanese-trained People’s Armies 

(Laskar Rajat), Banteng or Buffalo societies, and Pemoedas (youth 

groups) saw in this move the green light to proceed in disorder and 

bloodshed. 

 

These groups had to a large extent been trained by the Japanese 

and in many cases had “accepted” the surrender of the Japanese 

troops in the absence of Allied forces in the interior. There is a typi- 

cal, if apocryphal, story of a British major who went to accept the 

surrender of a Japanese battalion commander and his battalion near 

Soerabaja before a large crowd of Indonesians who ostensibly had 

come to watch the ceremony. The battalion was arrayed in full battle 

regalia and stood prepared for inspection. The battalion commander 

advanced to present his Samurai sword to the British major. As he 

did so, his men laid down their arms and advanced to turn them- 

selves over to the British major. The crowd thereupon moved for- 

ward, picked up the arms from the ground and quietly dispersed. 

 

Whether the story is true or not, it indicates that British weakness 

after arrival, as well as delay in arriving, made it possible for various 

 

 

 

2S> THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

groups, irresponsible as well as responsible, to acquire large stocks 

of munitions and arms from the Japanese. When the blow-up came, 

and the restraining lid of the responsible authorities was removed, 

these groups had the weapons to cause the violence which ensued. 

Once let loose, it took the “Republic” over a year to get this ill- 

assorted group of fighting forces fairly well under control. The go- 

ahead signal was much easier for the Republic to give than the stop 

signal, but even the majority of the moderate nationalists, who later 

mourned the bloodshed of November and December, then felt that 

lawless action was preferable to no action at all. Bloodshed cannot 

be condoned, it is true, but if there had been no blow-up, Indonesia 

might never have attracted the publicity and world interest which 

were to play so important a part in restraining future action against 

the new republic. The importance of a show of force in the anatomy 

of successful revolution cannot be underestimated, even if the force 

itself is abusive and ruthless. 

 

The powder keg, which was finally to explode in Soerabaja, began 

to smoke in Batavia at the end of October. Streets were unsafe after 

dark, and people were kidnapped if they ventured out after curfew 

at nine o’clock. The kalis or canals stank with the smell of putrefy- 

ing flesh, and part of the newly-released civilian population had to 

be returned to wartime internment camps for their own protection. 

The same situation prevailed in Soerabaja, but unlike Batavia, 

where there were at least troops enough to insure reasonable protec- 

tion against a wholesale terror, in Soerabaja the disorder grew worse. 

Finally, on November 4, Brigadier Mallaby, the British commander 

who had been negotiating with the local Indonesian authorities, was 

shot and killed at point-blank range as he drove in his car through 

the streets of the town. At the time, not enough troops were avail- 

able for the British to take retaliatory action, but on November 9, 

Mallaby’s successor, General Mansergh, issued an ultimatum to the 

Indonesians to surrender their arms to the British, or offensive ac- 

tion would be taken against them to establish law and order. 

 

Such action began the.next day, after it had become obvious that 

the ultimatum would not be heeded by the irregular armed bands 

that were responsible for the terror. For ten days the Pemberon- 

takan, one of the strongest Laskar, held out against the British, led 

by their fanatical firebrand Soetomo, and spurred on by the local 

broadcasts of an ex-Scottish ex-American woman named variously 

Manx, Tantri, and “Soerabaja Sue.” When the smoke cleared, it was 

found that several hundred British and Indian troops and several 

 

 

 

THE BRITISH OCCUPATION 23 

 

thousand of the irregular Pemberontakan adherents had been killed, 

and more than 2,000 civilians had been kidnapped from the streets 

or their homes, never to be heard from again. 

 

In Bandoeng a similar sequence of events took place. Houses were 

burned and looted, and one section of the town was completely razed. 

More than 850 civilians were reported kidnapped and killed in this 

city, in addition to the small British losses and the large losses which 

the Indonesian bands sustained between November 1 and the end of 

December. Batavia actually suffered less because of the larger con- 

centration of British troops there, but nevertheless civilian casual- 

ties alone here were over 200 during November and December, 

1945.* 

 

Under these unexpected and critical conditions, the British were 

forced into the unfortunate position of having to use Japanese 

troops against the Indonesian extremists in an effort to maintain law 

and order. A world-wide storm of protest followed this ironic turn of 

events. 

 

The British continued their efforts to bring order to the eight 

Allied bridgeheads but decided that action should end at the demar- 

cation lines of these bridgeheads because of the additional trouble 

which further penetration might cause. British headquarters issued 

a restrictive order forbidding any offensive action by Allied troops, 

and instructing them to fire only when fired upon. This order 

proved to be a constant thorn in the Dutch side, particularly as the 

Dutch forces grew stronger and felt themselves able to undertake 

action in the interior. As the military forces under the new Dutch 

commander, General S. H. Spoor, were reinforced by the arrival 

of fresh troops from Europe in March 1946, increasing pressure was 

exerted first on the British commander and then on the Nether- 

lands Indies Government itself which was negotiating with the In- 

donesiansfor permission to take offensive action against the Re- 

publican Army (T.R.I.) and the irregular nationalist forces. Later 

this pressure was to break through the surface on several occasions, 

provoking “incidents” and further complicating the difficult tasks of 

the van Mook government. 

 

Gradually, with the beginning of 1946, the situation grew quieter. 

On February 10, after a trip to Holland, the Lieutenant Governor 

General began new discussions with the Indonesian delegation, 

headed by the Republican Prime Minister, Sjahrir, with whom the 

Dutch agreed to negotiate though they still maintained that Soe- 

 

Figures from Dutch Army Information Service, Batavia, 1947. 

 

 

 

24 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

karno and Hatta were unacceptable. The British sent their top 

career diplomat, Sir Archibald Clark-Kerr-now Lord Inverchapel- 

to Batavia to facilitate the formal negotiations, and with their com- 

mencement, the situation took a definite turn for the better. 

 

The military situation was stabilized, and as more and more 

Dutch troops arrived from Europe the British made plans for with- 

drawal. While General Mansergh, the new British Commander-in- 

Chief, retained supreme command, increasing civil authority was 

delegated to the Netherlands Indies Civil Administration, now re- 

named the Allied Military Administration Civil Affairs Branch, or 

A.M.A.C.A.B. 

 

THE BRITISH WITHDRAWAL 

 

According to the Civil Administration Agreement of August 28, 

1945, between the British and Dutch Governments, the Supreme 

Allied Commander of the re-occupying forces was empowered to 

exercise final local authority over all branches of the Netherlands 

Indies Government in matters of a military nature. In purely civil 

matters the Dutch Lieutenant Governor General remained the top 

authority, but his actions were required to conform to military or- 

ders. Furthermore, it was up to the British Commander-in-Chief, as 

the military situation warranted, “to notify the Governor Gen- 

eral of the extent to which responsibility for the civil administration 

could be resumed by the Netherlands Indies Government”; and as 

the military situation within the Allied bridgeheads and on the 

Outer Islands became quieter, the Dutch Civil Administration was 

authorized to increase the scope of its operations, though ultimately 

remaining subject to the orders of the Commander-in-Chief of 

A.F.N.E.L On November 30, 1946, the last British troops left 

Batavia, AJF.N.EJ. was officially disbanded, and military as well as 

plenary civil control reverted to Dutch hands, 

 

By this date, the tasks for which the British had come to the archi- 

pelago were largely completed. Almost all of the more than 280,000 

Japanese had been returned to Japan or were on their way home. Of 

the 200,000 internees and prisoners-of-war whom the Allied forces 

had come to release, less than 2,000 had not yet been evacuated from 

the interior of Java, and most of these were post-V-J Day Eurasian 

internees whom the Republic had interned for their own protection 

against extremist action. Their evacuation was well on the way to 

completion by November 30. 

 

One month before the British withdrawal, a truce had been con- 

 

 

 

THE BRITISH OCCUPATION 25 

 

eluded between the Dutch and British on the one hand and the 

Indonesians on the other. Demarcation lines had been set up around 

the bridgeheads, which now became the Dutch strongholds as they 

had been the British. Beyond these lines, neither side was to operate 

offensively though in practice these restrictions were violated by 

both sides. The Indonesians had agreed to the landing of additional 

Dutch troops up to the total of Dutch and British troops that had 

been in the archipelago when the truce was concluded on October 

15. Fresh British-trained Dutch troops arrived and continued to ar- 

rive until this 92,000 joint total was reached, to replace the departed 

and departing British, and the British turned over their surplus war 

stock to the Dutch replacements. 

 

This, in brief, was the military picture which the British left be- 

hind on November 30, 1946. They left behind also a fundamentally 

altered political situation: specifically, a draft agreement between 

the Dutch and the Indonesians which recognized the de facto au- 

thority of the Republic over Java, Sumatra and Madura, and which 

laid the foundation for a federalized United States of Indonesia. 

Finally, the British left behind a residue of bad feeling toward 

themselves on the part of the Indonesians and, in an extreme form, 

on the part of the Dutch. The Indonesian attitude was not deep but 

understandable since, whatever their motives, sympathies and ide- 

ology, the British had made possible and had actually brought about 

the return of the Dutch, 

 

The Dutch resentment was deeper and, surprisingly enough, con- 

siderably more malevolent. Superficially, of course, there was the 

ordinary friction which might have been expected from the proud 

and independent Dutch finding themselves placed under British 

military control, particularly after the long internment so many of 

them had undergone. It was natural, also, that the newly-released 

Dutch should react when they saw British forces taking the best of 

their pre-war houses, furniture, and automobiles for military pur- 

poses. There was nothing unusual in all this. The same attitude had 

been encountered by United States forces in the liberation of Italy, 

France, and the Netherlands. 

 

The source of the Dutch grievance, however, was much deeper 

and more unique. Between August 17, 1945, and November 30, 

1946, a revolutionary Japanese-inspired rebellion had, from the 

Dutch point of view, been given a spurious respectability and in- 

direct recognition. This rebellion had become a “government,” the 

“Republic of Indonesia,” whose de facto authority had been tenta- 

 

 

 

26 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

tively recognized by the Netherlands Indies Government at Ling- 

gadjati on November 15. From the Dutch point of view, the illegal 

uprising was now a quasi-legal government with a history of col- 

laboration behind it, and with at least an implied promise for the 

future which made impossible a return to the pre-war way of living 

for the Dutch; a government which actually ran and continued to run 

the civil police, telephone, and power systems in the Dutch bridge- 

heads of Java and Sumatra; a government which was conducting one 

of the largest “smuggling” trades in history from Sumatra; a govern- 

ment which had concluded an agreement as an equal party with the 

Government of India to ship rice to India in exchange for textiles 

and other “incentive” goods; a government which had possession of 

the richest producing areas of the Indies; a government, in short, 

which made a return to the pre-war pattern of trade temporarily im- 

possible. 

 

After four years spent in harsh internment, many of the Dutch had 

longed for a return to pre-war ease and normalcy. As they looked 

around them on November 30, even the most bitter among them had 

begun to realize that the Republic could now neither be talked nor 

wished nor propagandized out of existence. Their natural disap- 

pointment and bitterness were vented against the British whom they 

held responsible for the fourteen months which had solidified the 

Republican position and had sealed the fate of the “good old days.” 

Frustration and chagrin over the unexpected turn of events required 

a scapegoat, and the British filled the bill. 

 

For, whatever the merits of the Republic and of Merdeka^ it had 

been the six weeks of British delay in coming to Java that had 

given the Republic time to organize, and it was the weakness of the 

British forces that enabled the Japanese to turn over their equip- 

ment to nationalist groups, and for Japanese to help put organiza- 

tional finishing touches on the new Indonesian army. The British 

had, in many cases, dealt with the Indonesian leaders as equals, and 

this particularly grated on the colonial Dutch mind. They some- 

times addressed Indonesian officials as “your excellency,” as General 

Hawthorne allegedly called the Indonesian mayor of Bandoeng at 

their first meeting. In Dutch eyes, the British had restrained their 

troops and the Dutch troops from taking offensive action against 

harassing Indonesian forces. They had sent several unofficial parties 

to Soerakarta and to Djokjakarta in the early days for talks with 

Soekarno and other Indonesian leaders, and they had placed a plane 

at the disposal of the Republic for official flights to and from Djokja 

 

 

 

THE BRITISH OCCUPATION 2? 

 

and Batavia. From the Dutch point of view, these actions were viola- 

tions of the legal Dutch authority, and the duplicity was attributed 

variously to imperialistic British designs on Sumatra, to the British 

desire to retard rehabilitation in the Indies until it had been com- 

pleted in Malaya in order to secure competitive advantages in world 

markets for such products as rubber, tin, spices and gums which the 

two areas produced in common, and to British plans for a puppet 

Indonesian government under British hegemony. 

 

That there is some basis, coincidental or not, for this antipathy, 

is possible. That British instigation could, to any considerable ex- 

tent, have been responsible for the nationalistic opposition encoun- 

tered by the Dutch, is well-nigh impossible. An active nationalist 

movement in the Indies had been much in evidence since its founda- 

tion in 1908, and the Dutch had been obliged periodically to repress 

nationalist outbreaks by force in the nineteen-twenties and ‘thirties. 

The Indies had, in many respects, been an admirably and efficiently- 

run colony. Production had been high, and living conditions, for the 

population as a whole, had been relatively good compared with those 

in other colonial areas in Asia. But there had been no democracy or 

official encouragement of nationalist aspirations whatever, under the 

Dutch colonial rule; political discontent and resentment among edu- 

cated Indonesians had been rife. 

 

Furthermore, there is the fact that, whatever their intentions be- 

hind .the scenes, the British trained over 10,000 Dutch officers and 

men in 1946, and supplied arms for the outfitting of 62,000 Dutch 

troops before leaving the Indies in November. The backbone of 

Dutch military strength in the Indies still is, in fact, British-trained 

and British-equipped. 

 

Whether the situation would have turned out differently had 

American troops come to Java is open to conjecture. That there 

would have been certain differences in procedure is obvious. The 

Americans would, first of all, have come in sufficient strength and 

number to accept the surrender of the Japanese and much of their 

equipment, to round up and intern them, and to make the use of 

Japanese troops against the Indonesians unnecessary. The Ameri- 

cans would possibly have released and evacuated the Allied prisoners 

of war and internees more rapidly than did the British. But even 

after these measures had been taken, it still is certain that the na- 

tionalist problem would have arisen; that the nationalist core would 

have been strong and effective; that sufficient military equipment 

would still have been available for the Indonesians to maintain an 

 

 

 

?8 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

army; that the Americans would have been at least as unwilling as 

the British to conduct extended military operations against the In- 

donesians; that the American troops might have been considerably 

more partisan on ideological grounds than were the British, and 

that they might have been especially unfriendly to any token mani- 

festation of Dutch military might. 

 

At least the conclusion seems warranted that the United States 

was temporarily saved from a severe headache, from much criticism 

and sharp animosity by the decision of Potsdam to delegate the re- 

occupation tasks in the Indies to S.E.A.C. and not to MacArthur. 

The British were faced with a particularly difficult and explosive set 

of problems in the re-occupation of Indonesia, but even their best 

and sincerest attempts to solve these problems received neither the 

thanks nor the credit they were due. It is not likely that the United 

States would have been more successful under the circumstances. 

 

 

 

CHAPTER THREE 

 

 

 

PROPOSALS, COUNTERPROPOSALS 

AND THE LINGGADJATI AGREEMENT 

 

 

 

On March 25, 1947, at the Rijswljk Palace In Batavia in front 

of a larger-than-life portrait of Queen Wilhelmina, the Dutch Com- 

mission-General and the Indonesian Delegation signed the Ling- 

gadjati Agreement after sixteen months of official and unofficial 

negotiating sixteen months crammed with statesmanship, persever- 

ance, restraint and also pettiness, stubbornness, provocation and bun- 

gling on both sides. Sporadically broken off when agreement seemed 

impossible or when consultations with the Hague or Djokjakarta be- 

came necessary, the negotiations were dominated by the will and 

stature of two men, Sjahrir and van Mook. Their convictions in the 

face of harsh criticism and their self-control when extremist pres- 

sures were exerted upon them from their respective camps were 

largely responsible for preventing a complete breakdown as long as 

they .did, and for the slow if not always steady improvement in rela- 

tions between the Republic and the Dutch Government. 

 

Over all the negotiations hung the specter of mutual distrust and 

suspicion. This proved the most powerful obstacle in the way of a 

successful meeting of minds, again and again preventing a full 

fruition of the work of van Mook and Sjahrir. Van Mook was the 

target of attack from both the Indonesian and Dutch press; Sjahrir 

had spent eight years in Dutch prisons; yet both kept their heads and 

continued resolutely with their painfully slow task. Conflict of many 

luminaries and personalities characterized the sixteen months of 

heated negotiations: Sir Archibald Clark-Kerr and Lord Killearn, on 

the British side; Willem Schermerhorn, and the dignified, conscien- 

tious Feike de Boer of the Dutch Commission-General; the strong, 

intense Amir Sjarifoeddin and the colorful, photogenic enfant ter- 

rible of the Indonesian Delegation, Dr. A. K. Gam, on the Republi- 

can side. These forceful personalities, and others as well, contributed 

their share to the evolution of events. Nevertheless, Sjahrir and van 

 

29 

 

 

 

go THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

Mook dominated the discussions; their hardheaded realism and fore- 

sight were largely responsible for such progress as was made, until 

the signing of Linggadjati. 

 

Van Mook, criticized bitterly by right-wing groups in the Nether- 

landsincluding the former Prime Minister Pieter Gerbrandy for 

being a traitor and a weakling, exercised the careful, plodding, de- 

pendable statesmanship without which a permanent alienation of 

the Republic would have materialized immediately. A keen if not 

brilliant negotiator, van Mook headed the body by Dutch liberal 

opinion which favored protection of Dutch economic interests at the 

price of political compromise. The Linggadjati Agreement was an 

epitome of this viewpoint. When, under the influence of pressures 

which will be examined later, Dr. van Mook’s views underwent a 

substantial alteration, the hostilities of July 21, 1947, resulted. 

 

On the other side, Sjahrir was responsible for holding back ex- 

tremists who sought to turn Soekarno’s policy away from compromise 

with the Dutch. Sjahrir is probably one of the most reasonable, un- 

assuming and moderate revolutionaries who ever lived; he demon- 

strated that unusual combination of tenacity of purpose and willing- 

ness to compromise which characterizes true statesmanship, and 

which was so instrumental in the framing of the final agreement; 

a combination which is all the more remarkable in a man so young 

(thirty-eight years), the major part of whose political career, from 

1934 to 1942, had been spent in exile in Tjipinang, Java, Boven 

Digoel, New Guinea, and Banda Neira. 

 

OFFICIAL DUTCH POLICY 

 

In November 1945, the cornerstone of the returning Dutch Gov- 

ernment’s policy was a speech made by Queen Wilhelmina on De- 

cember 6, 1942, outlining the future concessions which the Crown 

was prepared to make in its colonial policy. As with most broad 

policy statements, the Queen’s speech was properly generalized and 

open to diverse interpretation. It was the task of the returning Dutch 

Government to adapt this policy to prevailing circumstances in such 

a way as to secure the greatest possible protection of Dutch interests 

in the Indies. Since the colonial government had not had sufficient 

information concerning these circumstances, and particularly con- 

cerning the character and strength of the new Republic of Indonesia, 

it had to work out this adaptation gradually. Temporarily, therefore, 

pending test and scrutiny of the new forces, the Dutch stuck closely 

to the letter of the Queen’s speech and refused to make any specific 

 

 

 

THE LINGGADJATI AGREEMENT 31 

 

or new commitments. Much ill-feeling and animosity could have 

been avoided if the van Mook government had from the start pos- 

sessed the knowledge, capacity and resiliency to supplement the 

letter of the Queen’s speech with a more friendly attitude toward 

the budding, if not perfected, Republic. 

 

The official Dutch policy had no place for, and took no account of, 

the revolutionary Republic. This, indeed, was at first simply dis- 

missed and discredited as a temporary and weak Japanese-inspired 

movement which would collapse as soon as its collaborationist 

leaders were arrested. When Dr. van der Plas, the first representative 

of the Netherlands Indies Government to return to Indonesia, went 

as far as to suggest that Soekarno be invited to submit his sugges- 

tions for the reconstruction of the Indies, he was reprimanded by his 

own government. Even van Mook’s meeting with Soekarno in 

Batavia in early November was described by the Hague as taking 

place “against the expressed wish of the Netherlands Government 

and against its instructions.” Dutch policy as laid down by the 

Queen did not appear to have any room for a revolutionary regime 

in Indonesia, whose sponsorship and strength did not derive from 

Dutch-approved sources. 

 

In brief, the policy outlined by the Queen reaffirmed the Nether- 

lands Government-in-exile statement of January 27, 1942, which 

called for a Round Table Conference of the Kingdom consisting of 

representatives of the Indies, Surinam, and Curasao, as well as the 

Netherlands, “to discuss collectively a project for the reconstruction 

of the Kingdom and its constituents along lines suitable to the 

changed circumstances.” The Queen in December of the same year 

supplemented this by stating that the Kingdom should be recon- 

structed on the basis of a complete and equal partnership among the 

constituents, and that the Round Table Conference “will direct its 

efforts towards the creation of a State Union (Rijksverband) in 

which the Netherlands, the Indies, Surinam and Curasao will be 

equal partners” while retaining the right of self-government on 

purely domestic matters. 

 

On November 6, 1945, the Netherlands Indies Government re- 

iterated this policy by direct quotation from the Queen’s speech. In 

addition, the Government recognized the legal, nationalistic aspira- 

tions of the Indonesians (not of the Republic, however), but indi- 

cated clearly that the Netherlands Government considered itself re- 

sponsible for directing the development of Indonesia up to the time 

when it would be able to stand as an equal partner with the other 

 

 

 

g2 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

three components of the reconstructed Kingdom. Also, the Dutch 

statement promised a democratic representative body to consist 

predominantly of Indonesians, an expansion of educational facil- 

ities, a recognition of the Indonesian language as the official lan- 

guage along with Dutch, and abolition of social and racial discrimi- 

nation. This program promised broad revisions in colonial policy, 

which, by 1939 standards, were themselves revolutionary in charac- 

ter. 

 

Before the war, and after the revision of the Netherlands Consti- 

tution of 1922, the Kingdom had been described as being composed 

of four constituent parts the Netherlands, the Netherlands Indies, 

Surinam and Curasao, It was not, however, at that time stated or pre- 

sumed that these parts were on an equal footing. The Crown re- 

tained the right to suspend all ordinances enacted by the Nether- 

lands Indies Government. Secondary and final control of the Indies 

budget, as well as the right to legislate on subjects affecting thfc in- 

ternal affairs of the Indies, were retained by the States-General in 

the Netherlands. Until the Japanese oil negotiations in 1940-41, 

which van Mook handled from Batavia in his capacity as Lt. Gover- 

nor General, all foreign relations of the Indies were managed from 

the Hague. The Volksraad or Parliament of the Indies was, more- 

over, a quasi-legislative body, partly elective and partly appointive 

in composition, which could only initiate certain kinds of legislation 

and which was, in any case, subject to the Governor General’s veto. 

Political liberties had been strictly defined by a rigid code, and sec- 

ondary and higher education had been limited. 

 

There had, then, been no political democracy in the Indies before 

the war. High-placed liberals in the Netherlands Foreign Office have 

readily admitted this fact. The Government’s new policy of Novem- 

ber 6, 1945, thus was a marked and progressive divergence from pre- 

war policy, even though it carried no mention or acknowledgment 

of the Indonesian Republic. 

 

The zealous, self-conscious republican leaders had certain con- 

ceptions which were basically at variance with the Dutch policy 

statement of November 6. Primarily, they favored the development 

of Indonesia under the Republic rather than under the aegis and re- 

sponsibility of the Dutch, as projected by the November 6 statement. 

In addition to this difference, and to the further estrangement oc- 

casioned by four years of Japanese occupation and the stimulating, 

sometimes belligerent new feeling of dignity with which the na- 

tionalists felt themselves endowed, there was the belief, strong and 

 

 

 

THE LINGGADJATI AGREEMENT 33 

 

widespread among them, that the Dutch could not be trusted to carry 

out their promises. Right or wrong, justified or unjustified, this dis- 

trust persisted. It made the Indonesians unwilling to take any of the 

Dutch suggestions at face value in November 1945, and for that mat- 

ter in November 1946, when the Linggadjati Agreement was drawn 

up. This distrust was reciprocated by the Netherlands Government 

which feared the Republic was out to sabotage all Dutch interests, 

legitimate as well as illegitimate. Moreover, the distrustful die-hard 

elements on both sides were to find abundant justification for their 

fears in the course of the trying events of the following months of 

negotiation. 

 

The Indonesian position was that the Republic claimed to be and 

was the de facto authority over all the territory of the Indies, and 

that the Republic was prepared to negotiate with the Dutch as a 

specially interested power, although recognition of the Republic’s 

independence was the sine qua non of any such negotiations. Both 

the Dutch and the Indonesian basic claims were to be modified sub- 

stantially before the Linggadjati Agreement was concluded. 

 

On November 14, the Republic took a first step toward com- 

promise by altering its governmental form. The Soekarno Cabinet, 

which had been chosen by and responsible to the President accord- 

ing to the American system, was replaced by a Cabinet headed by 

Soetan Sjahrir, and responsible to the Central National Indonesian 

Committee (K.N.LP.). Sjahrir was an ardent nationalist with no 

taint of Japanese collaboration, and it was expected that the Dutch 

would deal with him where they had been unwilling to deal with the 

allegedly collaborationist Soekarno. The change, which was the most 

basic and lasting one to take place in the formal composition of the 

Republic until Sjahrir’s resignation on June 27, 1947, was a signifi- 

cant concession under the circumstances. In the long run, further- 

more, it strengthened the Republic’s position as well, since Sjahrir 

was probably a shrewder negotiator than Soekarno would have been. 

 

THE BEGINNING OF NEGOTIATIONS 

 

On November 17, the first informal discussions between Sjahrir 

and van Mook took place under General Christison’s direction. The 

initial optimism which the beginning of the discussions occasioned 

was short-lived, however. After only the most cursory notice of the 

Dutch policy statement of November 6, and without any formal dis- 

cussion of the proposals which it contained, the meetings were 

ended. They broke down over the question of the return of the 

 

 

 

34. THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

Dutch troops to the islands. Sjahrir and Sjarifoeddin could not agree 

to this under any conditions, until the Republic’s status had been rec- 

ognized. The K.N.I.P. supported Sjahrir’s stand by an overwhelm- 

ing vote of confidence, and in the tense atmosphere engendered 

by the outspoken and frank disagreement and distrust between 

the negotiators, the extremist terror of November and December 

broke out in Batavia, Bandoeng, and Soerabaja. While the terror 

was set loose by the breakdown in discussions, it soon took its own 

head, and could not be controlled by the Republic. It is interesting 

to note that although the Republic did not itself control the terror, 

no cleavage developed between the Pemoeda or youth extremists 

who actually created the disorder and the Republican Government. 

The Pemoeda groups, in fact, voted to support the Republic even 

while carrying on, separately and locally, their armed activities. 

 

With the discussions halted after November 22, the terror grew 

worse, and at the Singapore Conference on December 6, General 

Christison received a mandate to re-establish law and order in as 

large an area as possible. The Dutch, however, were informed at the 

time that widespread offensive action against the Indonesians was 

not part of the British re-occupation task or policy. 

 

On December 15, in the midst of the political deadlock and wide- 

spread civil disorder, van Mook left for Holland. Of the several low 

points in the course of developments, this was perhaps the lowest. 

Throughout the Indies terror was rampant. The Dutch seemed to 

have neither the imagination to sponsor cooperation with the Re- 

publican movement, nor the force to suppress it. The political aims 

of the Indonesians and the Dutch were at variance over the question 

of the status of the Republic itself, and neither side was willing to 

make concessions lest they be interpreted as a sign of weakness. The 

British military role, moreover, was inadequate due to indecision 

and insufficient strength, and anti-British feeling on both sides was 

mounting. World opinion was shocked by the travesty on “libera- 

tion” represented by the unexpected course of events in Indonesia. 

The United Nations Security Council was casting an interested eye 

on Indonesia as a subject to be added to its already crowded agenda. 

 

The first exchange of views between Dutch and Indonesians cer- 

tainly showed little of that statesmanship or constructive com- 

promise which were to become so necessary at Linggadjati. At the 

end of November, the liberal elements on both sides were submerged 

under a flood of bitterness and distrust, and the future seemed dark 

indeed. The Linggadjati Agreement was all the more remarkable 

 

 

 

THE LINGGADJATI AGREEMENT 35 

 

when considered against the hopeless background of November and 

December 1945. 

 

By the time van Mock returned to Batavia one month after his de- 

parture, the atmosphere had improved considerably, partly because 

of the discussions between the British and Dutch Governments at 

Chequers, and partly because of the incipient recognition by the 

Schermerhorn Labor Government at these discussions that the Re- 

public could not be ignored or discredited but must be faced and 

dealt with. From the Dutch point of view, the discussions in London 

at the year’s end had resulted in a British agreement to devote in- 

creasing effort to assuring the safety of the A.P.W.I. in the Indies 

and to the maintenance of order. General Christison was to be re- 

called and replaced by the “unpolitical” Lt. General Sir Montague 

Stopford, whom the Dutch found more acceptable. From the In- 

donesian point of view, the London decision to withdraw the old- 

guard Dutch militarists, Admiral Helfrich and General van Oyen, 

was a step in the right direction. Furthermore, the moderate com- 

muniqus of the liberal Schermerhorn Government, with which the 

Indonesians had had no previous contact, also were regarded favor- 

ably by the Republic. Finally, the announcement that the British 

would send to Indonesia Sir Archibald Clark-Kerr now Lord Inver- 

chapel their senior career diplomat and ambassador-designate to the 

United States, to facilitate a resumption of discussions, was wel- 

comed on both sides. 

 

While the Security Council commenced discussions on the In- 

donesian question, van Mook and Sjahrir met for the first time in 

over two months on February 10, 1946, under Clark-Kerr’s guiding 

hand, and the first constructive proposals of the Dutch Government 

to the Republic were presented. In the Government’s new statement 

of policy that day, and in the explanatory memoire which followed 

six days later, it was stated that the Government would seek the ap- 

proval of all important regions and population groups in the Nether- 

lands Indies for the re-organization of the Indies as aii autonomous 

commonwealth under the Crown. It was, moreover, promised in the 

memoire of February 16 that after a period of preparation and con- 

solidation within the Kingdom, the duration of which would be de- 

termined by discussion and agreement, Indonesia would be given 

the right freely to choose its own political future, and the Nether- 

lands would endeavor to sponsor its admission to the United Na- 

tions. 

With this resumption of negotiations and presentation of formal 

 

 

 

gg THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

Dutch proposals to Sjahrir, a seed of promise, albeit a frail one, 

was planted. The Security Council reacted promptly by dropping 

the subject from its agenda, after Russia and Poland had unsuccess- 

fully supported a Ukrainian resolution to send a United Nations in- 

vestigating committee to Indonesia. The position of the United States 

on the Council was in opposition to the resolution on the explicit 

ground that there were now signs of progress between the parties 

concerned which made United Nations investigation no longer nec- 

essary, and on the tacit ground that the suggested cure, with pre- 

sumably some Russian ingredient, might be worse than the ailment 

itself. 

 

Actually the proposals of February 10 were still a long way from 

acceptability, and their reception in Indonesian circles was cool. 

The proposals nowhere either mentioned the Republic nor ac- 

corded it any direct or indirect recognition whatever* No guarantees 

were given to the functioning Republican Government or its calum- 

niated leaders, and the promise of an interim period was considered 

too vague to be meaningful. The more extreme nationalist Laskar 

and Pemoeda groups, as well as the Masjoemi and P.N.I. or Na- 

tionalist Parties, openly rejected the proposals and reiterated their 

demands for complete and immediate independence of all of Indo- 

nesia, while the armed extremist bands continued their harassing ac- 

tions against the British forces in the Outer Islands and in the bridge- 

head areas of Java and Sumatra. The discussions seemed likely to 

break off again, but the redoubtable Sjahrir clung to the hope that 

frank discussion could accomplish more than terror. Almost alone 

among the nationalists in this hope, he went to Djokjakarta with the 

new Dutch proposals and persuaded the Central National Indo- 

nesian Committee (K.N.I.P.) and President Soekarno that, unac- 

ceptable as the proposals were to the Republic, in their present form, 

they should be considered as the starting point for further discus- 

sions aiming at securing more acceptable terms. Returning from 

Djokjakarta on March 4, stronger than ever and with a plenary man- 

date from the K.N.LP. to negotiate, Sjahrir began the long uphill 

struggle to identify the Republic with the forces of compromise and 

discussion, rather than with those of disorder and terror. 

 

Sjahrir countered the somewhat abstract proposals of February 10 

with a comprehensive statement of the Republic’s attitude. He pro- 

posed that recognition of the Republic of Indonesia, as a sovereign 

state exercising authority throughout the archipelago, be regarded 

as a starting point, and that thereafter close cooperation with and 

 

 

 

THE LINGGADJATI AGREEMENT 37 

 

assistance from the Netherlands Government on all matters would 

be welcomed. From this point on, van Mook took the initiative and 

suggested exploratory discussions along the lines indicated by the 

French blueprint for Indo-China. According to the French plans, 

the Vietnamese Republic in Indo-China was to be an etat libre or 

free state within the Federation Indo-Chinoise, which in turn was 

to be a part of the Union Frangaise. Making it clear to Sjahrir that 

he was not empowered to make any commitment beyond the pro- 

posals of February 10, Dr. van Mook nevertheless agreed to investi- 

gate Sjahrir’s new suggestions along the lines of the Indo-China 

blueprint. While still an unofficial action, this fundamental change 

in attitude was a tribute to van Mook’s imagination and adaptabil- 

ity, and was a suitable and complementary reply to the restraint ex- 

ercised by Sjahrir after his return from Djokjakarta on March 4. 

Like Sjahrir’s expression of willingness to continue negotiations at 

that time, van Mook’s forward step was made against a storm of 

criticism from the die-hards. 

 

The explorative discussions which ensued between van Mook and 

Sjahrir, (with Clark-Kerr, in his own words, confining himself to 

“pouring the drinks”), made considerable progress up to the point 

at which the Republic agreed that, once it had been recognized, it 

might take its place within a federated Indonesia connected with 

the Kingdom. At this point, van Mook felt that sufficient progress 

had been made along the new line of approach to warrant his return 

to Holland in order to determine whether the new course would be 

acceptable at the Hague, and whether his own mandate to negotiate 

would be extended by the Netherlands Government beyond the 

limitations of the February 10 statement. 

 

Consequently, van Mook returned to Holland in early April, and 

Clark-Kerr, who had been sent to Indonesia to get the discussions 

started again, returned to England en route to his new post in Wash- 

ington. Upon his return, van Mook’s views found strong support 

from the Labor Government and particularly from the Minister of 

Overseas Territories, J. H. A. Logemann, and strong opposition 

from the van Poll Commission 1 which had returned from a trip to 

Indonesia to inform the Lower House of developments there. Loge- 

mann himself undertook the difficult task of making the unpalatable 

concessions contemplated by van Mook acceptable to a Lower House 

 

1 The van Poll Commission was appointed as a fact-finding group to report directly 

to Parliament on the situation in Indonesia. Named for its chairman, Max van Poll 

of the Catholic Party, the Commission completed its three-month mission and re- 

turned to the Netherlands at the end of April 1946. 

 

 

 

38 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

which was beginning to become more conservative as reconstruction 

in Holland progressed. Finally, with grave misgivings from the Anti- 

Revolutionary and Catholic Parties as well as from the van Poll 

Parliamentary Commission, the Lower House agreed to support the 

new policies outlined by Logemann in his speech of May 2. 

 

In the first of two speeches in which Logemann eloquently de- 

fended van Mook’s policy, deplored the van Poll Commission’s 

superficial report which had stressed the Japanese-inspired origin 

of the Republic and concluded with a remarkable statement em- 

phasizing the vitality of nationalism in Indonesia and the need for 

cooperation with, rather than opposition to, the Republic, he 

argued: 

 

“The reality of nationalism is a primary fact for which we stand and 

will continue to stand. … In Indonesia this [nationalistic] movement is 

above all other considerations. One can indeed make a distinction and 

state that the broad masses of the population have hardly arrived at 

political awareness and that among these broad masses nationalism is 

still only a spiritual awareness which is not of much practical con- 

sequence. If, however, one acknowledges the presence of any awareness, 

one must ultimately acknowledge the vitality of nationalism. I am con- 

vinced that there is not one man of influence in Java who is not a part 

of the nationalist movement in one way or another, although some value 

law and order so highly that they stand with the Government [rather 

than with the Republic]. . . . There is only one realistic approach from 

our side, alongside of which all else is pure fantasy; and that is that if we 

wish to solve this problem in a way which will stand the criticism of 

world history, then we must, with all the earnestness and sincerity that is 

in us … aim at cooperation with the [nationalistic] group [of Sjahrir] 

and therewith to reach agreement. There is no other way.” 

 

The Parliamentary debates in Holland closed on this hopeful 

note. Van Mook returned to Batavia. The new proposals, which he 

presented to Sjahrir on May 19, 1946, for the first time specifically 

countenanced the Republic and offered de facto recognition of the 

Republic’s authority in Java, with the understanding that the Re- 

public would become part of a federated Indonesian State within 

the Kingdom, such a state to have the right of eventual independ- 

ence after a suitable interim period should it so choose. 

 

These new proposals had come a long way from the February 1 

policy and seemed a step toward real agreement. But they were still 

unacceptable to the Republic. The picture of hope and optimism 

that prevailed on May 19 was to change sharply by a series of un- 

fortunate incidents which almost caused a complete rupture of the 

 

 

 

THE LINGGADJATI AGREEMENT 39 

 

improved relations which van Hook and Sjahrir had worked to 

build up. 

 

After Sjahrir received van Mook’s second set of proposals on May 

19, he returned to Djokja for a Cabinet session to discuss the new 

Dutch offer. At the same time, general elections were called in Hol- 

land. The Schermerhorn Cabinet resigned on May 21, although 

continuing to function until a new Cabinet should be formed. 

Sjahrir returned from Djokja with counterproposals to the Dutch 

offer on June 17, but van Mook was not yet ready to conduct further 

formal discussions until he received a new mandate or until the new 

political line-up and policy in Holland had been clarified. The 

counterproposals rejected the proposals of May 19 and suggested in- 

stead recognition of the Republic’s de facto authority in both Java 

and Sumatra and the formation of an alliance with, rather than a 

partnership under, the Crown. 

 

Further events forced the Sjahrir-van Mook negotiations out of 

the limelight. In the latter part of June 1946, a coup d’etat was at- 

tempted against the Soekarno-Sjahrir Government. Led by the Com- 

munist Tanmalakka and the disaffected, ambitious Soebardjo, who 

had been dropped from the Foreign Affairs portfolio when Sjahrir 

organized his first Cabinet, this “popular front” movement was 

sharply leftist in character, and opposed the dealings with the Dutch, 

aiming at the overthrow of Sjahrir and Soekarno. Sjahrir was kid- 

napped by this misguided group in Soerakarta toward the end of 

June, and for a while it was rumored in Batavia that he had been, 

or would be, killed by his kidnappers. What such a catastrophe 

would have meant, it is hard to say, but it might well have ruptured 

relations between the ‘Dutch and Indonesians permanently. For at 

that time, Sjahrir was probably the only Indonesian acceptable for 

negotiations by both sides. Had he been killed, it is likely that right- 

wing Dutch pressure would have diverted the policy of the Nether- 

lands Government toward stricter and harsher measures. 

 

Acting quickly and decisively, Soekarno proclaimed a personal 

dictatorship over Republican areas on June 30. Amir Sjarifoeddin, 

the Minister of Defense, ordered the arrest of the ten leaders of the 

attempted coup and secured the release of Sjahrir. Soekarno’s and 

Sjarifoeddin’s drastic but effective action preserved the continuity of 

the Republic and nipped in the bud what might have grown into a 

political break-up in the interior. 

 

A new Cabinet was formed in the Netherlands on July 2, consisting 

of a Catholic-Labor coalition, with the Catholic Party controlling 

 

 

 

40 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

about 30 per cent of the seats in the Lower House and Labor a close 

second with approximately 24 per cent. The farsighted Minister 

Logemann was replaced by the Catholic Party’s representative, Jonk- 

man, but no immediate change in policy toward Indonesia material- 

ized because the support of the liberal-leftist Labor Party was 

necessary for the new Cabinet to govern. The later stiffening of 

Dutch policy, however, was not unrelated to the earlier change in 

the makeup of the Netherlands government. 

 

After formation of the new government in the Netherlands, 

Sjahrir’s counterproposals of June 17 were held in the Dutch 

Cabinet for study, and the policy in Indonesia came up for full de- 

bate in the Lower House. Definite action was urged because of the 

increasingly difficult foreign-exchange position which the political 

situation was aggravating in the Indies. Again press influence from 

rightist and military groups advocated forcing the issue. 

 

In Batavia, van Mook was authorized to proceed with the imple- 

mentation of the February 10 proposals for the time being as best 

he could, and to consult with all regional and population groups in 

the Indies for the reorganization of the islands on a federal basis 

within the Kingdom. It was probably felt, furthermore, that diver- 

sionary action was necessary in order to shift the center of gravity 

and the spotlight away from the Republic, which was already begin- 

ning to solidify its position by establishing contacts abroad particu- 

larly with the new Interim Government of India. 

 

In the implementation of this policy, van Mook called a confer- 

ence of regional representatives from Borneo, the Celebes and 

Moluccas and the Lesser Soenda Islands (the so-called “Great East” 

areas), Bangka, Billiton, and Riouw. On July 19, at Malino near 

Macassar, a conference took place of forty such representatives, who 

had been chosen by local electoral boards or appointed by the local 

Paroeman Agoeng or Great Council, with supervisory control* over 

the panel of eligible candidates exercised by the Dutch Department 

of the Interior. It is interesting to note that representatives from 

Java and Sumatra were not invited to attend the conference on the 

official grounds that “political conditions there made a free expres- 

sion of the people’s will impossible.” In reply, the Republic ex- 

pressed contempt for the conference which Dr. Hatta characterized 

as “a puppet show . . . whose performers were designated by the 

Netherlands Indies Government.” 

 

After several days of discussion, the Malino Conference adopted 

resolutions calling for the eventual formation of a federal state, the 

 

 

 

THE LINGGADJATI AGREEMENT 41 

 

United States of Indonesia, to consist of four equal and semi- 

autonomous states: Java, Sumatra, Borneo and the Great East. The 

conference also confirmed the plan of having a “defined period of 

cooperation within the Kingdom in order to enable the U.S.I, to 

create the governmental apparatus without which it could not make 

a free and independent decision concerning the basis on which 

future relations between the Netherlands and Indonesia should be 

continued.” The conference also expressed the belief that “there 

ought to be lasting voluntary cooperation between the Netherlands 

and the U.S.I.,” but could agree on no definite time limit for the 

initial preparation period. 

 

Again, at the Pangkal Pinang Conference in the beginning of 

October, the resolutions reached at Malino were endorsed by repre- 

sentatives of the European, Eurasian, Chinese and Arab racial 

minorities. 

 

Van Mook was prosecuting the Government’s proposals of Febru- 

ary 10 energetically and constructively, before getting back to the 

primary problem of negotiations with the Republic. Actually, al- 

though some of the “rubber-stamp” accusations which the Republic 

directed against both Malino and Pangkal Pinang may have been 

justified, these charges overshot their mark. At Malino, in fact, the 

economic bill of rights drawn up by the conference included strong 

criticism of Dutch Government-sponsored monopolies and economic 

privileges, particularly those formerly enjoyed by the Royal Dutch 

Navigation Company shipping monopoly in the Outer Islands, and 

the special position of the Java Bank. At Pangkal Pinang, one of the 

Arab speakers had to be called sharply to order for derogatory re- 

marks he was making about the Netherlands Indies Government. 

Between these two conferences, three events took place, which 

later proved of major significance in facilitating the Linggadjati 

Draft Agreement. On August 13, the K.N.I.P, ended Soekarno’s 

dictatorship, and Sjahrir returned to the post of Prime Minister, 

heading a new Cabinet whose main change was that it included eight 

instead of five members of the rightist Islamic Masjoemi Party, 

which was inclined to favor a strongly antagonistic policy toward 

the Dutch proposals. On August 17, the States-General in the 

Netherlands enacted a law setting up a Commission General to repre- 

sent the Netherlands Government in the forthcoming negotiations. 

The Commission was given almost plenary powers to negotiate and 

to arrive at an agreement on the spot without having to refer back 

to the Hague*, as van Mook had formerly been required to do. It was 

 

 

 

42 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

expected that this additional power would expedite agreement, and 

this proved to be the result. The former Prime Minister, Schermer- 

horn, leader of the Labor Party and a scholarly humanist as well, 

was chosen to head the Commission; the Catholic Party’s Max van 

Poll, Feike de Boer, the former director of the Netherlands Shipping 

Company, and van Mook rounded out the membership. At the end 

of September 1946, they arrived in Batavia to begin their task which 

seven weeks later was to result in the Linggadjati Draft Agreement. 

Perhaps most important, a semi-official Dutch mission headed by 

Dr. P. J. Koets, the Chief of van Mook’s Cabinet, made a trip to the 

interior of Java, from September 15 to September 20, at the Repub- 

lic’s invitation. The impression brought back by Dr. Koets was 

highly favorable to the Republic, With remarkable candor, the first 

high Netherlands Indies Government official to visit the interior 

since the re-occupation described the order, peacefulness, productive 

activity, friendliness, and relative economic prosperity prevailing in 

the interior, in the face of appalling handicaps. Inter alia Dr. Koets 

stated, contradicting finally and definitely many ideas which had 

been generally accepted in Dutch circles: 

 

“The general picture we saw was that of a society which was not in the 

course of dissolution but which is being consolidated. … I must add 

that I have had talks with many people whom I knew in former years, as 

well as with young people whom I met for the first time. Each time I 

asked: ‘What is for you the essential thing that has happened during the 

last year?’ … I received the same answer. … ‘It is the feeling of human 

dignity.’ People now realize that they are capable of doing something. 

From conversations which went beyond superficialities I heard of the 

fear of a return to colonial status. . . . Not so much because people feared 

economic exploitation or domination, or something of that sort, . . . but 

rather because of a fear that they might lose again this new feeling which 

they had joyously acquired, which they had, so to speak, discovered in 

themselves, and which the people feel is something so precious that they 

cannot live without it. This is a reality of which we must be thoroughly 

aware.” 

 

The Koets report, coming unexpectedly from a high and responsi- 

ble Dutch official, did much to improve the atmosphere of the dis- 

cussions which were resumed between the Commission General and 

the Indonesian delegation on October 7, under the chairmanship of 

Lord Killearn. Probably more than any single event since the start 

of the negotiations a year earlier, Koets’s candid appraisal awakened 

a real hope in the hearts of many ardent nationalists that cooperation 

 

 

 

THE LINGGADJATI AGREEMENT 43 

 

and understanding with the Dutch was possible. In the total course 

of the negotiations, the Koets mission and report stand as the most 

shining examples of Dutch willingness to recognize changes and to 

make adaptations to them. 

 

COMPROMISE AT LINGGADJATI 

 

It had become apparent that if Sjahrir held to his counterpro- 

posals of June 17, he could not accept the reaffirmation at Malino 

of the Dutch intention to separate Java and Sumatra by recognizing 

Republican de facto authority in Java only. A military truce was 

concluded under the sponsorship of the British Special Commis- 

sioner, Lord Killearn, on October 14, between the Allied (British 

and Dutch) forces under Lt. General Mansergh’s command and the 

Indonesian forces under General Soedirman’s command; never- 

theless, the Republic’s determination to stand by the unity of its 

authority in Sumatra as well as Java became obvious after the first 

discussions on October 7. Further concessions were necessary from 

the Dutch, and a new formula had to be found which would also 

satisfy the basic demands inherent in the Republic’s counterpro- 

posals of June 17. The creative statesmanship needed for this was 

not lacking and on November 12 the final compromise was reached 

at a hill station outside Cheribon, called Linggadjati. 

 

At Linggadjati, the Commission General for the first time met 

Soekarno officially. Dutch policy had come a long way from its non- 

recognition of the allegedly Japanese-inspired Republic. A number 

of concurrent factors provided the final impetus that was needed to 

bridge the gap between the two positions. The Koets report, the 

pressure of the economic standstill, the pending departure of British 

troops on November 30, a critical world opinion, and the galvaniz- 

ing influence of Lord Killearn, all had their effect. The agreement 

itself, initialed on November 15 in Batavia (though not signed until 

March 1947) was a tribute to the perseverance and integrity of van 

Mook and Sjahrir who had labored so long drawing its blueprint. 

The weaknesses in the final solution stemmed not so much from 

what it said but from what it did not say: from certain political 

realities which it ignored, and from the fact that the perseverance 

and integrity of its architects were not shared by its artisans. 

 

Linggadjati and the accompanying minutes provided inter alia: 2 

 

I. That the Netherlands Government recognize the Republic as 

the de facto authority in Java and Sumatra; 

 

2 For the complete English text of the Agreement, see Appendix, p. 175. 

 

 

 

44 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

2. That the Netherlands and Republican Governments cooperate 

toward the setting up of a sovereign democratic federal state, the 

United States of Indonesia, to consist of three states, the Republic 

of Indonesia, embracing Java and Sumatra, the state of Borneo, and 

the Great Eastern State; 

 

3. That the Netherlands and Republican Governments cooperate 

toward the formation of the Netherlands-Indonesian Union, to con- 

sist of the Kingdom of the Netherlands including the Netherlands, 

Surinam, and Curasao and the U.S.I., which Union would have as 

its head the Queen of the Netherlands; 

 

4. That the Netherlands-Indonesian Union and the U.S.I, be 

formed not later than January 1, 1949, and that the Union set up 

its own agencies for the regulation of matters of common interest to 

the member states, specifically, the matters of foreign affairs, de- 

fense, and certain financial and economic policies; 

 

5. Finally, the Agreement provided for a mutual reduction in 

troop strength and a gradual evacuation of Dutch troops from Re- 

publican areas as quickly as possible consistent with the maintenance 

of law and order, and for the recognition by the Republic of all 

claims by foreign nationals for the restitution and maintenance of 

their rights and properties within areas controlled by the Republic. 

 

On paper, at least, Linggadjati appeared to concur with most 

of the Republic’s demands as stated in Sjahrir’s counterproposals of 

June 17. The counterproposals had demanded the recognition of 

Republican de facto authority in Sumatra as well as in Java, and 

Linggadjati endorsed the Republic’s standpoint. Furthermore, ac- 

cording to the Agreement, the U.S.L would be a sovereign demo- 

cratic state and an equal partner of the Kingdom, rather than a 

partner of the Netherlands within the Kingdom as the Dutch had 

proposed. From a purely political point of view, the Netherlands 

seemed to have made the greater concessions. Nevertheless, it had 

maintained its basic, minimum requirements, i.e., keeping Indonesia 

under the Crown (which itself would acquire a dual function as 

sovereign of the Netherlands and “head of the Netherlands-Indo- 

nesian Union”), and reorganizing the Indies on a federal basis ac- 

cording to the Malino plan, with the Republic as one of several 

constituent states. 

 

The Agreement had two main and vital weaknesses which were 

to occasion a rapid degeneration of the situation up to its final ratifi- 

cation by the Netherlands and the Republican Governments, and 

even after its signing on March 25, 1947. In the first place, Linggad- 

 

 

 

THE LINGGADJATI AGREEMENT 45 

 

jati referred continually to cooperation between the Netherlands 

and the Republic toward the construction of the U.S.L and the 

Netherlands-Indonesian Union; cooperation in the reduction of 

military forces and in the regulation of economic matters. Despite 

the Agreement, there were still many strong elements on both sides 

which were not yet ready for such cooperation, largely because they 

lacked the conviction that the other party was sincere and trust- 

worthy. In this sense, Linggadjati, whatever its craftsmanly states- 

manship, really represented only a somewhat premature agreement 

to agree. 

 

Secondly, Linggadjati called for a federal U.S.L to consist of three 

semi-autonomous states, the Great East 3 and Borneo as well as the 

Republic. It implied a paper equality of areas which are not, cannot 

and will not be equal economically, politically, or culturally. In the 

first place, Java and Sumatra together contain about 85 per cent of 

the total Indonesian population, and at least the same percentage 

of the educated Westernized intellectual group. Furthermore, before 

the war they accounted for between four-fifths and nine-tenths of 

the total export and import trade of the whole Indonesian archi- 

pelago. 4 The potential economic wealth of Sumatra, moreover, is 

probably greater than that of the whole remainder of the archipelago, 

with the possible exception of the unexplored vastness of New 

Guinea. Compared with the extremely top-heavy and unbalanced 

federal state envisioned by Linggadjati, the United States of America 

was at its inception a federation of equal parts. 

 

3 At Den Pasar in Bali on December 18, 1946, 60 representatives of daerahs, or 

regions, and 15 representatives of racial, cultural, social and, economic groups through- 

out the “Great East,” convened at the call of the Netherlands Indies Government to 

draw up a constitution for a new State of East Indonesia, according to the Malino 

plan. Van Hook’s intention was to go ahead with the projected plan for a federalized 

U.S.I. while final word concerning the Linggadjati Agreement was still pending in the 

Netherlands. 

 

According to the constitution of December 24, 1946, the new state was to exercise 

some initial local autonomy, but until the formation of the U.SJ., all matters per- 

taining to foreign affairs, defense, finance, trade, education, industrial and economic 

policy, public works, and so on, would be under the control of the Netherlands Indies 

Government. The Constitutional Convention chose the docile Balinese, Soekawati, as 

President and selected Macassar as the capital of the new state. 

 

The Republic interpreted Deri Pasar as a side-show apart from the main negotia- 

tions, and as a violation of the spirit if not the letter of Article 2 of Linggadjati, 

which provided that the “Netherlands and Republican Governments will cooperate in 

the formation of … the U.S.I.” The Republic felt that “East Indonesia” had been 

set up unilaterally, rather than cooperatively, and that the new state was simply a 

Dutch-controlled puppet with no will of its own. 

 

4 In 1939, approximately 85 per cent of the Netherlands Indies* exports came from 

Java and Sumatra, and approximately 90 per cent of total imports were for these 

areas. 

 

 

 

46 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

On March 25, 1947, the Agreement was signed. At the time it was 

openly stated that both signatories bound themselves to different 

interpretations of the terms “cooperation” and “federal.” The 

Netherlands Government assumed that cooperation with the Repub- 

lic nevertheless implied a continuation of Dutch leadership and sole 

responsibility pending the formation of the U.S.I., while the Re- 

public interpreted the term to mean joint responsibility and mutual 

consultation in the setting up of the projected federation. Moreover, 

the Dutch interpreted the term “federal” to mean equal states with 

equal voices tuned in key with that of the Netherlands; while the 

Republic interpreted it to mean that a federal U.S.I, did not deny 

either the Republic’s own primacy among the component parts b} 

virtue of its greater political and economic wealth and maturity, nor 

its equal position as co-sponsor of the U.S.I, along with the Nether- 

lands Government. 

 

These basic and vital differences in interpretation made the out- 

look cloudy. As a protest against acceptance of the unworkable and 

unsettled terms, and the difficulties they foreshadowed for the future, 

de Boer, one of the most practical and liberal Dutch figures in 

Indonesia, tendered his resignation from the Commission just prior 

to the signing. The difficulties envisioned by de Boer were not long 

in materializing, for, although it was a remarkable and tangible 

instrument of compromise and statesmanship, Linggadjati was only 

a bare beginning of the adjustments which had to be made before 

Indonesian-Netherlands relations became stabilized on a new foot- 

ing. Sixteen months of tedious and nerve-wracking negotiations had 

produced an Agreement which was widely regarded as a panacea 

and final settlement. At best Linggadjati was only a first, if vital, 

step toward the political and economic reorganization of Indonesia. 

 

The rapid and critical degeneration of Indonesian-Dutch relations 

after Linggadjati leading to Sjahrir’s resignation on June 27, 1947 

and the outbreak of Dutch police action in July resulted not so 

much from what the Agreement said, but from what it failed to say, 

and from the absence of a real meeting of minds on the fundamental 

questions of cooperation and federalism. Political crises were to de- 

velop continually in the following months over the issues of a pro- 

posed Interim Government, a joint Dutch-Indonesian police force, 

a joint cease-fire order, and other practical questions. As one issue 

was resolved another was to take its place, while lurking in the back- 

ground and abetting each successive difference was a mutual distrust 

of motives and intentions. 

 

 

 

PART II 

 

THE REPUBLIC IN OPERATION 

 

 

 

CHAPTER FOUR 

 

 

 

POLITICAL ORGANIZATION 

OF THE REPUBLIC 

 

 

 

Throughout the tedious and protracted diplomatic 

negotiations, the Republican Government managed to strengthen 

and solidify its position by increasing its contacts and friends abroad 

and by extending its control and authority at home. When, finally, 

the negotiations regarding the implementation of the Linggadjati 

Agreement were broken off after several earlier premature crises, 

and Dutch armed forces undertook a program of “limited police 

action” on July 21, 1947, the Republican Government was already 

in charge of a functioning and effective organization whose poten- 

tialities were still bright despite the initial military setbacks it sus- 

tained. 

 

Moreover, when Dutch military operations began, the Republic’s 

position was considerably stronger and more firmly grounded than 

had been that of the revolutionary Vietnamese Government of Ho 

Chi Minh when French forces began their unsuccessful drive in 

Indo-China sixteen months earlier. During the two years since its 

birth, the Indonesian Republic had given rise to a functioning po- 

litical organization with unofficial representation in the Middle East 

under its Foreign Minister Hadji Agoes Salim, in India, and in 

Australia; with a financial mission on its way to the United States 

under Dr. Soemitro Djojohadikoesomo, an Indonesian economist 

and head of the Banking and Trading Corporation; with many 

friends in England and in the United States; and with its former 

Prime Minister, Soetan Sjahrir, embarking on a world tour to ce- 

ment these friendships and plead the Indonesian cause. 

 

At home, the Republican Government had centralized the com- 

mand of its armed forces. It had shipped more than 60,000 tons of 

rice to India in exchange for textiles and agricultural implements, 

and had made initial steps toward putting into effect its plans for 

public works and reconstruction within the interior of Java and 

 

 

 

pjO THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

Sumatra. The Government had formulated plans for a large-scale 

migration of population from overpopulated Java to underpopu- 

lated Sumatra. Finally, the Republic had made some progress in its 

control and rehabilitation of the sugar, rubber, quinine, and textile 

industries and had expressed the outlines of its economic policies to- 

ward labor relations, banking, foreign investment, and foreign trade. 1 

 

The Government which had been responsible for these apprecia- 

ble advances under the most trying pressures from both left and 

right still was an amorphous organization that had evolved from the 

original Constitution more as a response to changing circumstances 

and needs, than as a direct fulfillment of that Constitution. 

 

Adopted by the Commission for the Preparation of Indonesian 

Independence on August 18, 1945, the somewhat vague and hastily- 

framed Constitution provided for a representative “Congress of the 

People/’ to consist of both regional delegates and popular delegates, 

the latter in a body to be called the “Council of Representatives.” 

The Constitution placed broad powers with the President, who was 

made Commander-in-Chief of the Armed Forces, and who was 

“vested with the power of government,” assisted by his Cabinet and 

by an advisory Council of State. However, final sovereignty was de- 

clared to rest with the people and, through them, with the Congress 

of the People. 2 

 

The Preparatory Committee stated, in a transitory provision of 

the Constitution, that under the emergency conditions of August 

1945, when the Indonesian Declaration of Independence was made, 

the powers of these organs [i.e., the Council of State, Congress 

of the People and Council of Representatives] “will be exercised 

by the President, assisted by a National Committee” appointed by 

him. 3 

 

The present political organization of the Republic has, in fact, 

evolved more from this transitory provision of the Constitution than 

it has from the Constitution itself. As a result of this evolution, the 

political mechanism of the Republican Government has come to 

revolve around three basic entities: (1) the President, (2) the Prime 

 

1 See Chapter 5. 

 

2 See Chapter I and Chapter II of the Constitution for a statement of the people’s 

sovereignty and the powers of the Congress of the People. Chapter III enumerates 

the broad powers reserved to the President. The meaning of the term “power of 

Government” is yet to be interpreted clearly, since it might appear to conflict with 

the ultimate sovereignty of the State which the Constitution reserves for the people. 

It seems probable that the Constitution is referring to the “executive” power of 

government in this regard. See Appendix, p. 165. 

 

3 See Transitory Provision IV, Appendix, p. 171. 

 

 

 

POLITICAL ORGANIZATION OF THE REPUBLIC 51 

 

Minister and his Cabinet, and (3) the Central National Indonesian 

Committee or K.N.I.P. (Komite Nasional Indonesia Poesat) repre- 

senting the political parties. 4 

 

Of the three, the President was probably the strongest single fac- 

tor. Not only does the President stand at the helm of the Republican 

Government, but the personality of President Soekarno was, for 

large masses of the Indonesian people, the incarnation and symbol 

of Indonesian nationalism. In the words of Dr. Koets, the Chief 

of the Dutch Cabinet in Batavia: 

 

“Soekarno’s influence on the masses and on certain sections of public 

opinion places him in a real position of authority. To the intellectuals, 

young and old alike, he is the symbol of a realization of the ideal of in- 

dependence. The representation of national unity in his person is a force 

that is generally regarded as irreplaceable and indispensable at this stage 

of the struggle for freedom.” 5 

 

While Soekarno was commander-in-chief of the armed forces, and 

while he had the power to enact law in the form of Presidential de- 

crees without initial recourse to any governmental agency, 6 the 

primacy of his office in the Republic derives more from his position 

as the symbol of the nationalist movement and as the major influence 

keeping dissident nationalist elements within the Republic, than it 

does from the actual legislative and executive powers which he 

exercises. 

 

In practice the scope of Soekarno’s actual execution of his powers 

was limited by two factors: first, by the activity and behind-the- 

scenes influence of his trusted colleague, Vice-President Mohammed 

Hatta, who acted as an assistant rather than a Vice-President, and 

who handled the day-to-day internal administration of the Republic; 

and second, by the alteration of the original governmental form 

 

4 The Vice-President of the Republic, while exerting very strong powers, is not 

treated as a separate unit, since his powers are actually delegated Presidential powers 

and can thus be considered as part of the President’s prerogatives. 

 

5 Report of Dr. P. J. Koets after his return from a mission to Djokjakarta. Quoted 

from the Netherlands Indies Government Information Service Release, October 16, 

1946, Batavia. 

 

6 The K.N.I.P. was endowed with legislative powers by Presidential decree in October 

1945. While the K.N I,P. has asserted its right to review Presidential decrees, its only 

attempt to enforce this right occurred in March 1947, in the matter of a Presidential 

decree increasing the size of the K.NJ.P. in order to secure support for the Govern- 

ment’s policy of negotiation and compromise with the Dutch, according to the Ling- 

gadjati Agreement. The K.NJ.P., however, finally withdrew its veto of Soekarno’s 

decree at that time, when both Soekarno and Hatta threatened to resign if the move 

were rejected. The speech containing this threat of resignation was actually made to 

the KJ^.LP. by Hatta. 

 

 

 

52 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

which called for an American-type Cabinet, chosen by and responsi- 

ble to the President. In its place, a continental-type Cabinet was set 

up, chosen by and responsible to its Prime Minister who, in turn, 

was selected by the President with the K.N.LP.’s consent, and who 

was made directly responsible to the K.N.I.P. after he took office. 

 

The reason behind this unexpected alteration in the govern- 

mental form, which took place only three months after the Constitu- 

tion had been adopted providing for a Presidential Cabinet, is to be 

found in the policy which the Netherlands Indies Government 

adopted when it returned to Batavia in the fall of 1945. Refusing to 

negotiate with Soekarno or Hatta on the ground that they were 

Japanese collaborators, the Dutch indicated their willingness to con- 

duct informal discussions with a high and competent Republican 

official who had no taint of collaborationists 

 

In November 1945, therefore, President Soekarno and the K.N.I.P. 

changed the governmental set-up by a Presidential decree which was 

first debated in the K.N.I.P. This decree provided that the post of 

Prime Minister be instituted in the Government, and a ministerial 

Cabinet be selected by and responsible to the Prime Minister. The 

Prime Minister, in turn, would be selected by the President with 

the K.N.I.P.’s consent, and would be directly responsible to the 

K.N.I.P. Soekarno’s own Cabinet was thereupon dissolved, although 

several of the ministers, including Amir Sjarifoeddin, accepted port- 

folios in the new Cabinet; and Soetan Sjahrir was appointed the Re- 

public’s first Prime Minister. Sjahrir was chairman of the K.N.I.P.’s 

influential Working Committee and had a spotless record for the 

occupation period. He was now empowered to conduct negotiations 

with the Dutch and British in regard to the fundamental question 

of Indonesia’s future political status. 

 

Although Sjahrir also held the post of Minister of Foreign Affairs, 

it was in his position as Prime Minister that he handled all negotia- 

tions with the Dutch. This fact was substantiated when Sjahrir re- 

signed on June 27, 1947. At that time, the Foreign Affairs portfolio 

passed to the redoubtable Hadji Agoes Salim who was in Cairo, 

while the post of Prime Minister and with it overall direction of 

the continuing negotiations with the Dutch passed to Sjarifoeddin. 

It is thus clear that the position of Prime Minister in the Indonesian 

Government was instituted as a concession to the requirements of 

the diplomatic situation, although not provided for of in any way 

referred to in the Constitution. 

 

Most high officials of the Republic agree that th’e Constitution 

 

 

 

POLITICAL ORGANIZATION OF THE REPUBLIC 53 

 

may have to be modified in some respects when more stable con- 

ditions have been established; and it seems likely that one modifica- 

tion will involve the final incorporation of the continental minis- 

terial system into the Constitution. However, in the application of 

this system, the Cabinet will have acquired certain features peculiar 

to it and peculiar to the Indonesian political scene. 

 

The Prime Minister’s Cabinet has come to have a dual function, 

both parts being equally important. On the one hand, each minis- 

ter is charged with the running of his particular ministry. In the 

Cabinet headed by Sjarifoeddin after June 1947, the Prime Minister 

also was charged with the running of the Defense Ministry; A. K. 

Gani was Deputy Prime Minister as well as heading the Ministry of 

Economic Affairs; Hadji Salim became Minister of Foreign Affairs; 

Wondoamiseno, Minister of Home Affairs; Soesanto Tirtoprodjo, 

Minister of Justice; A. A. Maramis, Minister of Finance; Setiadjit, 

Minister of Information; J. M. Leimena, Minister of Public Health; 

Soeprodjo, Minister of Social Affairs; and Laoh, Minister of Public 

Works. 7 In this role, each minister handles the particular adminis- 

trative responsibilities of his ministry. 

 

In addition to this role, the Cabinet plays a vital and unique 

collective role as the Prime Minister’s index of the support he can 

expect to find among the several political parties for any policies he 

m^y propose. In this role, the Cabinet functions as a sort of pre- 

liminary round-table where the Prime Minister can find out how 

party sentiment stands vis-i-vis his prospective plans. The impor- 

tance of this function can only be fully understood when it is real- 

ized that of the four Cabinets which the Republican Government 

had between November 1945 and the latter part of 1947, three of 

which were selected by Sjahrir and the other by Sjarifoeddin, not 

one had a majority or even a plurality of posts occupied by members 

of the Prime Minister’s own party. In fact, the Socialist Party of 

Sjahrir and Sjarifoeddin had at no time held more than one-fifth of 

the total positions, including both Ministers and Vice Ministers 

with and without portfolio. 

 

Thus, each Cabinet was a coalition Cabinet. Both Sjahrir and 

Sjarifoeddin scrupulously observed the practice of choosing their 

Cabinets from the leaders of the several political parties, although a 

minimum of six seats, in the total Cabinet of between 25 and 35, 

was in each case kept for prominent non-party nationalist leaders. 

 

7 Mr. Setiadjit, the leader of the Labor Party, also became a Deputy Prime Minister 

under Sjarifoeddin and Gani. For the composition of the later Cabinet, see p. 150, 

 

 

 

54 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

It is thus by virtue of their positions as party leaders rather than 

as Cabinet Ministers that the top members of the Cabinet exert 

their main influence on the formulation and execution of Republi- 

can policies. Thus, among 1947 office-holders, Gani was chairman of 

the strong Nationalist Party; Setiadjit, the second Vice-Premier, was 

chairman of the Labor Party; Wondoamiseno and Hadji Salim both 

were prominent leaders of the progressive wing of the large Mas- 

joemi Party; and Dr. Leimena was a leader of the Christian Party. 

 

As will appear more clearly in the discussion further on, the 

political parties and the religious, youth and labor organizations 

represented in the K.N.LP. constitute the popular element in the 

Republican Government, and tentatively represent the link with the 

people, in whom the Republican Constitution vests ultimate sover- 

eignty. Because of the vital role which the parties play in the Gov- 

ernment, and because of the unavoidable coalition nature of his 

Cabinet, the Prime Minister must use his Cabinet as a sounding- 

board for those policies which will be finally decided upon only by 

the full party representation in the K.N.LP. It is for this reason 

that Sjahrir and Sjarifoeddin, while conducting negotiations with 

the Dutch, often had to modify or withdraw commitments to the 

Netherlands Government which they had tentatively made, after a 

Cabinet session revealed to them that the parties would probably not 

support the proposed commitments. While the Prime Minister stood 

at the helm of his own Cabinet, his relationship to it was a uniquely 

consultative one and a relatively dependent one. His strength and 

the practicability of his commitments were dependent on the reac- 

tion and support of his Cabinet, or more particularly on the reaction 

and support of the political parties and other groups which the 

Cabinet represented at the time. Sjahrir and Sjarifoeddin both had 

extensive powers in their negotiations with the Dutch, but these 

powers derived from a coalition party support which had to be re- 

ferred back to at all times of crisis. This political fact was at least 

partly the explanation behind the so-called “dilatory tactics” of the 

Republic during the course of its negotiations. It was one factor 

which exhausted Dutch patience to the point where the blow-up of 

July 21 resulted. 

 

As with most European coalition Cabinets, the Indonesian system 

had its weaknesses, which became most apparent at times when 

immediate decision was required. It appears likely that the coalition 

Cabinet system will continue in the Republic for some time to come, 

at least until some basis for direct popular representation has been 

 

 

 

POLITICAL ORGANIZATION OF THE REPUBLIC 55 

 

put into effect, as suggested but not specifically provided for in the 

Constitution. 

 

Until that happens, the only representative body in the Govern- 

ment is the K.N.I.P., which is appointed by the President, and which 

represents political parties, religious, youth and labor groups, but 

not the people directly. As long as the K.N.I.P. remains such a di- 

versely and indirectly representative body,* without one dominant 

party or group, it is to be expected that the Indonesian Cabinet will 

be of the coalition type. 

 

THE CENTRAL NATIONAL INDONESIAN COMMITTEE 

 

The first session of the Central National Indonesian Committee, 

or K.N.I.P., took place on August 29, 1945, and consisted of one 

hundred and twenty delegates appointed by President Soekarno 

from the outstanding Indonesian party leaders, as an advisory body 

in accordance with the fourth transitory provision of the Constitu- 

tion. At its second session in October, the K.N.I.P. acquired legis- 

lative authority by a Presidential decree and selected a Working 

Committee (Badan Pekerdja) of seventeen members to continue in 

permanent session to handle the new and expanding powers which 

the larger body was acquiring. As the powers and composition of the 

K.N.I.P. grew in size and scope, and as the diplomatic situation came 

to require more and more decisions by the K.N.I.P., the Working 

Committee tended to become more and more influential. Consisting 

of a cross-section of party representatives drawn from the K.N.I.P. 

itself, the Working Committee remained in permanent session, 

whereas the total K.N.I.P. membership was convened two or three 

times a year, or when called by the President. It was the Working 

Committee which both Sjahrir and Sjarifoeddin consulted (in addi- 

tion to their Cabinets) before making any final commitment to the 

Dutch. 

 

The Working Committee and the Cabinet have thus functioned 

to mirror party sentiment for the Prime Minister, and incidentally 

as reciprocal checks on one another in providing a true image of 

that sentiment. While the Working Committee has come to act for 

the K.N.I.P., it is the larger body itself which must vote a final ac- 

ceptance of any major policy decision before it is accepted as law. 

For example, in March 1947, at its session in Malang, the K.N.I.P. 

voted its acceptance of the Linggadjati Agreement which the Prime 

Minister had already negotiated on a draft basis with the Dutch. In 

general, if the Prime Minister has consulted and appraised his 

 

 

 

56 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

Cabinet and the Working Committee closely, he can be fairly sure 

in advance of the vote which the KJN.I.P. will turn in. 

 

The K.N.LP., it should be recalled, has become a heterogeneous 

group of presidentially appointed representatives totaling more than 

four hundred members. While its broad base and diverse compo- 

sition hamper its efficiency, and while it might be streamlined 

when political conditions come to be stabilized, its size and diversity 

are likely to continue for some time. Until some system of suffrage 

is applied, and a real, direct representation of minorities can take 

place on an elective basis, the President will probably maintain the 

ultra-representative character of the K.N.LP. in order to retain as 

much indirect contact as possible with the large, diversified and non- 

vocal population of Java and Sumatra, 

 

Despite its motley composition, the K.N.LP., as it functioned in 

its first two years, can be considered as divided into two main party 

blocs which were responsible for most of its decisions as well as for 

those of the Working Committee acting in its place. On the one 

hand, there is the Sajap Kiri or Left-Wing Group, consisting of the 

strong Socialist and Labor Parties, the Communist Party, and the 

Socialist Youth Organizations or Pesindo., and generally supported 

by the Central Organization of Indonesian Labor (Sentral Organisasi 

Boeroeh Seloeroe Indonesia) or S.O.B.S.L, 8 the League of Small 

Farmers (Barisan Tani Indonesia) or B.T.I., and almost all of the 

separately represented so-called “People’s Armies” (Laskar Rajaf). 

This bloc generally commands a total of approximately two hundred 

votes in the K.N.LP. 

 

The Sajap Kiri has provided the major support for the Sjahrir and 

Sjarifoeddin Cabinets and has favored a policy of moderation, nego- 

tiation, and compromise with the Dutch. It is, moreover, this single 

major issue of negotiation with the Dutch around which the unity 

of the Sajap Kiri has been built. On the other hand, the economic 

and social views of the Sajap Kiris constituents vary widely from 

extreme left to center, with the Communists still advocating the 

doctrine of class struggle, and the stronger Socialist Party favoring 

gradual and peaceful socialization of the means of production. De- 

spite these variations, it can be said that the left-wing parties stand 

 

8 The S.OJJ.S J. is closely related to, but is independent of, the Labor Party. While 

both are represented in the K.N.I.P., the S.O.B.S.I. is regarded as a federation of labor 

aiming^ at the protection of labor’s rights. It is not, strictly speaking, considered to be 

a political party. Similarly, the B.TJ. is an organization designed to protect the inter- 

ests of the small farmer It also is represented in the K.N.I P., and its delegates gener- 

ally vote with the Sajap Kiri bloc, although again the B.T.I, is not considered to be a 

political party. See pp, 68 ff. 

 

 

 

POLITICAL ORGANIZATION OF THE REPUBLIC 57 

 

for a moderate socialistic state and a planned economy with Govern- 

ment control of public utilities and transportation, and with exten- 

sive labor and social legislation. 

 

In addition, the Sajap Kiri parties also stress a policy of coopera- 

tion with foreign nations and appear to be fully aware of the need 

for foreign investment and expanded foreign trade In the economic 

rehabilitation of Indonesia. At the same time, these parties stress 

the need to have the Government scrutinize foreign investment and 

trade in order to guard against the possibility of unfair exploitation. 

These economic policies, which to a large extent are also advocated 

by other parties outside the Sajap Kiri, constitute in effect the ex- 

plicit and implicit policies of the Republican Government itself. 

They will be discussed more fully in the following chapter. 

 

The Sajap Kiri parties also have tended to favor a widespread 

program of education, particularly of education along technical 

lines, in order to build up the critically short supply of trained per- 

sonnel which the Republic needs and will need in the future. The 

Sajap Kiri group has increasingly tended away from the Taman- 

Siswo system of education which they have come to consider imprac- 

tical and visionary. 9 Instead, the Sajap Kiri parties have favored a 

new system of education advanced by an Indonesian pedagogue 

named Mohammed Sjafi. This system aims at technical and creative 

as well as cultural education and is modeled more along the lines of 

Americarrand European progressive principles than along the tradi- 

tional Taman-Siswo pattern. Under Sjafi’s guidance, the new system 

has been functioning and gaining increasing support in Kayu Tanam 

on the West Coast of Sumatra. 

 

Lined up against the left-wing progressive parties in the K.N J.P. 

is the so-catled right-center bloc: the Benteng Republik or “Repub- 

lican Stronghold.” There are two major components in this bloc: 

the Masjoemi 10 or Islamic Party, with its numerous allied youth 

organizations, which is the largest single political party in the Re- 

public, claiming almost ten million adherents; and the strong Na- 

tionalist Party (Partai Nasional Indonesia) or P.N.L In addition, this 

group has been supported by the People’s Party (Partai Raj at) and 

the large, militant Pemberontakan, led by the rabid firebrand; Soe- 

 

& The Taman-Siswo was founded by the old-time nationalist, Dewantara, who was 

Soekarno’s first Minister of Education, but who has since retired into political obliv- 

ion. This system advocated a sort of Aristotelian “peripatetic”* schools, with a major 

canicular emphasis on Indonesian culture and tradition. 

 

i@ Standing for: Madjolis Sjoera Moslimin Indonesia or Indonesian Council of Mos- 

lem Law. 

 

 

 

58 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

tomo. 11 The combined strength o the Benteng group in 1947 

amounted to approximately one hundred seats in the K.N J.P. 12 

 

Throughout the two-year negotiations with the Dutch, the Ben- 

teng bloc constituted the major opposition to the Government’s 

policy of compromise and concession. In the P.N.I. and the Mas- 

loemi parties as the parties with the oldest nationalist heritage- 

there was a particularly strong distrust and suspicion of the negotia- 

tions and of Dutch intentions in general. As a result, the Benteng 

group continually advocated a stronger and more militant policy 

toward the Dutch than did the progressive and moderate Sajap Kiri. 

Only seldom, did these parties break decisively from the Sjahrir 

or Sjarfoeddin coalition Governments. In fact, through most of 

the negotiations, the Masjoemi and P.N.I, have held more seats in 

the coalition Cabinets than any of the other parties and exerted a 

strong influence from these positions and from within the K.N.I.P. 

When the K.N.I.P. voted on the Linggadjati Agreement, the Ben- 

teng Republik bloc withheld its votes; but immediately after the 

ratification, the bloc announced that it would support the Govern- 

ment in the implementation of the ratified Agreement. 

 

As already indicated, the division over the fundamental issue of 

negotiating with the Dutch was responsible for the opposed align- 

ment of the Sajap Kiri and Benteng Republik in the K.N.I.P. On 

other matters, the divergence of views between the two groups has 

been less clearly marked. There are, for example, progressive groups 

within both the P.N.I. and the Masjoemi Parties, which favor a 

socialistic state, labor legislation, and a liberal education program. 

 

However, there does seem to be a basic difference of the approach 

of the Benteng bloc, and particularly of the conservative wing of the 

Masjoemi Party, to social and economic change from the approach 

of the leftist parties to the same problems. As the party with the 

longest history and the most solid grounding in Islamic Law, the 

Masjoemi Party tends to be less receptive to social change and eco- 

nomic experimentation than are the progressive, Leftist parties. Its 

political attitude is nationalistic, but in a conservative and religious 

sense. In this respect, the Masjoemi Party exerts a strong, stabilizing 

influence which is particularly important and may be of special 

significance in the future development of the Republic. 

 

11 No relation to the founder of the nationalist “Boedi Oetomo” or High Endeavor 

movement in 1908 cf. p. 3. 

 

12 The remaining seats in the K.NJ.P. aside from those of the Sajap Kiri and Ben- 

teng Republik are held by religious parties, regional and racial groups, women’s par- 

ties, popular militia groups, and others. 

 

 

 

POLITICAL ORGANIZATION OF THE REPUBLIC 59 

 

THE REPUBLIC’S ARMED FORCES 

 

The question has often been raised as to whether the army and the 

numerous local fighting forces such as the “People’s Armies” (Laskar 

Rajat) and the Buffalo Army (Barisan Banteng) constitute separate 

political factions which have their own policies apart from and per- 

haps even in opposition to those of the Government, and independ- 

ent of the K.NJ.P. 

 

At the time of the Republic’s beginnings, this was substantially 

true. The Laskar, Banteng, and Hizboellah fighting corps arose 

immediately after the Republican Declaration of Independence, 

from what had been the local people’s groups trained by the Japa- 

nese in the hope that these forces would stand with them against 

the attacking Allied armies. Instead, immediately following the 

Declaration of Independence, the people’s groups disarmed their 

Japanese mentors or “accepted” the Japanese surrender in the ab- 

sence of Allied occupation troops, and then set up their own separate 

commands without any overall unity such as the Japanese themselves 

had maintained. With the Japanese weapons which they had seized, 

these local bands were largely responsible for the terror and plunder 

of November-December, 1945. 

 

When the first outbreak of terror had subsided, the local forces 

went through two successive stages of development. First of all, the 

Laskar became increasingly Integrated within the structure of the 

expansive Socialist Youth Organization or Pesindo y which in turn 

was affiliated with the Sajap Kiri. By the end of 1946, the Pesindo 

had established titular authority over all the Laskar in Sumatra, 

and twelve of the thirteen in Java. In many instances, however, this 

authority was only titular, since there was no way for the Pesindo 

headquarters in Djokjakarta to enforce Its authority on extremist 

units which resisted its will and continued their militant activities. 

 

The thirteenth Laskar the large and strong Pemberontakan of 

Soetomo maintained its independence from the Pesindo and took 

an open political stand on the side of the Benteng Republik in the 

K.N.I.P. by advocating a militant attitude toward the Dutch. The 

Barisan Banteng and the smaller Hizboellah fighting corps chose to 

remain apart from political affiliations either with the Pesindo or 

the Benteng Republik. Instead, these groups achieved a certain 

amount of separate internal integration and centralization of com- 

mands. 

 

This was the situation which confronted Sjarifoeddin when he 

 

 

 

6o THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

was appointed Minister of Defense by Sjahrir in January 1946. He 

immediately undertook the task of centralizing and unifying the 

Republican Army (Tentara Republik Indonesia) and the more diffi- 

cult task of integrating all the different local armed groups under 

the T.RJ. command, to form one central Republican armed force. 

 

This task was not fully completed, but by May 5, 1947, Sjarifoed- 

din’s work had progressed far enough partly through diplomacy 

and partly through a use of force against certain bitterly recalcitrant 

extremist units so that President Soekarno was able to issue a decree 

providing for the unification of the T.R.I, and the Laskar, Banteng, 

Pemberontakan and Hizboellah fighting forces under one central 

command. On June 5, this Presidential decree was implemented by 

another which installed the central command itself. Supreme Com- 

mand of the Republican armed forces under the President was 

vested in Lt. General Soedirman, assisted by his Chief-of-Staff, Major 

General Oerip Soemohardjo, Vice-Admiral Nasir, Air Vice-Com- 

modore Soeriadarma, and Major Generals Soeleiman and Djojo 

Soedjono of the Barisan Banteng and Soetomo of the Pemberon- 

takan. This command itself was placed under the overall direction of 

Sjarifoeddin as the Minister of Defense, and finally under Soekarno, 

as the Constitutional Commander-in-Chief of the armed forces. 

 

The strength of these forces and their ability to resist the Dutch 

military action of July 21 will be appraised later on. Here it may be 

said that, under Sjarifoeddin’s capable direction, the Republican 

military forces were unified and brought under the control of the 

Republican Government. At the time Dutch military action began, 

the direct political influence of the former people’s fighting groups 

had been reduced to a minimum, and the irresponsible plunder 

campaigns of these extremist groups had been cut down substan- 

tially. The centralized command of the armed forces was, for all 

immediate purposes, dissolved by Dutch penetration into Western 

and Eastern Java after July 21. From the Indonesian point of view, 

the necessity for preparing for an effective and ubiquitous guerrilla 

warfare throughout Java and Sumatra required a restoration of the 

original local command on which the irregular people’s forces were 

founded. When stable conditions are restored, Sjarifoeddin, or his 

successor, will again be faced with the problem of reviving a unified 

military command responsible to his Ministry of Defense. 

 

This, then, toward the end of 1947, was the structure of the Re- 

publican Government at its top levels (as shown on p. 61). 

 

 

 

6i 

 

 

 

 

Cfl 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ffi 

 

f* 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

62 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

This is the Government which has grown so greatly in strength 

and scope between 1945 and 1948. Its accomplishments have been 

extensive and have, moreover, been made under trying and difficult 

conditions. And yet, the problems still to be faced by this Govern- 

ment will require still greater energy, organization, and persever- 

ance. The Government must, first of all, resist attempts to abridge 

its authority in Java and Sumatra. It must undertake the imposing 

tasks of economic reconstruction. It must attract foreign capital and 

foreign technicians and yet protect Indonesian labor from unfair 

exploitation by either foreign or domestic capital. It must endeavor 

to spread education and to raise the pitifully low level of literacy in 

Java and Sumatra. It must integrate its economic and political pro- 

grams within the framework of the United States of Indonesia in 

which it will presumably be the largest and strongest constituent 

when the U.S.I, comes into existence, on January 1, 1949. 

 

The Republic will have to root out the psychological complexes 

and social privileges of a partly colonial and partly feudal society. It 

will have to spread political consciousness among its backward peo- 

ple, and it will have to re-direct the thinking of its intellectuals from 

winning the nation’s independence to utilizing that independence so 

as to raise the standard of living of the Indonesian population as a 

whole. It must overcome the perennial danger of self-seeking among 

its leaders and factionalism among its parties. It must maintain 

order and build up a framework of law which it must then enforce. 

It must streamline the amorphous structure of its administration, re- 

vise its vague Constitution, and effectuate the provisions of the 

revised Constitution which it adopts. The Republic has stood up 

well and shown a remarkable degree of internal unity since 1945. 

Yet during this period, the Republic’s national purpose has been 

simplified by the necessity for preserving unity in order to secure 

its independence. Whether it will be able to bear the more subtly 

divisive burdens of self-government and party politics in normal 

times remains to be seen. 

 

This is unquestionably a large order for any government new or 

old. The difficulty and magnitude of the many tasks will require 

foresight, efficiency, and progressive, responsible leadership. 

 

The question has often been raised whether the Republic is likely 

to become totalitarian in the course of its attempts to solve these 

difficult problems. It is the considered opinion of the author that 

the chance of such a development is remote. Nevertheless, the ques- 

tion requires closer examination. 

 

 

 

POLITICAL ORGANIZATION OF THE REPUBLIC 63 

 

It is certainly true that, as it stands after the first few years of 

growth, the Republican Government is not a democratic one in the 

pure sense of the word. Its only popular representative body, the 

K.N.I.P., is appointed by the President; that is, its representative 

character does not involve the element of direct choice by the peo- 

ple. Rather, its popular character derives from the diversity and 

representativeness of the delegates whom the first President, Soe- 

karno, has selected. While, actually, these delegates are both diverse 

and representative, this does not change the fact that they are not 

elected by the people. 

 

However, there has been a gain for democracy in that the K.N.I.P. 

has constantly expanded its role in the Government. It has become 

the repository of legislative authority. For, although the President 

may still make law by Presidential decree, the practice has been 

established whereby these decrees are subject to K.N.I.P. review at 

the next session of the central body. Furthermore, the K.N.I.P. is 

the recognized body to which the Prime Minister and his Cabinet 

are finally responsible. Nevertheless, its source lies not in the whole 

people, but in the President. A situation of this type may continue 

for some time, and the representative body in the Republic, while 

growing stronger and perhaps exercising a decisive influence in the 

Government, may perhaps continue to be largely an appointive 

body. 

 

The reason for this prospect is to be found in the backwardness 

of the Indonesian masses. With a literacy level of less than 10 per 

cent of its total population of 60 million, the people in the Repub- 

lican areas are still a long way from the point where they can under- 

stand, or are sufficiently interested in, politics to vote with compe- 

tence. As long as so few can read, that is, until the Republic’s educa- 

tional plans really start to make headway, it is extremely doubtful 

whether there can be any basis for popular elections in the Republic. 

Some might add that, as long as there is no large middle class in 

Indonesian society, there can be no broadly-based direct democracy. 

 

The Republican Government cannot yet be considered a demo- 

cratic one, in fact, despite its democratic principles. While it is a 

Government “for” the people, it is certainly not “of or “by” them. 

Nevertheless, this is apparently not true of either the revolution 

which the Republic stands for, or the existence of the Republican 

Government itself. Even the first official Dutch mission to visit Re- 

publican “territories, in September 1946, brought back a report of 

the apparently wide support which the revolution and the Republi- 

 

 

 

64 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

can Government had among large masses of the Indonesian people. 

Dr. Koets, the leader of the mission, in fact, spoke of the “national 

unity” which he had encountered. 

 

Notwithstanding the existence of large groups within the popula- 

tionwet-rice cultivators (especially in the more remote areas), la- 

borers, and others which” are politically indifferent and inert, it 

appears that the Republic has a widespread support throughout 

both Java and Sumatra. But this popular support, while a real and 

apparent factor which can be verified by talking to almost any Indo- 

nesian not under duress, is of a passive type. It is definitely not a 

participating support. The Indonesian people, in general and insofar 

as they can be spoken of as a unit, seem to prefer a government run 

by Indonesians, and in local village councils they have shown their 

talent for devising effective methods of arriving at group decisions. 

On a national level, however, they have not reached the stage where 

they either wish or are able to take part in government. The Repub- 

lican Government thus appears to be supported but not run by the 

Indonesian people. 

 

Though it is clear from the above remarks that definite qualifica- 

tions must be attached to a use of the term “democratic” in referring 

to the Republic, it nevertheless seems likely that there will be a 

development along democratic lines, and that totalitarianism will 

not materialize in the Indonesian political structure, in the form of 

a dictatorship from either the left or the right. Several of the top 

Republican leaders have marked personal ambitions particularly 

Soekarno and Gani but in general, it is the author’s impression, 

after sixteen months of continuous contact, that Republican leader- 

ship is characterized by a keen sense of responsibility to the Indo- 

nesian people. 

 

There are, furthermore, several important reasons why even the 

personally ambitious leaders could not even if they should try- 

establish a totalitarian regime. The first factor which would impede 

any incipient tendency toward totalitarianism is the existence of the 

two large and strong opposing party blocs: the leftist Safap Kiri and 

the conservative Benteng Republik. The co-existence of these two 

blocs tends to obviate the likelihood that either one of them can 

seize untrammeled power in the Government. 

 

Within the two blocs, there are two parties which conceivably 

might have dictatorial aspirations: the strongly nationalistic P.N.I. 

under Dr. Gani’s leadership, and the Communist Party (Partai 

 

 

 

POLITICAL ORGANIZATION OF THE REPUBLIC 65 

 

Komunis Indonesia) or P.K.I., under Sardjono, Daroesman 14 and 

Alimin. While the P.K.L itself will be discussed separately and fully 

later on, it can be stated here that any attempt by it to seize power 

would probably fail because of the combined opposition which it 

would meet from both the Socialist and Labor Parties, and the 

Benteng Republik. That the P.K.I, could form a Communist-domi- 

nated coalition with the Socialist and Labor Parties against the 

Benteng bloc is a political improbability because of the key position 

of the Masjoemi Party and the great influence which that party 

wields among the Moslem population of Java and Sumatra, The 

Masjoemi Party has always been a foe of Communism. 

 

Similarly, the Masjoemi Party can be relied upon to resist with 

the Sajap Kiri any unilateral attempt by the P.N.L to establish its 

supremacy in the Republican Government. Though neither the 

most progressive, dynamic or ambitious of the major political par- 

ties, the Masfoemi’s position as a conservative and stabilizing influ- 

ence in the future development of the Republic can hardly be over- 

emphasized. None of the other parties can risk being violently 

opposed by the Masjoemi in a struggle for power because of the Mas- 

joemi’s hold on the people and because of its position as the inter- 

preter of Islamic law. On the other hand, it is hardly conceivable 

that the Masjoemi itself might attempt to achieve a one-party dic- 

tatorship. The temper of its principles, its background, its leader- 

ship, and its expansive but loose organization are neither suited nor 

inclined toward centralization or concentration of power. However, 

while the leadership of this largest of the parries is conservative and 

cautious, and definitely inclined toward resisting any attempt at 

domination particularly leftist domination of the Government by 

any one party, it is not unlikely that if conditions warranted, the 

Masjoemi Party might come forward as sponsor of an Islamic Pan- 

Asia Movement, stretching from North Africa and the Middle East, 

through Pakistan in India, Southeast Asia and Indonesia. 

 

Another factor which would tend to offset any inchoate tendency 

toward totalitarianism is the absence of any strong, politically con- 

scious social elite in Indonesia. 15 In the Philippines, the Mestizo 

group to which Quezon, Osmena and Roxas belonged comprised a 

self-conscious and powerful economic and political elite which could 

and did take over the dominant governmental positions in the Phil- 

 

14 A Minister-without-Portfolio in the Sjarifoeddin Cabinet since July 1947. 

!5 This point was originally suggested to the author by Professor Raymond Kennedy, 

of Yale University, a sociologist who has studied Indonesia at some length. 

 

 

 

66 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

ippine Commonwealth even before the Philippines acquired inde- 

pendent status. In Java and Sumatra, on the other hand, the Dutch 

carefully avoided the formation of any similar class which eventually 

might act in opposition to their rule. While there is an old nobility 

in Java and Sumatra, it has grown somewhat effete in the last few 

generations. Its descendants are generally of two sorts: the quiet, 

dignified, completely un-political princes and lesser nobles who still 

retain their titles and social position as best they can in a rapidly 

changing social environment; and the dynamic, aggressive aristo- 

crats who have dropped their titles and joined the intellectual group 

at the helm of the Republic. 

 

There is no economic ruling clique within the Republic because 

there have been so few Indonesians who have ever produced and 

accumulated wealth under pre-war colonialism. There is, moreover, 

no military clique or any other group which, as such, would be 

likely to dominate the Government as an oligarchy. General Soe- 

dirman, the commander of the military forces, was a schoolmaster 

before the war, and while he and other officers are strong and some- 

times hot-headed, they appear to be actually, as well as nominally, 

controlled by the Minister of Defense. 

 

In short, the only apparent upper stratum is an intellectual one, 

which provides the leadership of the present Government. This 

group the educated, relatively enlightened, small minority has al- 

ways formed the core of the nationalist movement since its start 

forty years ago. It is a group of people whose social and economic 

origins and ideals are so widely different and even contrasting, that 

it cannot be considered academically or practically as the homo- 

geneous stuff which can form a ruling elite. While the personnel- 

short Republic will need all their services to function smoothly, they 

do not and cannot operate with anything approaching the unity and 

group-consciousness of a true ruling class. 

 

Finally, within the Republican Government itself there is no feel- 

ing of sacrosanctness or of infallibility, nor is there any tendency to- 

ward apotheosizing either the Government or its leaders. Soekarno 

is devotedly admired, but he is not deified. When he issued a decree 

increasing the size of the K.N.I.P. in February 1946, he was sharply 

and freely criticized in the Indonesian press, and his action was 

stormily debated by the K.N.LP. at its convention in Malang the 

following month. Both Soekarno and the other top leaders partic- 

ularly the colorful A. K. Gam are discussed, appraised and criti- 

cized, often jokingly and sarcastically, by other government per- 

 

 

 

POLITICAL ORGANIZATION OF THE REPUBLIC 67 

 

sonnel, young and old alike. There is a spirit of respect, but not of 

worship or constraint, on the part of the younger and minor officials 

in the Republican Ministries toward their chiefs. All of these top 

leaders-including Soekarno realize that they cannot govern with- 

out the support of individuals and groups which would oppose an 

attempt on their part to set up a totalitarian regime. 

 

While in its early years the Government has only begun walking 

the road toward democracy, it seems to be far enough along to 

make extremely improbable a deviation toward the path leading to 

dictatorship. The fact remains, however, that the constituents of the 

Republic of Indonesia are, in a somewhat over-simplified sense, of 

two as yet only remotely connected types: the young and old intellec- 

tuals at the top and the poor, “apolitical/’ uneducated peasants and 

manual laborers at the bottom of society. Until this latter mass has 

been uplifted economically and socially, and until the gap between 

the two groups has been narrowed and bridged by an aggressive 

and flourishing middle class, Indonesian democracy will, at best, be 

shallow and uncertain. The completion of this mammoth task is 

likely to take several generations even under favorable conditions. 

 

 

 

CHAPTER FIVE 

 

 

 

ECONOMIC PROBLEMS AND POLICIES 

 

 

 

Before entering a general discussion of the Republic’s overall 

economic policies, it will be well to estimate the specific economic 

progress which the Government has made since it started to function 

effectively in 1945, and to examine some of the institutional plans 

which it has already formulated. It should be mentioned that while 

economic affairs have become of increasing importance to the Re- 

public, the economic progress already made occurred against a back- 

ground in which political considerations were always of primary 

importance. 

 

Most of the economic aspects and institutions to be discussed here 

are canalized through the Ministries of Economic Affairs, of Finance, 

or of Social Affairs, and then, finally, into the Central Economic 

Planning Board, directed in 1947 by Vice-President Mohammed 

Hatta. It is, thus, one of the top political leaders who wields the 

greatest influence in the formulation and execution of economic 

policies. 

 

LABOR 

 

As already mentioned, a central Indonesian Labor Organization 

was formed in Djokjakarta in November 1946, called the Sentral 

Organisasi Boeroeh Seloeroe Indonesia (Central Organization of 

Indonesia Labor) or S.O.B.S.I. S.O.B.S.L superseded all previous 

attempts by the Republic to centralize labor organization and has 

come to include all labor unions active in Republican territory, i.e., 

both unions of the vertical C.I.O. type, and those of craft A.F. of L. 

variety. At the time of the formation of the S.O.B.S.L, the Associa- 

tion of Indonesian Craft Unions (Gaboengan Sarikat Boeroeh Indo- 

nesia) or G.S.B.L, voted to go out of existence, and the craft 

unions, which had constituted its membership, all joined the 

S.O.B.S.I. 

 

Under S.O.B.S.L each organization covers workers of all types 

 

68 

 

 

 

ECONC^flC PROBLEMS AND POLICIES 69 

 

within a given industry. This vertical plan has already been applied 

in the railroad industry, the oil industry, and the sugar, coffee, tea 

and rubber industries. Separate unions covering each of these indus- 

tries are now in operation within the overall framework of the cen- 

tral organization. While S.O.B.S.L policy favors the formation of 

these industrial unions, it also includes independent craft unions- 

such as those of the weavers, tailors and chauffeurs. In the spring of 

1947, the S.O.B.S.I. membership consisted of twenty-eight industrial 

and craft unions, with a total membership of approximately 1,200,- 

000. The separate unions and their respective branches and member- 

ships were as follows: * 

 

 

 

Name of Union 

 

1. Health and sanitation 

 

2. Tailors 

 

3. Printing 

 

4. Oil 

 

5. Pawnshops 

 

6. Ice 

 

7. Radio 

 

8. Female workers (Group) 

 

9. Weaving 

 

10. Cigarettes 

 

11. Opium and salt 

 

12. Railways 

 

13. Mines 

 

14. Sugar 

 

15. Gas and electricity 

 

16. Telephone, telegraph, and 

 

postal workers 

 

17. Ship and harbor workers 

 

18. Automobile drivers 

 

19. Bag manufacturing 

 

20. Cattle 

 

21. Forestry 

 

22. Teachers 

 

23. Public works 

 

24. Estate workers (rubber, quinine, 

 

tea, tobacco, coffee) 

 

25. House construction 

 

26. Prisons 

 

27. Public courts 

 

28. Banking 

 

Total 

 

 

 

Branches 

 

 

Members 

 

 

44 

 

 

5,000 

 

 

10 

 

 

2,286 

 

 

18 

 

 

3,900 

 

 

32 

 

 

16,000 

 

 

80 

 

 

4,500 

 

 

19 

 

 

750 

 

 

24 

 

 

800 

 

 

 

 

600 

 

 

 

 

4,741 

 

 

 

 

5,200 

 

 

30 

 

 

2,198 

 

 

76 

 

 

10,069 

 

 

 

 

10,000 

 

 

 

 

30,000 

 

 

29 

 

 

9,000 

 

 

42 

 

 

7,000 

 

 

13 

 

 

5,700 

 

 

42 

 

 

12,000 

 

 

 

 

2,200 

 

 

 

 

572 

 

 

 

 

18,000 

 

 

80 

 

 

25,000 

 

 

 

 

2,753 

 

 

ne, 

 

 

 

 

. . 

 

 

1,000,000 

 

 

 

 

8,450 

 

 

40 

 

 

8,000 

 

 

. . 

 

 

1,000 

 

 

67 

 

 

3,500 

 

 

 

1,199,219 

 

 

 

i Figures are from the Republican Ministry of Social Affairs, Djokjakarta, as of 

March 28, 1947. 

 

 

 

^O THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

The administration of the S.O.B.S.I. is governed by the organiza- 

tion’s constitution. This provides for an administrative body headed 

by a central bureau consisting of a board of directors, a planning 

board and a working board, all of them elected by the large Presid- 

ium Assembly. The Board of Directors is composed of the President, 

the Secretary-General, the Vice-President, and the heads of the plan- 

ning and working boards. The Board of Directors directs the policy 

and functioning of the Central Bureau and, through it, of the ad- 

ministrative structure. The final authority is the Presidium Assem- 

bly which consists of representatives of all the member unions. In 

the summer of 1947, the three top men in the S.O.B.S.I., who actu- 

ally handled the policy affairs of the organization, were its President, 

Soerjono, its Vice-President, Setiadjit, and its Secretary-General, 

Hardjono. Setiadjit was also Deputy Prime Minister in the Cabinet 

and Chairman of the Labor Party. The other two top officials were 

without party affiliations or political office. 

 

The platform of the S.O.B.S.I. is based on the following five major 

points: 

 

1. The freedom of Indonesia requires as a sine qua non the recogni- 

tion of the right of Indonesian labor to organize freely. 

 

2. While foreign investment is to be sought and encouraged in the 

economic rehabilitation of Indonesia, Indonesian labor must organize 

strongly in order to defend itself against unfair exploitation by foreign 

capitalism. 

 

3. Indonesian labor must direct its efforts toward furthering the de- 

velopment of political and economic democracy founded on social justice 

and having as its aim the welfare of the Indonesian people. 

 

4. To help achieve political and economic democracy based on social 

justice, and to insure improvement in the workers’ standard of living, the 

nationalization of public utilities is deemed advisable. 

 

5. Indonesian labor must exchange information and endeavor to estab- 

lish contact with labor movements abroad. 

 

While the S.O.B.S.L thus has as its major aim the protection of 

the rights of Indonesian labor and is not, strictly speaking, a politi- 

cal party, it has, nevertheless, a representation of approximately 35 

members in the K.N.I.P. 2 In general, S.O.B.S.I.’s representation in 

the K.N.I.P. has solidly backed the Sajap Kiri or Left-wing Group 

policies, already referred to in Chapter IV. It is likely that organized 

labor in Indonesia will grow rapidly in the next decade, and that 

 

2 S.O.B.SJ/S representation is separate from the Labor Party’s representation, and 

that of the League of Small Farmers, both of which organizations are indirectly con- 

cerned with the protection of labor’s rights. Cf. Chapter IV, p. 56. 

 

 

 

ECONOMIC PROBLEMS AND POLICIES 71 

 

with it will come a vast expansion in the size and influence of the 

S.O.B.S.L 

 

BANKING AND CURRENCY 

 

The Republican Banking System consists of five banks. At their 

head is the Bank Negara Indonesia or Indonesian State Bank. This 

bank has functioned as a “banker’s bank” and as the Republic’s bank 

of issue since the first Republican currency was put into circulation 

on October 30, 1946. At that time, the State Bank called in all the 

Japanese occupation money which was still in circulation in Repub- 

lican areas, and in exchange issued the Indonesian rupiah. The 

rupiah which was brought into general use in the Republican terri- 

tories is a coarsely-printed, easily-counterfeited currency which will 

have to be replaced when better paper and printing facilities become 

available. 3 

 

The State Bank is a Government-owned bank, but it works with, 

rather than under, the Republican Ministry of Finance. Its director 

in 1947 was Margono Djojohadikoesomo, and its assistant director 

Sabaroedin. Along with the Minister of Economic Affairs and the 

Minister of Finance, these two men played important roles in the 

application of the financial policies decided upon by Hatta’s Plan- 

ning Board. 

 

s The State Bank in 1947 issued quotations for the exchange of Republican rupiahs 

against foreign currencies The bank-buying rate for U.S dollars in terms of rupiahs 

was quoted at R. 2 10 = $1 ? while the selling rate was R. 2 SO $1. For the British 

pound, the buying rate quoted was R. 8 10 = 1, and the selling rate R. 865 = 1. 

For the Australian pound the corresponding quotations \*ere R, 650 and R. 6.70, 

while the Straits dollar was quoted at 90 Republican cents for buying transactions and 

97 cents for selling transactions. 

 

These exchange quotations were primarily of academic rather than of practical inter- 

est since there was practicalh no exchange between Republican currency and foreign 

currencies at these rates Exchange between Republican and foreign currencies, to the 

limited extent that it actually did take place, was at a black-market rate many times 

above the quoted figures. The exchange quotations listed here must therefore be re- 

garded simply as an index of the value of the Republican rupiah toward which the 

Republic was striving, and which it hoped it would eventually be able to maintain 

on a purchasing power parity or balance of payments basis, when trade and exports 

were functioning again. 

 

The Indonesian State Bank is apparently aware that the various nominal foreign ex- 

change rates quoted for the Republican currency do not give the correct cross rates, 

as may be seen from the fact that during most of that year the American dollar was 

quoted at 2-10 rupiahs and the British pound at 8 10 rupiahs, instead of 8.40 ru- 

piahs, which would be expected according to the parity level of 1 = $4. The State 

Bank explained this as an indication of the relative special premium which the Re- 

public was at the time placing on the American currency. 

 

In connection with the counterfeiting of Republican rupiahs, an interesting case 

occurred in Batavia. A Chinese was arrested by the Dutch police for counterfeiting the 

easily-duplicated Republican money for use in Batavia’s black markets. His defense 

was that since, according to Dutch law, the rupiah was not legal currency, he could 

not legally be charged with issuing its counterfeit. He was held anyhow. 

 

 

 

72 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

Under this central bank are four depositors’ or commercial banks, 

two of which are controlled directly by the Government, and the 

other two of which are privately owned. One of the Government 

banks, the Bank Rajat or People’s Bank, specializes in small agricul- 

tural and fishery loans but extends some loans to individuals as well. 

During the first quarter of 1947, the Ban k Rajat lent a total of 

approximately 33 million rupiahs for agricultural and fishery loans. 

 

The two privately owned Indonesian banks are commercial banks 

specializing in larger agricultural loans and in loans for purposes 

of internal trade and production. These two banks are the Bank 

Nasional Indonesia, or National Bank, and the Bank of Soerakarta. 

Both of them are somewhat smaller in their operations than are the 

other three Indonesian banks. 

 

Finally, there is the Perseroan Bank dan Perniagan or Banking 

and Trading Corporation, established on January 1, 1947, which in 

all probability will play a major role in building up Indonesian 

commerce. 

 

The B.T.C. was formed by the Republican Government for three 

purposes: (1) to expedite and direct exports from and imports to 

Indonesian areas; 4 (2) to furnish loans for private traders; and (3) 

to make the most efficient use of the foreign exchange that is ob- 

tained from exports in order to finance the most essential imports. 

The Corporation is to have an authorized capital of 20 million ru- 

piahs, 60 per cent of which will be furnished by the Government, 

and 40 per cent of which will be obtained by selling shares to the 

public. Public sale of shares had not yet taken place at the end of 

the year, and since its formation the B.T.C. has functioned solely 

on Government capital. 

 

The B.T.C. was in 1947 under the direction of an Indonesian 

economist, Dr. Soemitro Djojohadikoesomo, and its Vice-Director 

was a Chinese lawyer, Dr. Ong Eng Djie. 5 It is intended that the 

B.T.C. will eventually function throughout the Republican areas 

although, to begin with, its activities were confined to Java. 

 

It is also intended that the B.T.C. will temporarily handle the 

export of those goods to which the Republic itself has title, and will 

act on behalf of the Government to finance the import program 

 

4 The B.T.C. was formed at a time when all Republican ports were blockaded by 

the Dutch Navy to prevent the possible export of European-owned estate produce by 

the Republic. The B.T.C.’s operations have been hampered by this blockade ever 

since its inception, so that it is difficult to judge accurately the magnitude of the role 

which it will play in commercial rehabilitation. That the B.T.C.’s role will be con- 

siderable, however, is likely. 

 

5 Dr, Ong also was Vice-Minister of Finance in the Sjarifoeddin Cabinet. 

 

 

 

ECONOMIC PROBLEMS AND POLICIES 73 

 

which the Ministry of Economic Affairs is drawing up. In both of 

these respects the B.T.C. will function through the Ministry of Eco- 

nomic Affairs. However, it has been stated that the B.T.C. will not 

be operated as a trading monopoly. Instead, its facilities are to be 

used to encourage private export and import especially through the 

extension of loans to private traders. It is worth mentioning that 

the B.T.C.’s task of building up private Indonesian business is a 

sizable one. To the writer’s knowledge, there are no more than 

a dozen large Indonesian business firms with sufficient capital and 

experience to operate on their own. s 

 

PUBLIC WORKS 

 

In April 1947, the Ministry of Public Works began an extensive 

program of repairing damaged bridges, improving and extending 

irrigation works, rehabilitating roads and harbors, and constructing 

new homes in the Republican areas of Java. 

 

In an official release, the Ministry announced that new roads 

would be constructed in the southern part of Java, particularly tc 

facilitate interior communication with the ports of Tjilatjap, Gen- 

teng, Plabuan Ratu and Tjilaut Bureun. Several of the Republic’s 

few technical experts were sent to Sumatra to improve irrigation 

works and roads there and to make preparations for the migration 

of rural population from Java. The migration scheme will be dis- 

cussed below. 

 

Dr. Laoh, the Minister of Public Works, also announced that 

housing facilities in Republican cities would be expanded and water- 

supply and power systems more extensively developed in this 

connection. 

 

Once it is able to secure equipment and foreign capital, the Re- 

public hopes to increase and intensify its program of public works. 

It had already made the first beginnings toward implementation of 

this ambitious program when the military action of July 21 broke 

out. The resulting damages have handicapped the public works 

program of the Republic, and have increased the magnitude of the 

tasks of the Public Works Ministry, 

 

The largest of these firms is the Dasaad Musin Concern, a holding company con- 

trolling an export and import company and a textile mill. Before the war, It did a 

business of about fl0,000,000 or about $5,000,00Q at pre-war rates of exchange. Mr. 

Dasaad, the head of the firm, in 1947 completed a trip around the world to open 

branch offices and make business contacts in America, Holland, Great Britain, France, 

Switzerland and Belgium. It was thought likely that his business would expand greatly 

in the next decade. In other cases, however, the B.T.C. was expected to meet more 

difficulties in attempting to build up a sound and profitable network of private Indo- 

nesian commercial firms. 

 

 

 

74 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

MIGRATION OF FARMERS AND LABORERS FROM JAVA TO SUMATRA 

 

The Government in the summer of 1947 announced a plan for 

the movement ‘of about 10,000 Javanese families, totaling about 

50,000 people, from over-populated areas in Java to under-populated 

areas in Sumatra. The plan is still only in the blueprint stage and 

will have to await a political settlement before it can be imple- 

mented. Its very scale, while it has given rise to criticism, is an 

indication of the forward-looking planning the Republican Minis- 

tries have embarked upon. 

 

It is the Government’s intention to gather the prospective migra- 

tors in the capitals of the various Residencies in Java, and to send 

them to their destinations in Sumatra by way of East or West Java 

ports. Each family will be allowed to take along all its possessions at 

the expense of the Government, which will also endeavor to provide 

the necessary equipment for the farmers to cultivate the land on 

which they settle. Dr. Isa, the Republican Governor of South Su- 

matra, has stated that 5,000 families can be received in the Lampong 

and Benkoelen districts of South Sumatra, and that measures to 

ensure the equitable allotment of land to each family are already 

under consideration. To help each family get started, the Govern- 

ment will give it an initial credit of 500 rupiahs. 

 

Many Indonesians believe that success of this migration plan will 

be vital for the economic development and well-being of the Repub- 

lic. If a large labor force is available in Sumatra, the development 

of that island’s vast economic potential may be accelerated. Large- 

scale inter-island migration can also do much to relieve the pressure 

on Java’s densely populated land, and to improve the living stand- 

ards of its fifty million inhabitants. To aid the plan’s success the 

Republican Ministry of Social Affairs which is in charge of the 

planhas studied the results of the numerous migration schemes 

which were unsuccessfully attempted under colonial auspices, be- 

tween 1920 and 1940. 

 

According to Abdoel Madjid, former Vice-Minister of Social 

Affairs, and later Vice-Minister of Home Affairs, there were several 

reasons why these pre-war plans were never successful. First, they 

were always tried on too small a scale: not more than half a million 

Javanese were moved to Sumatra during the entire twenty-year pe- 

riod in which the plans were in operation. As a result, the migrants 

were too few in number to organize effectively into prosperous com- 

munities and hence began to feel nostalgic and discontented. Sec- 

 

 

 

ECONOMIC PROBLEMS AND POLICIES 75 

 

ondly, Mr. Madjid believes that the Dutch pre-war schemes for 

migration from Java usually imolved migration of only parts ot 

several Ja\anese kampongs or villages, instead of keeping village 

populations intact. This had the result of separating the new mi- 

grants from their elders and from the adat or customary law which 

was bound up with the organization of the kampong as a whole. 

Third, the Dutch plans lacked an incentive because they never pro- 

vided adequate guarantees that accustomed social conditions would 

be maintained and the level of economic conditions be considerably 

improved through the migration. 

 

The Social Affairs Ministry has tried to take cognizance of these 

weaknesses and to make allowances for them by specific provisions 

in its own plans. First of all, it is the ambitious intention of the 

Ministry to handle large numbers of people as the plan evolves in 

order to drain off most of the estimated yearly increase of 600,000 

persons in the excess population of Java. Furthermore, the Indo- 

nesian plan will not separate segments of compact Javanese village 

communities but will try to transplant the whole kampong, includ- 

ing the headman, the priest, the goeroe or teacher, and the members 

of the kampong council. Finally, incentives will be offered to pros- 

pective migrants in the form of monetary guarantees that living 

conditions will be improved, and verbal assurance that the migrants 

will be fully protected and aided by the Government in the exercise 

of their own adat and the setting up of their own communities. 

 

If the plan seems over-ambitious, it is recognized that its develop 

ment will take time and considerable initial expense. Officials of the 

Ministry of Social Affairs hope that the Republic will be able to 

secure aid from abroad in financing the scheme over a period of 

years. Optimism as to the possibilities of the plan’s success is running 

high, notwithstanding the unsuccessful attempts which the Dutch 

administration made along these lines before the war. 

 

GOVERNMENT INDUSTRIAL ADMINISTRATIVE BOARDS 

 

Since the latter part of 1946, four Government administrative 

boards have been functioning in a managerial capacity in industry. 

They were set up to direct rehabilitation and production in the 

textile industry, the sugar-refining industry, agricultural estate indus- 

tries, and miscellaneous industries. They were appointed by Presi- 

dent Soekarno and in 1947 worked under the central direction of 

Vice-President Hatta’s Economic Planning Board. Their activities 

were also under surveillance by an investigation commission of the 

 

 

 

76 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

K.N.I.P., under the chairmanship of Tan Ling Djie, Secretary of 

the Socialist Party and a member of the K.N.I.P. Working Com- 

mittee. 

 

While little specific information concerning their activities was 

available to the public, the following facts were ascertainable. The 

four boards are composed of technicians and members of the differ- 

ent political parties and handle the overall direction of each partic- 

ular industry in its managerial aspects e.g., labor relations, material 

procurement, and so forth. The boards thus far established were: 

(1) Textile Board (Badan Tex til Negara); (2) Sugar-Factory Control 

Board (Badan Penjelengara Goela Negara); (3) Estate-Industries 

Board (Badan Perkeboenan Negara)] (4) General Industries Board 

(Badan Indoestri Negara). According to reports brought back to 

Batavia by the Koets Mission and later by the International Emer- 

gency Food Council sugar mission, as well as by numerous un- 

official observers, the boards have made considerable progress in 

their work. Under their guidance, most of the industrial plants 

which could function temporarily without new equipment from 

abroad were in action. The sugar mission of the I.E.F.C., in fact, 

appeared to be impressed by the industrial activity it found in the 

interior of Java. However, it is likely that the military action and 

scorched-earth which began on July 21, 1947, will have affected 

industrial recovery adversely. 

 

RICE SHIPMENTS TO INDIA 

 

In July 1946, the Republican Government concluded an agree- 

ment with the Interim Government of India whereby the Republic 

agreed to provide approximately 400,000 tons of rice in exchange 

for textiles, agricultural implements, tires, and other “incentive” 7 

goods which India would send to the Republic for use in economic 

rehabilitation in Indonesian territories. The agreement was con- 

cluded secretly between the two parties and was later presented to 

the Dutch Government and British-occupation commander as a fait 

accompli. Despite initial objections on the Dutch side on the 

grounds that the rice was needed in Indonesia and that the agree- 

ment was a violation of the legal Dutch sovereignty throughout 

 

^ Money wages have often proved ineffective as an inducement to peasants to leave 

their fields, if there were not available for purchase on local markets the kind of con- 

sumer goods which the peasants had learned to value, or if such goods were too expen- 

sive for then- limited purchasing power. Especially small imported household goods, 

textiles, and other articles known to be attractive to potential wage earners therefore 

have come to be known as “incentive goods” in business and official circles. 

 

 

 

ECONONfIC PROBLEMS AND POLICIES 77 

 

Indonesia since it had been negotiated with an “illegal” political 

entity, namely the Republic the agreement was finally approved 

with certain qualifications by both the Dutch and the British. 

 

With India supplying the ships, obtained from the British Minis- 

try of War Transport, and trucks for moving the rice from the inte- 

rior of Java to East Java ports, the agreement began to be imple- 

mented at the beginning of September 1946, Although the hopes of 

the original agreement were never fulfilled because of transportation 

and administrative difficulties which were later encountered, the Re- 

public did manage to deliver approximately 60,000 tons within the 

next ten months. The rice exports helped little to ease India’s criti- 

cal food shortage but did help to cement India’s friendship with 

the Republic: the effort on the Indonesian side later paid dividends 

when, after the Dutch military action of July 21, India introduced 

the subject of Indonesia to the Security Council’s agenda at Lake 

Success. The rice agreement therefore was more significant as a po- 

litical than as an economic measure. 

 

LONG-RUN ECONOMIC POLICIES 

 

In general, it can be said that the Republic of Indonesia stands 

for a long-run economic program of extensive socialization. Although 

the uncertainty and fluidity of current political conditions in Indo- 

nesia make it impossible to evaluate the Republic’s economic poli- 

cies with any degree of finality, it is nevertheless possible to make 

certain reasonably accurate generalizations concerning these policies 

and the direction in which they point. It is always possible, however, 

that military or other developments in Indonesia may alter either the 

substance of the Republic’s economic policies, or the leadership be- 

hind these policies when the situation again becomes stabilized. 

 

Moreover, precisely where these policies will fit into, and in what 

respects they will have to be modified in connection with, the pro- 

jected United States of Indonesia and the Netherlands-Indonesian 

Union cannot yet be definitely established. It appears likely, how- 

ever, that in the long run these policies may govern the economic 

reorganization of the Republican areas of Java and Sumatra and 

may exert a considerable influence on the reorganization of the 

economy of the Indies as a whole. 

 

The formulation of the Republic’s economic policy has been con- 

centrated in the hands of the Vice-President, Mohammed Hatta, 

while its chief spokesman was the colorful Dr. A. K. Gani, Deputy 

Prime Minister and Minister of Economic Affairs in the Sjarifoeddin 

 

 

 

78 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

Cabinet, who represented the Republic at the United Nations Con- 

ference on World Trade and Employment at Havana in November 

1947. Hatta prefers to remain out of the limelight and hence has 

received far less publicity than his power and influence in the 

Government would normally warrant. As chairman of the Central 

Economic Planning Board, he was largely responsible for charting 

and planning the broader aspects of the Republic’s economic policy. 

The policy directives of the Planning Board were then correlated 

and enunciated by Gani, as in the case of his “Ten-Year-Plan” which 

will be discussed later on in this chapter. A former medical doctor 

and actor, Gani is a thoroughly likable extrovert, but not an econ- 

omist. The superior technical background and education of Hatta 

made it only appropriate that the top-level planning and final de- 

cision should rest with him. Except for possible political changes 

that cannot be foreseen, it is probable that he will have a large voice 

in determining the extent to which the economic policies, as they 

crystallized in the early years, may veer to the left or the right in the 

years to come. 

 

SOCIALIZATION AND PRIVATE ENTERPRISE 

 

As has been intimated, the Republic advocates the immediate na- 

tionalization of public utilities and public works, including gas, 

water and electric works, railroads, civil aviation (as it develops), 

telephone and telegraph communications, of banking, and of rice 

mills. The Government recognizes, however, that it will not imme- 

diately be in a technical or financial position to nationalize the econ- 

omy as a whole; and for this reason, it intends that most of the 

technical and detailed tasks, aside from those connected with utilities, 

banking and rice mills, shall be dealt with by private enterprise 

operating under some measure of Government control. In this 

connection, the distinction made between socialization and social 

control in a statement by the former Vice-Minister of Economic 

Affairs, Saksono, is worth noting: 

 

“In conformity with the policy of controlled economy, some vital in- 

dustries will be taken over by the Government. However, this should 

only apply to really vital industries, while other industries belonging to 

private individuals . . . will be allowed to carry on, and if such were 

formerly in the Government’s hands, they will be returned to the rightful 

owners. Where necessary,, the industries which are thus returned may be 

supervised by the Government. . . .” 8 

 

8 Published in Ma’moer (Wealth), Batavia, Nov. 15, 1946. 

 

 

 

ECONOMIC PROBLEMS AND POLICIES 79 

 

It is to be anticipated that estate agriculture and private export 

trade will be allowed to function, but it is the Government’s appar- 

ent policy not only to exercise some control over working conditions 

and wages attendant on such private enterprise, but also to exercise 

close control over the foreign exchange proceeds obtained from all 

exports in order to make certain that this exchange is utilized to 

finance those imports which are most needed by the exchange-short 

economy as a whole. Tentatively, in other words, a new sort of dual 

economy 9 is envisioned, with certain fields remaining within die 

purview of private enterprise including most estate cultivation, 

such as rubber, coffee, tea, and perhaps sugar, substantial foreign 

commerce, and petroleum exploitation and others being national- 

ized and operated by the Government. While the co-existence and 

“mixed company of state and private (both foreign and domestic) 

capital” 10 is advocated, private capital will be subject to the social 

and economic legislation of the Government in such matters as 

minimum wages, land rents, working conditions, and labor relations 

generally. 

 

Foreign-exchange control is likely to continue for some time to 

come, or at least until the shortage of dollar exchange on the one 

hand, and the vast import requirements for economic rehabilita- 

tion, 11 on the other, can be alleviated by exports or financial aid 

from abroad. The Ministry of Economic Affairs has stated, in this 

connection, that: 

 

“. . . the Government should exercise authority over the proceeds 

derived from exports in order that the foreign exchange be used for the 

purchase of the most necessary imports. The particulars involved in the 

regular operation of the exportation of goods can be turned over to 

private enterprises or non-official agencies, but their sales transactions 

should be officially supervised and approved by the Government. . . .” 12 

 

MONOPOLY 

 

In general, the Republic is opposed to monopolies and to monop- 

olistic practices. It is known to be unfavorably disposed toward con- 

 

9 In the past it was customary to speak of the almost separate functioning of modern 

and largely non-Indonesianenterprise and “native” enterprise as making up Indo- 

nesia’s “dual economy.” 

 

ia Quoted from Dr. Gani’s statement to the press on economic policy, Batavia, April 

8, 1947. 

 

11 Estimated at perhaps one billion dollars. 

 

12 From an article entitled “Commercial Policies,” appearing in Berita Perekonomian, 

June 15, 1946, published in the Indonesian language by the Republican Ministry of 

Economic Affairs, Batavia. 

 

 

 

8o THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

tinuation of the special privileges enjoyed before the war by the 

Royal Dutch Navigation Company (K.P.M.), the Phillips Radio 

Company, and the Netherlands Gas Company, amo’ng others, either 

in the form of government subsidy or in that of special patent or 

license arrangements. While it has been emphasized that the Gov- 

ernment should “always strive to bring about a close cooperation 

with private enterprise/’ 13 it has also been stated that: 

 

“The limit of authority on both sides should be distinctly drawn up, 

thus facilitating the desired coordination between Government and 

private enterprise. . . . Furthermore, the Government should always see 

to it that this coordination is not limited to a few big enterprises as 

occurred during the former restriction policy of the Netherlands Indies 

Government, since this would only mean the re-establishment of monop- 

olistic rights for big business. In the economic rehabilitation of Indo- 

nesia, we should . . . attempt to make certain that the germs of monopoly 

are forever stamped out/’ 14 

 

In his Ten Year Economic Plan, Dr. Gani strongly reiterated the 

anti-monopoly position of the Republic. It is, however, not unlikely 

that the Republic may be sympathetic toward proposals that it grant 

certain aid and preferences to Indonesian industries, as part of its 

long-run program of developing local industry complementary to 

that of agriculture. 

 

FOREIGN INVESTMENT 

 

Republican leadership recognizes the need for foreign capital and 

foreign investment in the economic reconstruction of Indonesia. 

There seems to be a realistic recognition that aid and investment 

from abroad will considerably increase the pace at which reconstruc- 

tion can proceed and at which the general standard of living can be 

raised. Despite the planned economy aimed at by the Republican 

Government and its desire to nationalize the basic utilities, it ap- 

pears to be convinced that its economy can only be industrialized 

and revitalized by drawing on technical know-how and equipment 

from abroad, through foreign investment. 15 

 

Foreign properties and capital remaining from before the war will 

be returned to their rightful owners according to Article 14 of the 

Linggadjati Agreement, except in cases where the public welfare 

may require continued Government operation. In all such cases, 

 

is From Berita Perekonomian, June 1, 1946. 

 

i* Ibid. 

 

15 See the Political Manifesto of the Republic, Appendix, p. 174. 

 

 

 

ECONOMIC PROBLEMS AND POLICIES 8l 

 

Government operation and ownership will occur after compensation 

to the principals concerned, according to Dr. Gani. Furthermore, the 

Republic evidently intends to take up the contractual obligations 

incurred by the Netherlands Indies Government with foreign capital 

before the war. In this connection Dr, Gani has stated: 

 

“The Republican Government is not going to annul contracts with in- 

\ested foreign capital and make new ones, but the companies concerned 

will have to recognize the Republican Government as their partner in- 

stead of the Netherlands Indies Government.” 16 

 

While the Republic thus seems to recognize the need for foreign 

investment and technical know-how, there remains among its leaders 

a fear of economic domination from abroad. In January 1947, at the 

Youth Congress in Soerakarta, Dr. Hatta voiced this fear when he 

stated: 

 

“In reconstructing our economy, we must deal with realities. We are 

at present poor and possess only our man power, which has been seriously 

decimated by the Japanese. . . . Despite our poverty, we are rich because 

our soil is fruitful and can produce wide varieties of products. … In 

rebuilding our economy we will have need of foreign capital . . . but we 

must utilize this capital as an efficient and constructive tool, or else we 

shall find ourselves once again economically dominated.” 

 

It therefore appears likely that the Republic, while welcoming 

foreign investment, will nevertheless attach certain conditions to its 

use in Indonesia. For example, according to Dr. Hatta, the Republic 

will not allow foreign investments to establish commercial monop- 

olies. Furthermore, the Government will probably assert its right to 

decide the minimum percentage of Indonesian employees which a 

foreign enterprise must employ, as well as to make laws concerning 

wages, hours, and working conditions that must prevail in foreign- 

controlled enterprises in Indonesia. 

 

It is generally recognized that such Government intervention in 

foreign enterprises must be moderate in order not to alienate them, 

but it is felt that even with a modicum of Government control, as 

outlined above, Indonesia will still offer a prospect of sufficiently 

high return on investment so that foreign capital will be attracted 

once conditions of stability have been re-established. 

 

In its attitude toward investment by particular nationals, there is 

some evidence that the Republic is becoming acutely conscious 

 

i Statement to the press on economic policy, Batavia, April 8, 1947. 

 

 

 

82 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

that its geographical position links it economically to those nations 

on the shores of the Pacific, including those of North and South 

America, and on the continents of Asia and Australia. Dr. Gani has 

indicated his feeling that, while some foreign investment in Indo- 

nesia will certainly come from Europe, in the future investment will 

be particularly welcome from the United States and Australia, since 

Indonesia must increasingly tend to shape its economy in terms of 

the trade requirements of these and other Pacific nations. 

 

OTHER ECONOMIC PLANS 

 

Republican economic leadership envisions a program of increas- 

ing industrialization, but of a sort complementary to the agrarian 

basis of Indonesian economic life, rather than as a substitute for it. 

There seems to be general recognition of the fact that Indonesia 

must remain essentially agrarian for some time to come. However, 

it is anticipated that industrialization in increasing the level of 

agricultural and non-agricultural output can expedite rehabilita- 

tion and help to raise the standard of living. Industrialization will 

also be necessary to diversify the economy’s structure, and to shift 

labor from the land to light industry. In this way, it may be possible 

to increase the elasticity of supply of Indonesia’s agricultural prod- 

uce in periods of changing prices, and thus to prevent a repetition 

of the 1929-32 world market glutting. 

 

Furthermore, while a seller’s market still exists for most of the 

produce of Indonesia, agricultural exports can be the means of ac- 

quiring the foreign exchange necessary for further industrialization. 

Before any headway can be made in this direction, the current po- 

litical situation must be cleared up and the economic blockade of 

Republican areas be lifted. 

 

In general, it appears likely that, in the process of industrializa- 

tion, Java will be developed as the rice supplier for the rest of the 

Republic in order to make the whole of Indonesia self-sufficient with 

respect to minimum food requirements, while Sumatra will be ex- 

ploited to furnish the export produce for sale on world markets to 

provide the foreign exchange needed to finance imports. This, of 

course, is a long-run policy only. For a long time to come Java will 

probably continue to contribute largely to exports when a solution 

of the as-yet-unsolved political problem again makes feasible exten- 

sive trade with the outside world. 

 

As part of its program of gradual industrialization, the Republic 

is known to favor the formation of strong labor organizations. In 

 

 

 

ECONOMIC PROBLEMS AND POLICIES 83 

 

fact, it appears to regard the strength of these organizations as a 

guarantee that foreign enterprises, though active in certain areas of 

the economy, will not be in a position to exploit the workers. As 

Dr. Hatta has stated: 

 

“We should realize that a powerful labor organization will be neces- 

sary in order to resist the attempt of foreign capital to dominate. … If 

we have such an organization then we have nothing to fear [from the re- 

turn of foreign properties and capital to their rightful owners]. . . /’ 17 

 

The beginnings of this “strong labor organization” are firmly 

founded in the Central Organization of Indonesian Labor or 

S.O.B.S.I. (Sentral Orgamsasi Boeroeh Seloeroeh Indonesia), which 

has already been discussed. 

 

A strong labor organization, it is thought, will induce foreign 

enterprises to pay adequate wages and maintain suitable working 

conditions, without requiring the Government to step in. In other 

words, paradoxically. Republican leadership seems to think that the 

existence of a strong labor organization may thus make possible less, 

rather than more, Government control in that sector of the economy. 

 

THE TEN- YEAR PLAN 

 

As a first step towards the clarification of its economic policies, 

the Republic has formulated a tentative “Ten-Year Plan.” This was 

announced by Dr. Gani to the press in broad outline on April 8, 

1947, but its execution will have to await a change in the political 

situation. The plan includes the following major points: 

 

L Establishment of minimum wage rates and improvement in the 

health and hygienic conditions of labor; 

 

2. Elimination of illiteracy and expansion of educational facilities; 

 

3. Establishment of strong cooperative organizations for peasants and 

laborers, supplemented by legislation to protect the rights of wage-earn- 

ers and farmers; 

 

4. Industrialization in such a way that “a link will be maintained with 

agriculture”; 

 

5. Establishment of “a horizontal form of village industry supported 

by … small state credit”; 

 

6. Building up Indonesian export trade by initial grants of state 

credit; 

 

7. Expansion of state-owned public works and public utilities; 

 

8. Encouragement and development of inter-island shipping, to pre- 

vent the growth of shipping monopolies; 

 

17 Quoted from Hatta’s speech at Soerakarta, January 1947. 

 

 

 

84 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

9. Appointment of foreign experts and technicians as Government ad- 

visers in education, finance, economics, agriculture, transportation, in- 

dustry and military affairs, but granting “no monopoly in this respect . . . 

to any particular country”; 

 

10. A new program of transmigration from overpopulated regions (in 

Java) to thinly populated regions (in Sumatra); 

 

11. Expansion of Indonesia’s international trade, in such a way as to 

prevent the development of commercial monopolies; 

 

12. Encouragement of the “mixed company of state and private (for- 

eign and domestic) capital in the economy”; 

 

13. Soliciting a foreign loan and floating an internal national loan, 

to finance economic rehabilitation. 

 

The Ten-Year Plan is, it will be seen, broad. Its economic policies 

envision far-reaching and ambitious changes. They place weighty re- 

sponsibilities on the young shoulders of the new Government, 

responsibilities which may be borne with some prospects of success 

but only if the elaborate blueprint is supplemented by efficient and 

high-minded administration. 

 

COMMUNISM 

 

The economic policies and plans enumerated above are based on 

the relatively moderate and sober currents in Republican economic 

thinking. In this connection, it is worthwhile examining briefly 

those forces which might given the catalysis of continuing strife and 

instability in Indonesia divert the Republic’s policies more and 

more to the left. In the author’s opinion these forces exist but are 

still only in an inchoate stage. There is nothing in Indonesia that 

can yet be called a Communist “menace,” but this does not mean 

that one may not arise. 

 

In the first place, it is worth noting that neither the S.O.B.S.I. nor 

the Labor Party are controlled by Communists, although both labor 

groups advocate socialistic economic policies. Politically, both groups 

have backed the Republican Government and have been part of the 

Sajap Kin } the Left-wing group which has favored moderation and 

compromise in negotiating with the Dutch, and has opposed the 

more militant stand of the Nationalist and Masjoemi Parties,. 

 

The S.O.B.S.I. Congress held in Malang from May 16 to 18, 1947, 

was given considerable publicity by the Dutch press in Batavia and 

in Holland as an indication of the strong Communist influence 

which, it was asserted, pervades the Indonesian labor movement. It 

appears that the publicity was designed as much to discredit the 

labor movement and indirectly the Republic (particularly in the 

 

 

 

ECONOMIC PROBLEMS AND POLICIES 85 

 

eyes of the United States), as it was to make known the truth about 

Communism in Indonesia. 

 

Of course, there were Communistic rumblings at Malang. The 

featured speakers at the Congress were a group of Australian and 

Dutch labor leaders, including the Messrs. Campbell and Roach, 

who are active in Australia’s leftist dockworkers’ union and may 

well have access to Communist Party funds, as well as the Messrs, 

Blokzijl and Vijlbrief, who are known to have connections with the 

party in Holland. The speeches made by this group of fellow-travel- 

ers were loosely-reasoned samples of blatant incitement, but the re- 

ception which they received was cool and unenthusiastic. As one 

high Indonesian official said afterwards, when queried: “There was 

nothing at Malang which was Communistic except certain slightly 

foolish statements by foreign Communists.” While the S.O.B.S.I. 

Congress at Malang may be significant as a harbinger of future Com- 

munistic influence (given a prolongation of strife in Indonesia), it 

can be stated that the labor movement in Indonesia is neither in the 

grip nor under the influence of Communism as yet. 

 

In appraising the strength of Communism in the Republic, it is 

also worth noting that of the strongest men in the present govern- 

ment none is a member or partisan o any Communist Party, Indo- 

nesian or foreign. 18 On the contrary, the President, Soekarno, and 

the Vice-President, Hatta, have, for substantial portions of their po- 

litical careers, been associated with the rightist Nationalist Party, 

of which Dr. Gani, Deputy Prime Minister and Minister of Eco- 

nomic Affairs, was chairman in 1947. Of the other leaders in the 

1947 Government, Sjarifoeddin, the Prime Minister, and Sjahrir are 

members of the Socialist Party, and Setiadjit, a co-Deputy Prime 

Minister, belongs to the Labor Party. While Sjahrir, Sjarifoeddin, 

and Setiadjit all favor strongly socialistic economic policies, none of 

them is connected with or leans toward Russian Communism. 19 

 

There are, however, other points of which cognizance must be 

taken in appraising the strength and influence of Communism in 

Indonesia today. For one thing, three Communist members of youth 

organizations in Russia, Yugoslavia, and France went into the inte- 

rior of Java in May 1947, in response to an invitation which they 

 

is In the Sjarifoeddin Cabinet, of 1947, one out of thirty-three seats was held by a 

Communist: Daroesman, a minister without portfolio. 

 

is Sjarifoeddin was jailed for one month in 1940, because of his alleged connection 

with the Indonesian Communist Party. Actually, his imprisonment was because of his 

chairmanship of the Gerindo, an implacably nationalistic party which advocated radical 

opposition to Dutch rule. 

 

 

 

86 THE INDONESIAN STORY 

 

had solicited and received at the New Delhi Inter-Asian Conference 

on March 23, 1947. The purpose of their visit presumably was to 

make contact with Indonesian youth groups on behalf of the World 

Federation of Youth Organizations, and to extend invitations to the 

Indonesian groups to send delegates to the W.F.Y.O. congress in 

Prague later in the year. There is little doubt, however, that the 

actual scope of their visit was broader than this single mission. 

 

There have also been rumors that a trading organization might 

be set up by the Republic and the Australian Communist Party to 

monopolize trade between Australia and Indonesia. The rumor ap- 

pears to be highly unlikely. In reply to queries relating to it, both 

Hatta and Gani have firmly reiterated the anti-monopoly position of 

Republican economic policy, and have strongly denied any intention 

of embarking on such a project. 

 

At any rate, the combination of rumors and part-truths requires 

a sober study of the position of Communism and the possible danger 

of its spread in Indonesia. It can definitely be stated that such con- 

tact with Communism as there is in Indonesia has been established 

through the Dutch and Australian Parties; no active, direct and con- 

tinuous contact with Russia has evidently been established as yet. 

Of the two regular Russian-trained Indonesian nationalists, one 

(Tanmalakka) has been in prison in Djokjakarta for his part in the 

abortive coup d’etat of June 1946, and the other (Alimin Prawi- 

rodirdjo) when last heard of was head of the Politburo of the Indo- 

nesian Communist Party. Educated at Moscow’s Far Eastern Univer- 

sity, Alimin is an important figure in the Communist Party and a 

man to be reckoned with, but his influence in the Republic is con- 

siderably less than that of the top men in the government already 

mentioned. 

 

That there is an inchoate Communist influence is undeniable, but 

that it has reached the proportions which certain right-wing and 

military circles have contended is unlikely. The Indonesian Com- 

munist Party (Partai Komunis Indonesia) when observed in 1947 

was still relatively moderate in outlook. It had been allied with the 

Sajap Kiri in support of a policy of compromise and moderation in 

negotiations with the Dutch. The P.K.I. has advocated a policy of 

reconstruction along the lines set by the Linggadjati Agreement of 

March 25, 1947, and has not advocated violence or extremism in the 

course of the negotiations in 1946 and 1947. 

 

It thus appears clear that the danger and this can hardly be over- 

emphasizedis not that a Communist menace, or anything resem- 

 

 

 

ECONOMIC PROBLEMS AND POLICIES 87 

 

bling it, now exists in Indonesia, but that without an end to the 

political strife and economic isolation, and without a continued ex- 

pression of America’s interest in and sympathy towards the new Re- 

public, 20 the Republican Government might be forced to seek its 

friends and its support wherever it can find them, not only in India 

and the Arab League and the countries in close proximity to Indo- 

nesia, but eventually perhaps in Russia as well. The situation is not 

unique; we are becoming well-versed in dealing with matters of this 

type within the framework of the current w T orld-poIitical dilemma. 

The Republic’s economic program is an ambitious one, and its 

implementation constitutes one of the major tasks for the new 

Government. It may be that with the extreme shortage of techni- 

cians and trained administrators at the helm, the program is too 

ambitious. Nevertheless, the contribution which the United States 

can exert, in terms of material aid and economic advice, to the 

successful working out of the Republic’s economic plans, can be 

vital. 21 But while aid and technical advice from the United States 

can certainly be of great service to the Republic, it is obvious that 

Indonesia’s problems will not be solved through the expediency of 

foreign aid alone. Fundamentally, the problem of establishing a 

sound economic and political structure in Indonesia must be solved 

by the Indonesians themselves. Foreign aid can help, but it cannot